Siemens Siprotec 5 Catalog Ed3.0

SIPROTEC 5 for every application and requirement
SIPROTEC 5 Devices
Protection, Automation and Monitoring
Catalog SIPROTEC 5.01 Edition 3
www.siemens.com/siprotec
Overview of documentation
SIPROTEC 5
catalog
'HYLFH
PDQXDOV
+DUGZDUH
PDQXDO
2SHUDWLQJ
PDQXDO
6,3527(&',*6,
7XWRULDO
6HOHFWLRQ*XLGH
IRU6,3527(&DQG
5H\UROOH
&RPPXQLFDWLRQ
SURWRFROPDQXDOV
3URGXFW
LQIRUPDWLRQ
(QJLQHHULQJ
*XLGH
2QOLQHKHOS',*6,
2QOLQHKHOSGHYLFHV
Overview of documentation for the SIPROTEC 5 system
SIPROTEC 5 catalog
Product information
The catalog describes the system features and the devices

of SIPROTEC 5.
The product information includes general information about

device installation, technical data, limit values for input and
output modules, and conditions when preparing for operation.
This document is provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device.
Selection guide for SIPROTEC and Reyrolle

The selection guide offers an overview of the device series
of the Siemens protection devies, and a device selection table.
Device manuals
The device manuals describe the functions and applications
of a specic SIPROTEC 5 device. The printed manual and the
online help for the device have the same informational structure.
Hardware manual
The hardware manual describes the hardware components and
device combinations of the SIPROTEC 5 device family.
Operating manual
The operating manual describes the basic principles and
procedures for operating and assembling the devices of the
SIPROTEC 5 device family.
Communication protocol manuals
The communication protocol manuals include a description
of specic protocols for communication within the SIPROTEC 5
device family and with higher-level control centers.
Engineering Guide
The Engineering Guide describes the important steps of Engineering with DIGIS 5. The Engineering Guide offers information
on how to load a conguration to a SIPROTEC 5 device and how
to update the device functionality of a SIPROTEC 5 device.
DIGSI 5 online help
The DIGSI 5 online help contains a help package for DIGSI 5
and CFC. The help package for DIGSI 5 includes a description
of the basic operation of software, the DIGSI principles and
editors. The help package for CFC includes an introduction to
CFC programming, basic examples of working with CFC, and
a reference chapter with all the CFC blocks available for the
SIPROTEC 5 range.
Online help devices
The online help for devices has the same information structure
as the device manual.
SIPROTEC 5 / DIGSI 5 Tutorial
The tutorial on the DVD contains brief information about
important product features, more detailed information about the
individual technical areas, as well as operating sequences with
tasks based on practical operation and a brief explanation of
SIPROTEC 5 and DIGSI 5.
2 SIPROTEC 5 Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring Siemens SIPROTEC 5.01 Edition 3
Contents
SIPROTEC 5
Devices
Protection, Automation
and Monitoring
Catalog SIP 5.01 Edition 3
Invalid: Edition 2
SIPROTEC 5 System
Editorial / SIPROTEC 5 System
1.1
Innovation Highlights
1.2
Functional Integration
1.3
Hardware
1.4
Engineering
1.5
Communication
1.6
IEC 61850 Simply Usable
1.7
Test and Diagnostics
1.8
Safety Concept
1.9
Devices
Device Types
2.1
Relay Selection Guide
2.2
Application Examples
2.3
Overcurrent Protection SIPROTEC 7SJ82, 7SJ85
2.4
Line Protection
Distance protection
SIPROTEC 7SA82, 7SA86, 7SA87
Line differential protection
SIPROTEC 7SD82, 7SD86, 7SD87
Combined line differential and distance protection
SIPROTEC 7SL82, 7SL86, 7SL87
2.5
Breaker management
SIPROTEC 7VK87
Overcurrent protection
SIPROTEC 7SJ86
The products and systems described in this catalog

are manufactured and sold according to a certied
management system (acc. to ISO 9001, ISO 14001
and BS OHSAS 18001).
Transformator Protection
SIPROTEC 7UT82, 7UT85, 7UT86, 7UT87
2.6
Motor Protection SIPROTEC 7SK82, 7SK85
2.7
Busbar Protection SIPROTEC 7SS85
2.8
Bay Controller SIPROTEC 6MD85, 6MD86
2.9
Fault Recorder SIPROTEC 7KE85
2.10
Appendix
DIGSI 5 Variants and System Requirements
3.1
Connection Variants
3.2
Connection Diagrams
3.3
Grouping Measured Values
3.4
Technical Data
3.5
Spare Parts / Accessories
3.6
Legal Notice
3.7
SIPROTEC 5 Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring Siemens SIPROTEC 5.01 Edition 3 3
The SIPROTEC 5 System

Introduction
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
Editorial
SIPROTEC has been a recognized brand leader in digital protection and eld devices on the energy market for decades. The
Siemens high-performance SIPROTEC devices cover the entire
power spectrum and can be implemented in a wide range of
elds from power generation to very high voltage transmission and distribution network applications.
Smart automation for transmission grids is the Siemens
response to the present and future challenges to achieve a
reliable and efcient energy supply. SIPROTEC 5 is an active
component of the energy-efcient smart grid and an important
building block in the complex distributed energy supply
systems and networks solutions.
The next generation of SIPROTEC devices, SIPROTEC 5, is based
on the proven features of SIPROTEC 4 to provide you with a
new, modern platform including both hardware and software.
This platform offers an excellent solution to the challenges
associated with evolving grid structures and workows. The
quality, reliability and proven functions of the former system
have been preserved. Innovative approaches including holistic
workow, safety and security, and network stability monitoring
(PMU functionality) have been added.
The pioneering system architecture places you in full control of
switchgear communications. A powerful, reliable communication infrastructure, combined with the exible engineering
capabilities serves as the basis for monitoring and controlling of
distributed, decentralized systems. Seamless communications is
the central component of the SIPROTEC 5 system architecture
to provide exibility, safety and security in the automated
distributed network solutions.
With SIPROTEC 5, you are at the beginning of a new generation
of intelligent, digital multifunction eld devices. The new
operating tool DIGSI 5 offers individual support for you
handles your specic workow requirements, from system
design to device selection and testing, covering the entire device
lifecycle. The new tool offers cost savings over the entire
lifecycle without compromising safety and system availability.
With the new SIPROTEC 5 generation, you are well equipped to
meet the growing economic and reliability demands imposed
on your networks. The philosophy of SIPROTEC 5 is reected in
the modularity and exibility of its hardware and software
components. Perfectly tailored t the custom t for your
switchgear and specications for the application and standardization of energy automation.
Ingo Erkens
General Manager
Energy Management
Energy Automation Products
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
1.1 / 4 SIPROTEC 5 Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring Siemens SIPROTEC 5.01 Edition 3

Solutions for todays and future power supply systems
for more than 100 years
1
1.1
SIPROTEC has established itself on the energy market for

decades as a powerful and complete system family of
numerical protection relays and bay controllers from
Siemens.
1.2
1.3
SIPROTEC protection relays from Siemens can be consistently used throughout all applications in medium and high
voltage. With SIPROTEC, operators have their systems rmly
and safely under control, and have the basis to implement
cost-efcient solutions for all duties in modern, intelligent
and smart grids. Users can combine the units of the
different SIPROTEC device series at will for solving manifold
duties because SIPROTEC stands for continuity, openness
and future-proof design.
SIPROTEC protection relays have approvals from many users

for use in their power systems. The devices have also been
certied by independent test institutes and universities
(KEMA, EPRI, LOYD, UR Laboratories).
1.5
1.6
1.7
LSP3.01-0003.eps
As the innovation driver and trendsetter in the eld of

protection systems for 100 years, Siemens helps system
operators to design their grids in an intelligent, ecological,
reliable and efcient way, and to operate them economically. As a pioneer, Siemens has decisively inuenced the development of numerical protection systems (Fig. 1.1 / 2). The
rst application went into operation in Wrzburg, Germany,
in 1977. Consistent integration of protection and control
functions for all SIPROTEC devices was the innovation step
in the 90ies. After release of the communication standard
IEC 61850 in the year 2004, Siemens was the rst manufacturer worldwide to put a system with this communication
standard into operation. In the meantime we have delivered
more than 400,000 devices with IEC 61850 included.
1.4
1.8
1.9
2
Fig. 1.1/ 1 SIPROTEC family
2.1
2.2
How can system operators benet from this experience?

Proven and complete applications
2.3
Easy integration into your system
2.4
Highest quality of hardware and software

Excellent operator friendliness of devices and tools
Easy data exchange between applications
Extraordinary consistency between product and systemengineering
2.5
Reduced complexity by easy operation

Siemens as a reliable, worldwide operating partner.
Youll nd the information of the SIPROTEC 4 devices and
the devices of SIPROTEC Compact in the subcatalogs
or under: www.siemens.com/siprotec
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
LSP3.01-0004.eps
3.3
Fig. 1.1 / 2 SIPROTEC Pioneer over generations
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
SIPROTEC 5 Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring Siemens SIPROTEC 5.01 Edition 3 1.1/5
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
SIPROTEC 5 the new benchmark for protection,

automation and monitoring of grids
The SIPROTEC 5 series is based on the long eld experience of
the SIPROTEC device series, and has been especially designed
for the new requirements of modern systems. For this purpose,
SIPROTEC 5 is equipped with extensive functionalities and
device types. With the holistic and consistent engineering tool
DIGSI 5, a solution has also been provided for the increasingly
complex processes, from the design via the engineering phase
up to the test and operation phase.
LSP3.01-0013.eps
Thanks to the high modularity of hardware and software, the

functionality and hardware of the devices can be tailored to the
requested application and adjusted to the continuously changing requirements throughout the entire life cycle.
Besides the reliable and selective protection and the complete
automation function, SIPROTEC 5 offers an extensive database
for operation and monitoring of modern power supply systems.
Synchrophasors (PMU), power quality data and extensive
operational equipment data are part of the scope of supply.
Fig. 1.1 / 3 SIPROTEC 5 modular hardware
Powerful protection functions guarantee the safety of the

system operators equipment and employees
Individually congurable devices save money on initial
investment as well as storage of spare parts, maintenance,
expansion and adjustment of your equipment
Arc protection, detection of transient ground fault and
process bus simply integrable and retrottable
Clear and easy-to-use of devices and software thanks to userfriendly design
Increase of reliability and quality of the engineering process
High safety by consistent implementation of Safety and
Security
LSP3.01-0014.eps
2.5
Powerful communication components guarantee safe and

effective solutions
Full compatibility between IEC 61850 Editions 1 and 2
Integrated switch for low-cost and redundant optical and
electrical Ethernet rings
2.6
Ethernet redundancy protocols RSTP, PRP and HSR for highest

availability
2.7
Efcient operating concepts by exible engineering of

IEC 61850 Edition 2
2.8
2.9
2.10
Fig. 1.1 / 4 SIPROTEC 5 modular process connection
Comprehensive database for monitoring of modern power

grids
Optimal smart automation platform for grids
based on integrated synchrophasor measurement units (PMU)
and power quality functions.
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
LSP3.01-0012.eps
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Fig. 1.1 / 5 Application in a high-voltage power system
Holistic workow
The tools for end-to-end engineering from system design to
operation will make your work easier throughout the entire
process.
The highlight of SIPROTEC 5 is the greater-than-ever emphasis
on daily ease of operation. SIPROTEC 5 provides support along
all the steps in the engineering workow, allowing for system
view management and conguration down to the details of
individual devices, saving time and cost without compromising
quality (Fig. 1.2 / 1).
Holistic workow in SIPROTEC 5 means:
Integrated, consistent system and device engineering from
the single line diagram of the unit all the way to device
parameterization
For you, Holistic workow in SIPROTEC 5 means:

An end-to-end tool from system design to operation even
allowing crossing of functional and departmental boundaries
saves time, assures data security and transparency throughout
the entire lifecycle of your system.
Integrated tools for testing during engineering,

commissioning, and for simulating operational scenarios,
e.g., grid disruptions or switching operations.
1.2
1.3
Individually congurable devices provide you with cost-effective solutions that match your needs precisely throughout the
entire lifecycle.
1.4
SIPROTEC 5 sets new standards in cost savings and availability

with its innovative modular and exible hardware, functionality
and communication. SIPROTEC 5 provides a perfectly tailored t
for your switchgear and applications unparalleled by any other
system.
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
Operation
t%PDVNFOUBUJPO
t5FTUJOH
t.BJOUFOBODF
Design
t"QQMJDBUJPO
t4QFDJmDBUJPO
2
2.1
2.2
Holistic
Workow
Easily adaptable library of application templates for the most

frequently used applications
Open interfaces for seamless integration into your process
environment
1.1
Perfectly tailored t
Simple, intuitive graphical linking of primary and secondary

equipment
Manufacturer-independent tool for easy system engineering
Commissioning
t5FTU
t%PDVNFOUBUJPO
Fig. 1.2 / 1
2.3
Implementation
t%FWJDFTFMFDUJPO
t1MBOOJOH
t&OHJOFFSJOH
t4FUUJOHT
End-to-end tools from design to operation
2.4
4*1&/BJ
With SIPROTEC 5, Siemens is writing yet another chapter in the

successful history of protection technology, representing the
5th digital generation and over 100 years of experience in
protection. SIPROTEC 5 represents the next logical step in this
development. With SIPROTEC 5, we have combined a functionality that has been proven and rened over years with a
high-performance and exible new platform, extended with
trendsetting innovations for present and future demands.
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Fig. 1.2 / 2
SIPROTEC 5 innovation highlights
3.7
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
Perfectly tailored t with SIPROTEC 5 means:
Designed to communicate with SIPROTEC 5 means:
Modular system design in hardware, software and

communication ensures the perfect t for your needs
Adaptation to the topology of your communication structure

using settings (ring, star, network, )
Functional integration of a wide range of applications, such

as protection, control, measurement, power quality or fault
recording
Scalable redundancy in hardware and software (protocols) to

match your requirements
1.4
The same expansion and communication modules for all

devices in the family
1.5
Innovative terminal technology ensures easy assembly and

interchangeability with the highest possible degree of safety
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Identical functions and consistent interfaces throughout the

entire system family mean less training requirement and
increased safety, e.g., an identical automatic reclosing (AR)
for line protection devices 7SD8, 7SA8, 7SL8
Functions can be individually customized by editing for your
specic requirements
Innovations are made available to all devices at the same time
and can easily be retrotted as needed via libraries.
For you, perfectly tailored t with SIPROTEC 5 means:
Individually congurable devices save you money in the initial
investment, spare parts storage, maintenance, extending and
adapting your system.
Designed to communicate
The trendsetting system architecture places communication
rmly under your control. Powerful, exible, and above all
reliable communication is the most important prerequisite for
distributed and decentralized systems such as smart grids. In
the system architecture of SIPROTEC 5 we have placed immense
importance on communication, and we have gone to exceptional lengths to ensure that you are ideally equipped for the
communication demands of today and the future.
Multiple communication channels with various higher-level

systems
Pluggable, upgradable communication modules
Hardware modules decoupled from communication protocols
2 independent protocols on one module
Extensive routines for testing connections, functions and
operating workows
Expansion module for process bus communication.
For you, designed to communicate in SIPROTEC 5 means:
Communication as an integral component of the system
architecture provides you with the exibility and safeguards
you need to design and implement highly operable and reliable
networked systems.
Safety and security inside
Multilayer safety mechanisms in all links of the system safety
chain provide you with the highest possible level of safety and
availability.
Safety for personnel and equipment, and also ultimate availability, are all the top priorities. As the plant landscape systems
become more open and complex, the conventional security
mechanisms are no longer adequate. For this reason, a security
concept has been integrated in the SIPROTEC 5 device architecture that is designed to address these multidimensional aspects
in a holistic approach.
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Fig. 1.2 / 3 SIPROTEC 5 device with extensive communication interfaces
Safety and security inside with SIPROTEC 5 means:
Proven functions for protecting systems and personnel,
continuously developed over ve generations
Long-lasting, rugged hardware (housings, assemblies, plugs)
and sophisticated layout of the entire electronics for highest
resilience against voltage, EMC, climate and mechanical stress
Sophisticated self-monitoring routines identify and report
device malfunctions immediately and reliably
Conformance with the stringent Cyber Security requirements
according to the user guidelines and standards such as the
BDEW Whitepaper and NERC CIP
Encryption along the entire communication segment between
DIGSI 5 and the device, conforming to the recommendations
of IEC 62351
Automatic recording of access attempts and security-critical
operations on the devices and systems.
For you, safety and security inside with SIPROTEC 5 means:
With the multilayer safety mechanisms integrated in
SIPROTEC 5, your equipment and systems will have the highest
possible degree of security and reliability, conforming to the
most recent requirements of international standards and
technologies.
Smart automation for transmission grids
The extraordinary range of integrated functionalities for all the
demands of your smart grid.
Climate change and dwindling fossil fuels are forcing a total
re-evaluation of the energy supply industry, from generation
to distribution and consumption. This is having fundamental
effects on the structure and operation of the power grids.
Smart automation is a major real-time component designed

to preserve the stability of these grids and at the same time
conserve energy and reduce costs.
With SIPROTEC 5, you have the optimum smart automation
platform for your smart grids.
1
1.1
1.2
Smart automation for transmission grids with SIPROTEC 5 means:

Open, scalable architecture for IT integration and new functions
The latest standards in the area of communication and
Cyber Security
Smart functions, e.g., for network operation, analysis of
faults or power quality (power systems monitoring, power
control unit, fault location)
Integrated automation with optimized logic modules based
on the IEC 61131-3 standard
Highly precise acquisition and processing of process values
and transmission to other components in the smart grid
Protection, automation and monitoring in the smart grid.
1.3
For you, smart automation for transmission grids with

SIPROTEC 5 means:
This is the rst device that has been designed specically to

meet the requirements of the modern grid and offers the
automation platform and future compatibility for smart grid
projects.
The common features of all ve innovation highlights
described are IEC 61850 Edition 2 and its thoroughly designed,
user-oriented implementation in SIPROTEC 5.
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Fig. 1.2 / 4 SIPROTEC 5 as a system component of the smart grid
3.7
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
IEC 61850 Simply usable
IEC 61850 Simply usable with SIPROTEC 5 means:
Siemens, the pioneer of IEC 61850 makes the full potential of

this global standard simply usable for you.
A stand alone IEC 61850 sytem conguration tool allow IEC

61850 conguration of SIPROTEC 5, SIPROTEC 4 amd multivendor IEDs, also including process bus engineering
The IEC 61850 standard is more than just a substation automation protocol. It comprehensively denes data types, functions
and communication in station networks. In Edition 2, the
inuence of the standard is extended to more domains and
applications of the energy supply industry.
Siemens was actively involved in the process of standardization
from Edition 1 to Edition 2, and with the largest number of
completed installations in the world, our experience as a
manufacturer in the eld is unsurpassed. Jointly with key
customers, we designed its implementation in SIPROTEC 5,
paying close attention to interoperability, exibility and
compatibility between Editions 1 and 2.
Besides IEC 61850, SIPROTEC 5 also supports other standards
such as IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, DNP 3 (seriell or
TCP) or Modbus TCP.
2.3
Open interfaces in accordance with IEC 61850 guarantee

manufacturer-independent system conguration and
interoperability
Highly usable presentation of the complex IEC 61850 data
model
Consistent system and device engineering from the single
line diagram of the unit all the way to device parameterization
Flexible object modeling freedom in addressing objects
and exible communication services assure the highest
possible degree of customization and effective exchange and
expansion concepts
Optimization of handling based on many projects and close
cooperation with customers from all application areas
Protection settings over IEC 61850
2.1
2.2
Full compatibility with Edition 1 and 2
Handling of multiple communication modules in Edition 2.
Meet the standard
IEC 61850
2.4
For you, IEC 61850 simply usable with SIPROTEC 5 means:

The implementation of IEC 61850 Edition 2 unleashes the full
potential of this standard by optimally supporting your
operational needs and simplifying handling.
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Fig. 1.2/ 5
IEC 61850 certicate Edition 2
3.7
Perfectly tailored t
Due to the modular construction of their hardware and
software, and their functional integration, SIPROTEC 5
devices are well suited for all tasks in the electricity transmission and distribution grid.
The SIPROTEC 5 devices can be used for the following

applications:
Protection
1.1
Control and automation
1.2
Monitoring
Data acquisition and recording
1.3
Communication and Cyber Security
1.4
Test
1.5
1.6
Functional integration
1.7
Due to the modular design of its hardware and software and the
powerful engineering tool DIGSI 5, SIPROTEC 5 is ideally suited
for protection, automation, measurement and monitoring tasks
in the electrical power systems.
Control
52
2.1
Automation
2.2
Monitoring
2.3
Data acquisition and

recording
SIPROTEC 5 provides an extensive, precise data acquisition and

bay level recording for these functions. By combining device
functionality with communication exibility, SIPROTEC 5 has
the ability to meet a wide range of todays applications and
specic project specications as well as the functional expansion
capability to adapt to changing needs in the future.
With SIPROTEC 5 you can improve the safety and reliability
of your application. Fig. 1.3 / 1 shows the possible functional
expansion of a SIPROTEC 5 device.
1.9
Protection
2.4
Communication
Cyber Security
Test
SIP5-0005.EN.ai
The devices are not only pure protection and control equipment,
their performance enables them to assure functional integration
of desired depth and scope. For example, they can also serve
to perform monitoring, phasor measurement, fault recording,
a wide range of measurement functions and much more,
concurrently, and they have been designed to facilitate future
functionality expansion.
1.8
SIPROTEC 5
2.5
Fig. 1.3 / 1 Possible functional expansion of SIPROTEC 5 devices
Faster results with application templates

Application templates allow you to fast track your solution.
A library of application templates is available that can be tailored
to the specic functional scope for typical applications.
Fig. 1.3 / 2 shows an example of a system conguration. Note
that the functions in the application template are combined in
functional groups (FG). The functional groups (FG) correspond
to the primary components (protection object: line; switching
device: circuit breaker), thereby simplifying the direct reference
to the actual system. For example, if your switchgear includes
2 circuit breakers, this is also represented by 2 circuit breaker
functional groups a schematic map of your actual system.
Optimizing the application template

for your specic application
You can adapt the application templates to your application and
create your own in-house standards. The required number of
protection stages or zones can be increased without difculty.
Additional functions can be loaded into the device directly from
an extensive function library.
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
SIPROTEC 5 Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring Siemens SIPROTEC 5.01 Edition 3 1.3 / 1
Perfectly tailored t Protection
1
1.1
$4$
1.2
03
,SK
1.3
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
,SK
49
1.4
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU$4$
,SK
50BF
Ctrl
87N
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
&%
%,
%2
1.5
1.6
03
,SK
)* 7UDQVIRUPHU
)* 7UDQVIQHXWUDOSRLQW
,SK
1.7
50N
51N
87
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
1.8
1.9
03
,SK
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
,SK
50
2.1
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU%4$
,SK
50BF
51
Ctrl
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
%4$
&%
2.2
)*
03
%,
%2
4$ &%
&WUO
2.3
2.4
Fig. 1.3 / 2
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5

%)

11

1
2YHUORDGSURWHFWLRQ
&LUFXLWEUHDNHUIDLOXUHSURWHFWLRQ
2YHUFXUUHQWSURWHFWLRQ
2YHUFXUUHQWSURWHFWLRQJURXQG
'LIIHUHQWLDOSURWHFWLRQ
*URXQGIDXOWGLIIHUHQWLDOSURWHFWLRQ
Protection of a transformer
Instrument and protection-class current transformer

The exibility of the SIPROTEC 5 family enables even greater
functional integration and parallel processing of an extremely
wide range of functions. The modular hardware enables an
application-specic device conguration. If you also want to use
the phasor measurement function, i.e., the highly precise acquisition of current and voltage phasors and the variables derived
from them such as power and frequency, this function can be
assigned to the measuring input. Another additional application
is monitoring power quality characteristics.
The exible communication among the devices enables them to

be combined in various communication topologies. In this context, the widely used Ethernet-based communications standard
IEC 61850 offers many advantages.
Fig. 1.3 / 3 shows the connection to a protection-class and

instrument current transformer for a feeder. The necessary
protection functions are assigned to the protection-class current
transformer and the measurement functions are assigned to the
instrument transformer according to the application.
The highly precise measured values and status information
provided by the SIPROTEC 5 devices can be transmitted over
the high-performance communication system to automation
systems such as a substation and power systems control or
central analysis systems (e.g., SIGUARD PDP). In particular, the
control and monitoring of smart grids require information
from power generators (conventional or renewable energies)
and from consumers (line branches). This essential information
may be measured values, switching statuses, or messages from
protection and monitoring functions. In addition to performing
local protection, control and monitoring tasks, the SIPROTEC 5
devices are an excellent data source.
SIPROTEC 5
Measuring functions
52
IABC,N
0.2 FS10
IABC,N
10 P15
(I, V, f, P, Q, cos ;
Phasor Measurement,
Power Quality)
Protection functions
VABC
VN
Fig. 1.3 / 3
Connection of eld devices to instrument and

protection-class current transformers
3.6
3.7
SIP5-0017.EN.ai
2.5
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
%LQDU\LQSXW
%LQDU\RXWSXW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
&RQWURO
%,
%2
Perfectly tailoired t Protection
Protection
SIPROTEC 5 provides all the necessary protection functions to

address reliability and security of power transmission systems.
System congurations with multiple busbars and breaker-and-ahalf schemes are both supported. The functions are based
on decades of experience in putting systems into operation,
including feedback and suggestions from our customers.
1.1
1.2
SIPROTEC 5
1.3
The modular, functional structure of SIPROTEC 5 allows

exceptional exibility and enables the creation of a protection
functionality that is specic to the conditions of the system
while also being capable of further changes in the future.

&RQWURO
Automation
Monitoring
In the following segment available device functions of

SIPROTEC 5 will be described.

Recording
Communication
Cyber Security
7HVW
Fig. 1.3 / 4
Possible functional expansion of SIPROTEC 5 devices
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Description of the device functions
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
Distance protection (ANSI 21, 21N) - classic method

SIPROTEC 5 provides 6-system distance protection featuring all
well-proven algorithms of previously supplied SIPROTEC protection devices.
By parallel calculation and monitoring of all six impedance
loops, a high degree of sensitivity and selectivity is achieved for
all types of faults. All methods of neutral-point treatment (compensated, isolated, solid or low-resistive grounded) are reliably
dealt with. 1-pole and 3-pole tripping is possible depending
on the specic device type. The distance protection is suitable
for cables and overhead lines with or without series capacitor
compensation.
The device provides quadrilateral as well as MHO. The characteristics can be used separately for phase and ground faults.
Resistance ground faults can, for instance, be covered with
the quadrilateral characteristic and phase faults with the MHO
characteristic.
2.1
The evaluation of healthy voltages and the use of a voltage

memory make optimal direction determination possible.
2.2
Zone characteristic quadrilateral
2.3
The quadrilateral characteristic permits separate setting of the

reactance X and the resistance R. The resistance section R can
be set separately for faults with and without earth involvement.
This characteristic has therefore an optimal performance for
detecting high-resistive faults.
2.4
2.5
Applications with ground fault dependent reactance reach per

zone can be covered as well by simply using additional distance
zones. Each distance zone can be set separately to operate for
ground faults only, for phase faults only or for all fault types.
The distance zones can be set forward, backward or nondirectional.
Zone-characteristic MHO
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
With the MHO characteristic, the MHO circle expansion guarantees safe and selective operation for all types of faults, even
for faults close to the zone boundary. The circle expands to the
source impedance but never more than the selected impedance
reach. The example in the gure (Fig. 1.3 / 5) shows the characteristic for a forward fault.
3.3
3.4
Four pickup methods
3.5
The following pickup methods can be employed alternatively:
3
3.1
3.2
3.6
3.7
pickup V / I /
Impedance pickup Z<
Load zone
In order to guarantee reliable discrimination between load operation and short-circuit especially on long, high loaded lines
the relay is equipped with a selectable load encroachment
characteristic. Impedances within this load encroachment characteristic prevent the distance zones from unwanted tripping.
Absolute phase-selectivity
The distance protection function incorporates a well-proven,
highly sophisticated phase selection algorithm. The pickup of
healthy loops is reliably eliminated to prevent the adverse inuence of currents and voltages in the healthy loops. This phase
selection algorithm achieves appropriate tripping decisions and
correct distance measurement in a wide application range.
Arrangements for breaker-and-a-half schemes
When the cores of the two CT sets are connected in parallel
(with suitable polarity), the resultant measured current will
be the sum of the two currents owing into the CTs. This
sum-current corresponds to the current owing into the feeder
and is therefore used for the protection and other functions to
represent the feeder current. This method is commonly used.
SIPROTEC 5 devices provide sufcient measuring inputs to
connect two or several sets of CTs separately to the device. In
this case the summation is carried out in software internally. The
distance protection function detects possible saturation of only
one of the CTs and can thus prevent unwanted pickup in case
of an external error with high through-fault current. Through
the separately measured currents, separate circuit-breaker
failure protection functions can be activated for both switches.
Furthermore, the separately measured currents allow a fully
adequate differential protection for the "end zone" between
the current transformers upon disconnection of the feeder (see
STUB differential protection ANSI 87 STUB).
Forward
Line
Z3
Z2
Appropriate number of distance zones

The number of distance zones can be freely adapted according
to the application requirements. For functions using a
dependent zone, such as signal comparison, all parameterized
zones from the distance protection are available (application
of the zone in distance protection itself is not affected by this).
Each distance zone has its own timer, separately dedicated to
1-phase and 3-phase short circuits. Thus, the new exibility of
the SIPROTEC 5 device family provides optimal adaptation to
each application. The distance protection will always provide the
exact number of required distance zones.
2.10
Voltage-dependent and phase angle dependent overcurrent
Z1B
Reverse
Z1
Line
Dist
Load
Forward
Overcurrent pickup I >>
Reverse
SIP5 G-0005.EN.ai
Voltage-dependent overcurrent pickup V / I

Fig. 1.3 / 5
Quadrilateral characteristics, with 4 zones as an example
Parallel-line compensation
The inuence of wrong distance measurement due to parallel
lines can be compensated by feeding the neutral-point current
of the parallel line to the relay. Parallel line compensation can be
used for distance protection as well as for fault location.
Load compensation
The distance protection function provides measures to compensate the load inuence on the reach measurement.
protection reach. The reactance method compensates this

inuence with adjustable compensation angles.
The Distance protection function with reactance method (RMD):
1.1
Works in systems with grounded neutral point;
1.2
Is a form of selective short-circuit protection for lines and

cables supplied from one or more end(s) in radial, looped or
meshed systems;
Can be used as backup protection for busbars, transformers
and other lines
1.3
1.4
1.5
Elimination of interference signals
Is suited for use at all voltage levels.
Digital lters render the unit immune to signals contained in the

measured values. In particular, the inuence of DC components,
capacitive voltage transformers and frequency changes is considerably reduced. A special method of measurement is employed
in order to assure protection selectivity during saturation of the
current transformers.
Main protection and backup protection
Measuring-voltage failure detection
The polygonal tripping characteristic allows the separate setting

of reactance X and fault resistances RF. Each distance zone can
be congured only for ground faults, only for phase faults or for
all fault types. All distance zones can be set forward, reverse or
non-directional.
The RMD function calculates up to 7 impedance loops A-gnd,

B-gnd, C-gnd, A-B, B-C, C-A, and A-B-C. The pickup method is
impedance pickup Z<. Analyzing quadrature voltages, using the
voltage memory and analyzing delta quantities and symmetrical
components enable the best possible direction determination.
2.3
Tripping of the distance protection is blocked automatically in

the event of failure of the measuring voltage, thus preventing
unwanted tripping. Distance protection is blocked if one of the
voltage monitoring functions or the auxiliary contact of the
voltage-transformer circuit-breaker operates and in this case
the EMERGENCY protection can be activated (denite-time
overcurrent protection).
Distance protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
(ANSI 21, 21N)
Under extreme conditions, load currents and high fault resistances may inuence selectivity. The distance protection with
reactance method (RMD) decreases unfavorable inuences of
high fault resistances under high load.
If the system has inhomogeneities, e.g. in case of differing

source impedance angles, this may also inuence the distance
Line
Z4
Z1B
Z2
Z1
The number of distance zones can be freely adjusted according

to the requirements of the relevant application.
Fig. 1.3 / 6
1.9
2.1
2.2
2.4
2.5
The adjustable load range serves to securely distinguish between load operation and short-circuit, especially on long, highly
loaded lines. Any impedance within this load range will not lead
to unwanted tripping in the distance zones.
Load
The distance protection function with reactance method (RMD)

contains a sophisticated algorithm for adaptive loop selection.
Various loop selection criteria are processed simultaneously. The
loop selection criteria use jump detection, delta quantities detection, symmetrical components as well as current, voltage and
impedance comparison procedures. Tripping fault-free phases
by the negative impact of the short-circuit currents and voltages
in other phases is therefore reliably avoided. The algorithm for
adaptive loop selection enables correct tripping decisions and
correct distance measurement over a wide range of applications.
SIP5 G-0006.EN.ai
Provisions for 1 circuit-breaker applications
Z3 (reverse)
1.8
Selectable number of distance zones
Absolute phase selectivity
Z5
Load
Polygonal zone characteristic
1.7
Load zone
Load compensation is part of the principle
The Distance protection function with reactance method (RMD)

can be used as an alternative or in addition to the distance
protection function with classic method.
1.6
MHO zone characteristics, with 6 zone as an example
For 1 circuit-breaker applications, the RMD function is as

suitable as the classic distance protection function. For further
details please refer to chapter Distance protection
(ANSI 21, 21N) - classic method.
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Parallel line compensation
3.5
Inuences on the distance measurements due to parallel lines

can be compensated by the RMD function by acquiring the
parallel line ground current.
3.6
3.7
Eliminating disturbance values
1.3
Digital lters make the RMD function insensitive to disturbance

values in the measured values. Especially the inuence of
direct current components, capacitive voltage transformers and
frequency changes is severely reduced. A special measuring
procedure is used to maintain the protection selectivity in case
of current transformer saturation.
1.4
Measuring voltage monitoring
1.1
1.2
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
In order to prevent inadvertent tripping, the distance protection

function automatically blocks in case of a failure of the
measuring-circuit voltage. If one of the voltage monitoring
functions or of the auxiliary contact of the voltage transformer
circuit breaker picks up, the RMD function is blocked and can
activate the emergency denite-time overcurrent protection.
Impedance Protection for Transformers (ANSI 21T)
SIPROTEC 5 offers 6-system impedance protection with up to 4
impedance zones, especially designed as backup protection for
power transformers.
The function
protects transformers as backup protection for transformer
differential protection
is used as backup protection for the block transformer and the
generator in block-unit power stations
functions as backup protection in the event of energy recovery
to faults in the upstream electrical power system beyond a
transformer.
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
The parallel calculation and monitoring of all six impedance

loops enables high sensitivity and selectivity for all fault situations. Ground loops are calculated with phase voltage and phase
current as a standard. Ground current is not present in most
cases and will therefore not be calculated.
If the minimum current criterion is fullled and an impedance
loop is within a congured impedance zone, this phase is considered picked up. Impedance is measured over a wide frequency
range by using the frequency-adjusted sampled values. This is
advantageous for island networks or block-unit power stations,
for example, for start-up processes.
Polygonal zone characteristic
The polygonal tripping characteristic allows the separate setting
of reactance X and resistance R for phase-to-ground loops and
phase-to-phase loops. The polygonal characteristic is a rectangle
in the impedance level. Within the function, a maximum of 4
impedance zones can be operated at the same time. They can
be set forward, reverse or non-directional. Each impedance zone
has its own timer.
Direction determination
The direction is determined either using a stored prefault voltage
or negative-sequence system variables.
Measuring voltage monitoring
blocks the impedance protection and can activate the emergency denite-time overcurrent protection.
Overexcitation protection (ANSI 24)
Overexcitation protection is used to detect impermissibly high
induction in generators and transformers. This function protects
these equipment from excessive thermal loads.
The induction is detected indirectly by evaluation of the V / f
ratio. An overvoltage results in excessive exciting currents and
underfrequency results in higher magnetic reversal losses.
There is a risk of overexcitation on disconnection from the
power system if the voltage or frequency control in the rest
of the system does not respond quickly enough or the power
unbalance is too great.
Within the function, no more than one stage with an inversetime, user-dened characteristic and two denite-time stages
can be operated at the same time.
Synchrocheck, synchronizing function (ANSI 25)
When two partial networks are closed with a control command
or 3-pole auto-reclosure of the circuit breaker, it must be ensured that the networks are synchronous with each other. For this
purpose, synchronization functionalities are provided.
The synchronization function can be used for synchronous
networks (electrically connected, no frequency difference)
and asynchronous networks (electrically separated, frequency
difference exists).
It has three modes:
Synchrocheck (monitoring of voltage, frequency, and
phase-angle difference)
Switching of synchronous networks (check for same
frequency, voltage and phase-angle difference, and for
continuity over a time window)
Switching of asynchronous networks (voltage and
frequency difference, connection at the point of
synchronization, taking the make-time of the circuit breaker
into account).
By evaluating the frequency difference, the function automatically switches between the modes for synchronous and
asynchronous networks. The synchrocheck function can be used
for pure monitoring without switching.
The relevant variables used for synchronization are sensed via
voltage transformers (positioned to the left and right of the
circuit breaker). Depending on the available number of voltage
transformer inputs, one or two synchronizing locations (circuit
breakers) can be applied.
Several functions can be used per device for which up to two
parameter sets (stages) can be applied for synchrochecks and
up to six parameter sets (stages) can be applied for the synchronization. Thus, the device can react to different environmentalconditions of the network always with the right synchronization
parameters.
In order to prevent inadvertent tripping, the impedance protection function automatically blocks in case of a failure of the
measuring-circuit voltage.
The pickup of one of the voltage monitoring functions or of
the auxiliary contact of the voltage transformer circuit breaker
Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27)
The undervoltage protection monitors the permissible voltage
range or protects equipment (plant parts and electrical
machines) against consequential damage from undervoltage.
It can be used in the network for decoupling or load shedding
tasks.
Various undervoltage protection functions are available.
By default, two stages are precongured. Up to three identical
stages are possible.
The power protection can be integrated into any automation

solution, for example, to monitor very specic power limits
(further logical processing in CFC).
The power protection function comes with one factory-set
stage each for the active and the reactive power. A maximum of
four active power stages and four reactive power stages can be
operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages are
structured identically.
The following functions are available:
Thresholds for exceedance or underrunning of the power lines

can be dened. The combination of the different stages via CFC
result in various applications.
Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage
Application examples
Optionally, measurement of phase-to-phase voltages or RMS

value phase-to-ground voltages
Detection of negative active power. In this case reversepowerprotection can be applied by using the CFC to link power
protection outputs to the Direct trip function.
Measuring methods: optionally, measurement of the fundamental component or of the effective value (True RMS).
Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage
2-pole short circuits or ground faults lead to an unbalanced
voltage collapse. In comparison with phase-related measuring
systems, these events inuence the positive-sequence voltage
minimally. This makes this function particularly suitable
for the assessment of stability problems.
Detection of capacitive reactive power. In the case of overvoltage being detected due to long lines under no-load conditions
it is possible to select the lines where capacitive reactive power
is measured.
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
Method of measurement: calculation of positive-sequence

voltage from the measured phase-to-ground voltages.
Undervoltage protection with any voltage
2.3
0
positive
negative
2.4
Capture of any 1-phase undervoltage with 3-phase voltage

measurement for special applications
Threshold value
Measuring methods: optionally, measurement of the fundamental component or of the effective value (True RMS).
2.5
SIP5 G-0011.EN.ai
Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection

(ANSI 27Q)
The undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection protects
the system for mains decoupling purposes. To prevent a voltage
collapse in energy systems, the generating side, e.g. a generator, must be equipped with voltage and frequency protection
devices. An undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection is
required at the supply system connection point. It detects critical
power system situations and ensures that the power generation
facility is disconnected from the mains. Furthermore, it ensures
that reconnection only takes place under stable power system
conditions. The associated criteria can be parameterized.
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
Threshold value
Power protection (ANSI 32, 37)
positive
0
The power protection works 3-phase and detects exceedance

or underrunning of the set effective power or reactive power
thresholds (see Fig. 1.3 / 7). Pre-dened power limits are monitored and corresponding warning alerts are issued.
negative
P
The power direction can be determined via angle measurement

of the active power. Thus feeding back in the network or at electric machines can be detected. Idling machines (motors, generators) are detected and can be shut down via an indication.
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
SIP5 G-0012.EN.ai
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Fig. 1.3 / 7
Active-power and reactive-power characteristics
3.7
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Undercurrent protection (ANSI 37)

The undercurrent protection detects disappearing or sinking
current ow. This may be caused by switching operations, e.g.
of a higher-level circuit breaker, or by falling loads, e.g. idling
pumps.
In either situation, it may be required to open the local circuit
breaker to avoid resulting damage. This is the task of the
undercurrent protection.
1.5
The function consists of an undercurrent stage with a denitetime delay. Up to two stages can be operated in parallel.
1.6
Optionally, the auxiliary contacts of the local circuit breaker can

be evaluated to avoid unwanted operation.
1.7
Temperature supervision (ANSI 38)
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
The temperatures (e.g. winding or oil temperatures) are acquired with an external temperature monitoring device. Typical
sensors are Pt 100, Ni 100 and Ni 120. The temperatures are
transmitted to the protection via serial interface or via Ethernet
interface and the temperature monitoring function monitors
whether they exceed set limits. There are two thresholds per
temperature measuring point. The function is designed so that
up to 12 temperatures can be processed. The function also
includes integrated broken-wire monitoring which sends alarms
referring to the measuring points.
Unbalanced-load protection (ANSI 46)
K =(
I N ,M
)2 t
constant of the machine (5 s to 40 s)
I2
negative sequence current
IN,M
nominal current of machine
2.9
The protection function determines the negative sequence

current out of phase currents. The negative sequence current
can be referred to the object nominal current or to the positive
sequence current (convenient for broken wire monitoring).
3.3
Protection of electrical machines following asymmetrical

loads that are caused by asymmetrical voltages or phase
currents (for example through a defective fuse).
The function comes factory-set with 1 stage. A maximum of 6
stages can be operated simultaneously. If the device is equipped
with the inrush-current detection function, the tripping stages
can be stabilized against tripping due to transformer inrush
currents.
Directional negative-sequence protection with denitetime delay (ANSI 46, 67)
This function serves as the reserve short-circuit protection for
asymmetrical faults.
With the negative-sequence system, various monitoring and
protection tasks can be realized:
Detection of phase conductor interruptions in the primary

system and in the current transformer secondary circuits
Indication of asymmetrical states in the energy system
Negative-sequence system overcurrent protection (ANSI 46)
3.2
Indication of unbalanced conditions in the energy system
Location of short circuits or reversals in the connections to

the current transformers
I2
2.8
3.1
Location of short circuits or reversals in the connections to

the current transformers
The following relation is the basis of the protection function:
2.7
Detection of phase current interruptions in the primary

system and in the current transformer secondary circuits
Detection of 1 or 2-phase short circuits in the network with a

higher sensitivity than in classic overcurrent protection
Additionally, the permanent additional unbalanced load is

monitored and an alarm is transmitted with a delay if this load is
exceeded.
2.10
Detection of 1 or 2-phase short circuits in the network with a

higher sensitivity than in classic overcurrent protection
(Setting lower than the object nominal current)
The protection function evaluates the negative sequence current

and prevents the thermal overload of the rotor of electric machines (generators, motors). The thermal behavior is emulated by
the integrating procedure.
Where
2.6
With the negative-sequence system, various monitoring and

protection tasks can be realized:
Protection of electrical machines following asymmetrical

loads that are caused by asymmetrical voltages or conductor
interruptions (for example through a defective fuse).
The function comes factory-set with 1 stage. A maximum of 6
stages can be operated simultaneously. If the device is equipped
with the inrush-current detection function, the tripping stages
can be stabilized against tripping due to transformer inrush
currents.
With the transformer, the negative phase sequence current

protection can be used as sensitive backup protection on the
supply side for detecting low-current single-phase short circuit
and double-phase faults. This application is well suited for
detecting low voltage single-phase faults which do not generate
high voltage zero sequence currents (e.g. vector group Dyn).
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Overvoltage protection functions (ANSI 59, 47, 59N)
Starting-time supervision (ANSI 48)
Overvoltages occur, for example, in long lines with little or

no load. Another cause can be faults in the voltage regulation
(controller faults, maloperation). The overvoltage protection
monitors the permissible voltage range, protects equipment
from subsequent damage through overvoltages and serves to
decouple systems (e.g. wind energy infeeds).
The starting-time supervision protects the motor against too

long starting processes. In particular, rotor-critical high voltage
motors can quickly be heated above their thermal limits when
multiple start-ups occur in a short period of time. If start-ups are
prolonged, e.g., in the event of excessive voltage drops when
starting the motor, excessive load torques, or a locked rotor,
the protection device initiates a trip signal. Fig. 1.3 / 8 shows
the thermal characteristic of the function. Different maximum
starting times are taken into account depending on the cold or
warm condition of the motor.
Various overvoltage protection functions are available. By

default, two stages are precon gured. Up to three identical
stages are possible.
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
The following functions are available:

Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage (ANSI 59)
1.7
Optionally, measurement of phase-to-phase voltages or

phase-to-ground voltages
7RSHUDWH
1.8
Method of measurement: optionally, measurement of the

fundamental component or of the effective value (RMS value).
1.9
Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage (ANSI 59)

Capturing symmetrical, stationary overvoltages with positive
sequence voltage
B
3
2.1
B
3
&ROGPRWRU
Method of measurement: calculation of positive-sequence

:DUPPRWRU
B
0RWRUVWDUWLQJ
,,UDWHGPRWRU
Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage

and compounding in line protection devices (ANSI 59)
By means of capacitive line impedances, stationary overvoltages at the opposite end of the line can arise (Ferranti
effect).
Method of measurement: The positive-sequence system of
the voltage is calculated at the other end of the line by means
of the local, measured voltages and current using the
equivalent circuit of the line.
Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage
(ANSI 47)
Monitoring the power system and electric machines for
voltage unbalance (negative sequence voltage)
Method of measurement: calculation of negative-sequence
Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage /
residual voltage (ANSI 59N/64)
Detection of ground faults in isolated or resonant-grounded
systems and electric operational equipment (e.g. machines)
Detection of the ground-faulted phase (optional)
Measurement procedure: Measurement of the displacement
voltage directly at the broken-delta winding or calculation of
the zero-sequence voltage from the phase-to-ground voltages
Measuring methods: Optionally, measurement of the
fundamental component (standard or with especially strong
attenuation of harmonics and transients) or of the RMS value.
Overvoltage protection with any voltage (ANSI 59)
Capture of any 1-phase overvoltage for special applications
Measuring methods: Optionally, measurement of the fundamental component or of the effective value (RMS value).
2.2
2.3
2.4
Fig. 1.3 / 8
Thermal characteristic of the starting-time supervision
Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49)

The thermal overload protection function protects equipment
(overhead lines, cables, motors, generators and transformers)
from thermal overstraining by monitoring the thermal conditions.
The RMS value is determined per phase from the highly sampled
measured current values (8 kHz). All quantities which cause
heating are taken into account through the wide frequency
operating range.
Stages
A current and thermal alarm stage is provided for the thermal
overload protection to initiate an alarm before tripping. The
tripping time characteristics are exponential functions according
to IEC 60255-8. The preload is considered in the operate time for
overloads.
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
Consideration of the ambient temperature

The currently measured ambient temperature can be taken into
account in the calculation of the overtemperature. This results in
a more accurate determination of this overtemperature.
If the ambient temperature is lower than the stipulated

reference temperature, a larger thermal reserve results and
the equipment can be put under greater strain. As the ambient
temperature increases, the thermal reserve of the equipment is
reduced.
3.2
3.1
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
Hot spot calculation (ANSI 49H)

The hot spot calculation function protects the transformer
windings from thermal destruction by excessive load currents.
Hot spot calculation takes account of the following standards
IEC 60076-7 and IEEE C57.91 and calculates three relevant
variables for the protection function:
Hot spot temperature
The circuit-breaker failure protection can be initiated by all

integrated protection functions as well as by external devices via
binary input signals or by communication with GOOSE message
in IEC 61850 systems. To increase operational reliability, an
external start can be applied with two binary inputs in parallel.
For 1-pole and 3-pole starting separate delay times are available.
For applications with two current transformers per feeder, e.g.
breaker-and-a-half, ring bus or double circuit-breaker applications, the SIPROTEC 5 device can be congured with two independent circuit-breaker failure protection functions.
1.4
Relative aging
1.5
Load reserve until warning / alarm indication.
1.6
These variables can be used to generate an alarm. The hot spot

temperature can also trigger tripping.
External trip initiation
Calculation of the hot spot temperature depends on the upper

transformer oil temperature, the cooling method, the load
factor, the transformer dimension, the oil and winding time constant and a number of other factors according to IEC 60076-7
and IEEE C57.91.
Any signals from external protection and monitoring devices can

be used for trip initiation. These signals can be included in the
processing of indications and trip commands or for starting a
fault record. The external trip initiation works like a protection
function.
The upper oil temperature is sensed via the temperature

measuring points. Up to 12 temperature measuring points can
be transferred to the protection relay via an RTD box.
This allows easy integration of mechanical protection devices

(e.g. pressure or oil level monitors or Buchholz relays). The
required number of external trip initiations can be selected
depending on the application.
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
One of these measuring points can be chosen for calculation of

the hot spot temperature in the oil.
The customer can set additionally required factors, such as type
of cooling and dimension of the transformer, in the function.
The relative aging is acquired cyclically and summated to form
the total aging.
Stator overload protection (ANSI 49S)
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
The function of the thermal stator overload protection protects

the motor against thermal overload by monitoring the thermal
state of the stator.
The thermal stator overload protection calculates the overtemperature from the measured phase currents according to a thermal
single body model. The RMS value is determined per phase
from the highly sampled measured current values (8 kHz). All
quantities which cause heating are taken into account through
the wide frequency operating range.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
When a faulted line is switched on, undelayed tripping is possible. In the case of high fault currents this overcurrent protection
with instantaneous tripping effects a very rapid tripping when
switching on to faults.
The function is factory-set with one stage. Within the function,
a maximum of two stages can be operated at the same time.
All stages are of identical design The actual switch-on detection
takes place in the switching state detection. This is either
directly activated when switching on manually, or automatically
determined from the measured values (current, voltage) or by
means of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts.
The current stage must be set via the maximum through-owing
short-circuit current or the inrush current if used in the transformer application.
Stages
End-fault protection (ANSI 50EF)
A current and thermal alarm stage is provided for the thermal

overload protection to initiate an alarm before tripping. The
tripping time characteristics are exponential functions according
to IEC 60255-8. The preload is considered in the tripping times /
operate time for overloads.
Without special measures the installation location of the current

transformer determines the measuring zone of the differential
protection. If the circuit breaker is open, the zone between the
current transformer and the circuit breaker can be optimally
protected by the end-fault protection. A current detected with
an open circuit breaker indicates a fault in the relevant zone. The
fault can be cleared by tripping the surrounding circuit breakers.
Circuit-breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)
High speed instantaneous overcurrent protection

(ANSI 50HS)
The circuit-breaker failure protection is circuit-breaker-related

in the function group circuit breaker. Each circuit breaker has
to be provided with its own circuit-breaker failure protection.
The circuit-breaker failure protection incorporates a two-stage
design. If the fault current has not disappeared after a settable
time, a retrip command or the busbar trip command will be
generated. The correct circuit-breaker operation is monitored via
current measurement and via additional circuit-breaker contacts.
The current detection logic is phase-segregated and can therefore also be used in 1-pole tripping schemes.
In conjunction with the busbar protection, the response to a

fault depends on the installation location of the current transformer. In the case of busbar-side current transformers, immediate and selective tripping of the busbar section is performed.
On line-side current transformers, the end-fault protection can
cause tripping of the circuit breaker at the opposite end through
a transmission facility.
3.6
3.7
Circuit-breaker restrike protection (ANSI 50RS)
The Circuit-breaker restrike protection function monitors circuitbreaker restrikes, e.g. caused by overvoltage at the circuitbreaker poles following a capacitor bank shutdown. The function
will generate a backup tripping signal in case of a circuit-breaker
restrike.
Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault (SOTF)
This function is available for applications where the overcurrent
protection with rapid tripping (50HS) is insufcient or is not
used at all. It also allows rapid tripping in the case of lower fault
currents. The function has no own measuring function.
It is linked at its input side with the pickup (measurement) of
another protection function, e.g. the element of an overcurrent
protection and it will trip if switched on to a short circuit.
Typically, such protection levels are congured which trip with a
delay themselves. The actual energization detection is made in
the switching state detection.
Any signal from an external or internal protection or supervision
function can be coupled into the trip logic of the device by
means of binary inputs or by serial communication. The trip
command may be delayed. 1-pole tripping is available if device
and circuit breaker are capable of 1-pole operation.
Two denite time-overcurrent protection stages (DTL stages)

and one inverse time-overcurrent protection stage (IDMTL stage)
are precongured. Further denite time-overcurrent protection
stages and a stage with a user-dened characteristic can be
congured within the function.
For the inverse time-overcurrent protection stages, all common
characteristics according to IEC and ANSI/IEEE are available, for
example, see Fig. 1.3 / 9.
Apart from their characteristic, the stages of the time-overcurrent protection have an identical structure.
They can be individually blocked via binary input or by other
functions (e.g. inrush current detection, automatic reclosure,
cold load pickup).
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
Every stage can be used as an alarm stage (no trip signal)
1.9
For the measuring method, measurement of the fundamental

or the rms value can be selected.
The ground function evaluates the calculated zero-sequence

current (3I0) or the measured ground current
2.1
Dropout-delay times can be set individually.
2.2
t [s]
2.3
100
2.4
50
30
20
The load-jam protection function is used to protect motors

during sudden rotor blocking. Damage to drives, bearings and
other mechanic motor components can be avoided or reduced
by means of quick motor shutdown.
Tp [s]
10
3.2
5
1.6
3
2
The thermal overload protection can pickup as soon as the parameterized threshold values of the thermal replica are exceeded.
The load-jam protection, however, is able to detect a locked rotor
quicker and in this way to reduce possible damage to the motor
and driven equipment.
0.8
0.4
0.5
0.2
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.05
0.05
7 10
20 30
I / I-threshold value
t=
Fig. 1.3 / 9
0.14
Tp [s]
(I / I-threshold value)0.02 1
2.5
SIP5 G-0008.EN.ai
Rotor blocking results in a current jump in the phases. The current jump is used as a distinguishing criterion by the function.
The functions time-overcurrent protection for phases and ground

sense short circuits in electrical equipment. The non-directional
time-overcurrent protection is suitable as the primary protection
for single-feed radial or open ring power systems. As backup or
emergency time-overcurrent protection, it can be used alongside
the primary protection, e.g. on lines and transformers. In the
case of transformers, the preferred application is backup protection for power system components connected downstream.
1.1
Every stage can be restrained against over-response caused by

transformer inrush currents
Load-jam protection (ANSI 50L)
Overcurrent protection, phases and ground

(ANSI 50/51, 50N/51N)
IEC characteristics of the type normal inverse
2.6
2.7
Overcurrent protection, single-phase (ANSI 50N/51N)
2.8
In the case of transformers, the preferred application is backup

protection for power system components connected to the
grounded neutral winding. The neutral point current of the
transformer is processed directly. Alternately, the function
can also be used for differential high-impedance ground fault
protection.
2.9
A further application is tank protection on transformers installed

on insulating mountings.
The structure and scope of the protection function is identical
to the time-overcurrent protection ground function
(ANSI 50N/51N).
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
Sentitive ground protection (ANSI 50Ns/51Ns)
Arc Protection
The sensitive ground-current protection function detects ground

currents in systems with isolated or resonant neutral. It can also
be used for special applications which require a very sensitive
current measurement. Pickup and trip signals can be stored in
the separate ground fault buffer.
The arc protection function detects electric arcs in air-insulated

switchgears through optical sensors. Arcs are detected reliably
and quickly as they develop, and the protective device can trip
immediately and without delay times.
Intermittent ground-fault protection

Intermittent (re-striking) faults occur due to insulation
weaknesses in cables or as a result of water penetrating cable
joints. Such faults either simply cease at some stage or develop
into lasting short-circuits. During intermittent activity, however,
star-point resistors in networks that are impedance-grounded
may undergo thermal overloading. The normal ground-fault protection cannot reliably detect and interrupt the current pulses,
some of which can be very brief.
2.1
The selectivity required with intermittent ground-faults is

achieved by summating the duration of the individual pulses and
by triggering when a (settable) summed time and a fault state is
reached. The response threshold IIE > evaluates the r.m.s. value,
referred to one systems period.
2.2
Transformer inrush current detection
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
If the device is used in a transformer feeder, high inrush currents

can be expected when the transformer is switched on. These
can reach many times the rated current and ow for several tens
of milliseconds to several seconds, depending on the size and
design of the transformer. The inrush current detection function
detects the transformer energizing and generates a blocking
signal for protection functions that would spuriously respond
to the transformer inrush current. This enables these protection
functions to be sensitive.
To detect transformer energizing reliably, the function uses
the "harmonic analysis" and "CWA methods" (current waveform
analysis) measuring methods. The two methods work in parallel
and combine the results with a logical OR. The result is a "1-outof-2 decision," which increases the availability of the electrical
installation.
This function also comprises short-circuit and backup protection

and is used for power system protection with current-dependent
protection devices.
IEC and ANSI characteristics can be selected (Table 1.3 / 1).
The current function can be controlled by evaluating the generator terminal voltage. The controlled version releases the sensitive set current stage. With the restraint version, the pickup
value of the current is lowered linearly with decreasing voltage.
The fuse failure monitor prevents unwanted operation.
IEEE IEC 60255-3
Inverse
3.3
Moderately inverse
Very inverse
3.4
Extremely inverse
Denite inverse
3.6
3.7
Peak overvoltage protection for capacitors (ANSI 59C)

The dielectric of a capacitor is stressed by the applied peak
voltage. Excessive peak voltages can therefore destroy the
dielectric. IEC and IEEE standards dene for how long capacitors
can withstand what overvoltages.
The function calculates the peak voltage phase-selectively from
the fundamental and the superimposed harmonics. The peak
voltage is calculated from the phase currents by integration.
The function provides various types of stage with different delay
times:
Stage with an inverse characteristic, according to IEC and IEEE
standards
Stage with a user-dened characteristic
Stage with a denite-time characteristic
Up to four stages of the type with a denite-time characteristic
can be set up concurrently.
Current-unbalance protection for capacitor banks (ANSI 60C)
Capacitor banks are often implemented in "H-circuits"
(see Fig. 1.3 / 10). In such implementations, failure of a single
capacitor element unbalances the capacitor bank and therefore
results in a low unbalance current via the cross-connection.
%%

4$
7SJ85
)* &DSDFLWRUEDQN

1

&
&
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
%)
&WUO
Available inverse-time characterictics

ANSI / IEEE
3.5
The arc protection function contains a self-monitoring function.

This function monitors the optical arc sensors and the ber-optic
cables.
Inverse-time overcurrent protection (ANSI 51V)
Characteristics acc. to
3.2
Detection of arcs is either purely optical, or optionally using an

additional current criterion to avoid overfunctioning.
&DSDFLWRUEDQN
Table 1.3 / 1 Available inverse-time characteristics
Abb. 1.3 / 10
Protection of a capacitor bank in H-circuit
The function measures the unbalance current in the crossconnection phase-selectively. The overcurrent stage will pick
up after a threshold value is exceeded and will trip after a time
delay. The counter stage causes an alarm or tripping if a specied number of faulty C elements has been determined.
To meet the requirements that even the smallest unbalance
current, resulting from a defective capacitor element, must be
detected, it is necessary to compensate for operational unba-
lance, which also results in unbalance currents. The function
permits both static and dynamic compensation. The latter must
be used if dynamic environmental inuences such as temperature uctuations are already causing relevant operational
unbalances.
Moreover, the measured unbalance can optionally be normalized
with the current of the capacitor bank to ensure constant
sensitivity even at different powers.
Measuring-voltage failure detection (ANSI 60FL)
Directional overcurrent protection, phases and ground

(ANSI 67, 67N)
The functions directional time-overcurrent protection for phases

and ground sense short circuits in electrical equipment. With
directional time-overcurrent protection, the units can also be
used in power systems in which not only the overcurrent criterion but also the direction of power ow to the fault location is
a selectivity criterion, e.g. in single-feed parallel lines, in doublefeed lines, or in looped lines.
Two denite time-overcurrent protection stages (DTL stages)
and one inverse time-overcurrent protection stage (IDMTL stage)
are precongured. Further denite time-overcurrent protection
stages and one stage with a user-dened characteristic can be
congured within the function.
This function monitors the voltage transformer secondary

circuits:
Non-connnected transformers
Pickup of the voltage transformer circuit-breaker
(in the event of short circuits in the secondary circuit)
Series faults in one or more measuring loops.
For the inverse time-overcurrent protection stages, all common

characteristics according to IEC and ANSI/IEEE are available.
All these events cause a voltage of 0 in the voltage-transformer

secondary circuits, which can lead to failures of the protection
functions.
The following gure shows how the direction characteristic of

the ground function can be freely congured. The characteristic
can be rotated for the phase function.
The following protection functions are automatically blocked in

the case of a measuring-voltage failure:
Distance protection
B
URW
Intermediate range
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
r
2.3
Directional negative-sequence protection

9UHIURW
Ground-fault protection for high-resistance faults in

grounded-neutral systems.
1.2
r
B
+\VWHUHVLVUDQJHRIr
1.1
2.4
9UHIURW r
Reverse
Restart inhibit (ANSI 66)

The restart inhibit prevents the motor from restarting if the
permitted temperature limit would thus be exceeded.
The rotor temperature of a motor is far below the permissible

temperature limit during normal operation and also under
increased load conditions. High starting currents required when
starting the motor increase the risk of the rotor being thermally
damaged rather the stator due to overheating. This is related
to the short thermal constant of the rotor. To avoid tripping of
the circuit breaker due to multiple motor start-up attempts, the
restart of the motor has to be inhibited if it is obvious that the
temperature limit of the rotor has been exceeded during a startup attempt (see Fig. 1.3 / 11).
5RWRU

7HPSHUDWXUHFXUYHRQ
5RWRUEDUXSSHUHGJH
0D[LPXPSHUPLVVLEOH
URWRUWHPSHUDWXUH
5RWRUPD[
5RWRUEDUORZHUHGJH
5RWRUWHPSHUDWXUH
&RROLQJZLWK
/yNUXQQLQJ
/yNVWDQGVWLOO
5HVWDUWOLPLW
W(TXLOLE
W(TXLOLE
W(TXLOLE

W0LQLQKLELWWLPH
,0RWVWDUW
,0RWUDWHG

,&%RSHQ
Fig. 1.3 / 11
Temperature curve of the rotor and repeated

motor start-up
2.5
Forward

-3I0comp.
URW
9UHIURW
9UHIURW r
9UHIURW
9UHI
Abb. 1.3 / 12
Direction characteristics of the extended ground function
2.6
2.7
Apart from the characteristics, the stages have an identical

structure.
2.8
Blocking functions of the stage: on measuring voltage failure,

via binary input signal, or by other functions (automatic
reclosure, cold load pickup)
2.9
2.10
Every stage can be restrained against over-response caused by

transformer inrush currents
The direction can be set for each stage
3.1
The stage can optionally be used for directional comparison

protection. Both a release and a blocking method can be
implemented
3.2
Each stage can be used as an alarm stage (no trip signal)

For the measuring method, measurement of the fundamental
or the rms value can be selected.
The ground function evaluates the calculated zero-sequence
current (3I0) or the measured ground current
Logarithmically inverse characteristics are also available for the
ground stages.
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Directional ground-fault protection with phase selector for

high-resistance ground faults (ANSI 51G, 67G, 50G)
In grounded systems, it may happen that the main protection
sensitivity is not sufcient to detect high-resistance ground
faults. The SIPROTEC 5 device therefore has protection functions
for faults of this nature.
Multiple stages
1.5
The ground fault overcurrent protection can be used with 6

denite-time stages (DT) and one inverse-time stage (IDMTL).
1.6
The following inverse-time characteristics are provided:
1.7
Inverse acc. to IEC 60255-3

ANSI/IEEE inverse
1.8
Logarithmic inverse
1.9
V0-inverse
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
S0-inverse.
Appropriate direction decision modes
The direction decision can be determined by the residual current
I0 and the zero sequence voltage V0 or by the negative sequence
components V2 and I2. Using negative-sequence components
can be advantageous in cases where the zero sequence voltage
tends to be very low due to unfavorable zero sequence impedances.
In addition or as an alternative to the directional determination
with zero sequence voltage, the ground current of a grounded
power transformer may also be used for polarization. Dual
polarization applications can therefore be fullled. Alternatively,
the direction can be determined by evaluation of zero sequence
power. Each stage can be set in forward or reverse direction or
both directions (non-directional).
High sensitivity and stability
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
The SIPROTEC 5 devices can be provided with a sensitive neutral

(residual) current transformer input. This feature provides a
measuring range for the ground current (fault current) from 5
mA to 100 A with a rated current of 1 A and from 5 mA to 500 A
with a nominal current of 5 A. Thus the ground-fault overcurrent
protection can be applied with extreme sensitivity.
The function is equipped with special digital lter algorithms,
providing the elimination of higher harmonics. This feature
is particularly important for low zero sequence fault currents
which usually have a high content of 3rd and 5th harmonics.
Dynamic setting change
3.1
Dynamic setting change of pickup values and delay time settings

can be activated depending on the status of an auto-reclosure
function. An instantaneous switch-on to fault is applicable for
each stage.
3.2
Phase selector
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
The ground-fault protection is suitable for 3-phase and, optionally, for 1-phase tripping by means of a sophisticated phase
selector. It may be blocked during the dead time of 1-pole autoreclose cycles or during pickup of a main protection function.
Directional sensitive ground-fault detection

for isolated and resonant-grounded systems
(ANSI 67Ns, ANSI 51Ns, 59N)
The directional sensitive ground-fault detection function detects
ground faults in isolated and resonant-grounded systems. It
provides different function elements which can also be used parallelly. This allows adapting the function optimally to the system
conditions, user philosophy and different fault characteristics:
Overvoltage elements with zero sequence system /
displacement voltage
The zero-sequence system voltage (displacement voltage) is
assessed as to exceeding a threshold. In addition, the faulted
phase can be determined when the phase-ground voltages are
connected.
Directional ground-current elements with
direction determination using cos and sin measurement
This is the classical wattmetric (cos , in the resonantgrounded system) or varmetric (sin , in the isolated system)
measurement procedure for the directional detection of static
ground faults. For determining the direction the part of the
ground current which is perpendicular to the set directional
characteristic (= axis of symmetry) is decisive (3I0dir.), see
Fig. 1.3 / 13. The element can be adapted to the system conditions with the corresponding setting (position of the directional
characteristic). Very sensitive and exact measurements can be
made in this way.
9
3!
4
,UHDFWLYH
UHVLVWLYH
3!
4!
3DUDPHWHU
B
3
)RUZDUG
,GLU
B
,
FRV
r
B
,DFWLYH
FDSDFLWLYH

$
B
r
B
3
%DFNZDUG
3
4
Fig. 1.3 / 13
3
4!
r
Visio-DwCosPhi-140512-enUS-01.pdf
Direction determination cos -measurement
Directional ground-current element with

direction determination using (V,I) measurement
This procedure can be used as an alternative to the cos or
sin procedure if desired by the user philosophy. The direction is
found by determining the phase angle between the angle-error
compensated ground current and the rotated zero voltage V0.
In order to satisfy different network conditions and applications,
the reference voltage can be rotated by an adjustable angle.
This allows taking the vector of the rotated reference voltage
close to the vector of the 3I0com ground current. The result of
the direction determination is highly reliable in this way
(see Fig. 1.3/12).
Ground-fault transient procedure
This transient procedure works only during the rst 1 to 2
periods after the fault ignition. It determines the direction
by evaluating the active energy of the transient process. It is
particularly suitable if direction information is required for faults
which extinguish very fast (after 0.5 to few periods).
This makes it suitable for use in parallel to the element with
cos measurement.
This procedure can also be used in meshed networks. It is also
optimal for use at closed rings since circulating zero sequence
are eliminated. With an additional logic the function can optionally switch off static faults.
Non-directional ground-current element
If required, a simple non-directional ground-current element can
be congured.
General
Power-swing blocking (ANSI 68)

Dynamic transient incidents, for instance short-circuits, load
uctuations, auto-reclosures or switching operations can cause
power swings in the transmission network. During power
swings, large currents along with small voltages can cause
unwanted tripping of distance protection devices.
The power-swing blocking function avoids uncontrolled tripping
of the distance protection.
Power swings can be detected under symmetrical load
conditions as well as during 1-pole auto-reclose cycles
(see Fig. 1.3/14).
A special algorithm can detect the extinction of the fault

fast. This detection allows blocking the directional groundcurrent stages whose direction determination is based on the
phase-angle reference between zero-sequence current and
zero-sequence voltage. The stability is increased in this way
during the decaying process of the zero-sequence system in the
resonant-grounded system. Pickup and trip signals can be stored
in the separate ground fault buffer.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
No settings required
High phase-angle accuracy is particularly important in resonantgrounded systems. The measured ground current is corrected for
this purpose via the stored phase-angle fault characteristic of the
cable-type current transformer (phase-angle fault as a function
of the current).
The function requires no settings. The optimal computation is

always obtained by automatic adaptation. During a power-swing
blocking situation all swing properties are constantly supervised.
A subsequent network fault is reliably detected and results in
phase-selective reset of the distance protection blocking by the
power-swing detection.
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC)
2.1
The circuit breaker coil including its feed lines is monitored with
two binary inputs. An alarm will be generated if there is an
interruption in the trip circuit.
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
iA/A
0.0
-1.0
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.00
2.25
2.50
2.75
3.00
3.25
3.55
3.75
t/s
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.00
2.25
2.50
2.75
3.00
3.25
3.55
3.75
t/s
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.00
2.25
2.50
2.75
3.00
3.25
3.55
3.75
iB/A
0.0
-1.0
2.6
iC/A
0.0
-1.0
2.7
t/s
2.8
vA/V
0.0
-100
2.9
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.00
2.25
2.50
2.75
3.00
3.25
3.55
3.75
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.00
2.25
2.50
2.75
3.00
3.25
3.55
3.75
2.10
t/s
vB/V
0.0
-100
3
t/s
3.1
vC/V
3.2
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.00
2.25
2.50
2.75
3.00
3.25
3.55
3.75
68 P/Power swing A
68 P/Power swing B
68 P/Power swing C
1.25
Fig. 1.3 / 14
1.50
1.75
2.00
Power-swing detection during 1-pole open condition
2.25
2.50
2.75
3.00
3.25
3.55
3.75
3.3
t/s
t/s
SIP5 G-0009.EN.ai
0.0
-100
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
Out-of-step protection (ANSI 78)

In electric power transmission systems electrical stability must
be maintained at all times. If system conditions arise that threaten the stability measures must be taken to avoid an escalation.
One such system is the out-of-step protection. The function can
be applied as out-of-step protection or can be integrated into
more complex systems for supervision and load control, i.e.
system integrity protection systems (SIPS).
The out-of-step function constantly evaluates the impedance
trajectory of the positive sequence impedance. The response
characteristic is dened by impedance zones in the R / X plane.
Accumulators are incremented depending on the point at
which the impedance trajectory enters or exits the associated
impedance zone. Tripping or signaling occurs when the set accumulator limits are reached. The out-of-step protection provides
up to four independent impedance zones which can be adjusted
and tilted according to the requirements of stability in the power
network. (see Fig. 1.3 / 15).
2.1
Zout
Zone 2
2.2
ZIn
2.3
2.4
ZPos. seq.
Zout
ZIn
SIP5 G-0010.EN.ai
2.5
2.6
Zone 1
Counting with ingress

Counting with X-Axis
crossing
Counting with egress
Fig. 1.3 / 15 Impedance zones for out-of-step protection
Automatic reclosing (ANSI 79)
2.9
About 85% of the arc faults on overhead lines are extinguished

automatically after being tripped by the protection. The overhead line can therefore be re-energized. Reclosure is performed
by an automatic-reclosing function (AR). Each protection
function can be congured to start or block the auto-reclosure
function.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Cooperation with the internal or an external synchrocheck

Monitoring of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact
Dynamic setting change of overcurrent protection elements,
depending on the AR status.
Two auto-reclosure (AR) functions
For applications with two circuit breakers per feeder, e.g.
breaker-and-a-half, ring bus or double circuit-breaker applications the devices can be congured to operate with two
independent auto-reclosure functions.
1-pole auto-reclosure
In electrical power systems with grounded system neutral-point
and if the circuit-breaker pole can be operated individually,
a 1-pole auto-reclosure is usually initiated for 1-phase short
circuits.
1-pole auto-reclosure functionality is available in SIPROTEC 5
devices with 1-pole tripping capability. The following operating
modes are provided in addition to the above mentioned
features:
1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase short circuits, no reclosing
for multi-phase faults
1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase fault and 3-pole autoreclosing for multi-phase faults
1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults and for 2-phase faults
without ground and 3-pole auto-reclosure for other faults
2.8
Control of the integrated AR function by an external

protection
1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults and for 2-phase faults

without ground, no reclosing for multi-phase short circuit
2.7
2.10
Cooperation with external devices via binary inputs and

outputs or via communication with GOOSE message in
IEC 61850 systems
Basic features and operating modes

Tripping controlled start with action time or without action
time
Pickup controlled start with action time or without action time
3-pole auto-reclosing for all types of faults; different dead
times are available depending on the type of fault
Multiple-shot auto-reclosure
Appropriate evolving fault response

3-pole coupling (positive 3-pole tripping) in case of circuitbreaker pole discrepancy.
Voltage-dependent supplementary functions
The integration of auto-reclosure in the feeder protection
allows evaluation of the line-side voltages. A number of voltagedependent supplementary functions are thus available:
DLC
By means of a dead-line check, reclosure is effected only
when the line is de-energized (prevention of asynchronous
circuit-breaker closure), if no synchrocheck can be used.
ADT
The adaptive dead time is employed only if auto-reclosure
at the opposite end was successful (reduction of stress on
equipment).
RDT
Reduced dead time is employed in conjunction with
autoreclosure where no teleprotection is used: When faults
within the overreach zone, but external to the protected line,
are switched off for short-time interruption, the RDT function
decides on the basis of measurement of the reverse polarity
voltage from the opposite end, which has not tripped,
whether or not to reduce the dead time.
3.7
Frequency protection (ANSI 81O, 81U)
Tele (pilot) protection for distance protection (ANSI 85/21)
Frequency deviations are caused by an unbalance between

generated and consumed the active power. Causes are, for
example, load shedding, network disconnections, increased
need for active power, generator failures or faulty functioning of
the power and frequency regulation.
A teleprotection function is available for fast clearance of faults

up to 100% of the line length.
The frequency protection detects frequency deviations in the

network or in electric machines. It monitors the frequency
band and outputs failure indications. In case of critical power
frequency entire generation blocks can be isolated or networks
can be decoupled. To ensure network stability, load shedding
can be initiated.
Different frequency measuring elements with high accuracy
and short pickup times are available. Tripping by frequency
measuring elements can be effected either at the local circuit
breaker or at the opposite end by remote tripping.
The following measuring elements are available:
Overfrequency protection (ANSI 81O)
Two precongured stages, can be increased up to three stages.
All stages are of identical design.
Underfrequency protection (ANSI 81U)
Three precongured stages, can be increased up to ve stages.
All stages are of identical design.
The following frequency measurement procedures are available
for selection:
Angle difference method: Angle change of the voltage phasor
over a time interval
Filter method of measurement: Evaluation of immediate
voltage values with special lters.
For all measuring methods the specic protection functions are
provided in the DIGSI 5-library.
Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81R)
Frequency changes can be detected quickly with the rate-offrequency-change protection. The function is able to prevent
unsafe states of the system caused by unbalance between
generated and consumed active power. It is therefore used in
power system disconnection and load shedding measures.
For conventional signal transmission the required send and

receive signals can be freely assigned to binary inputs and
outputs. The signals can certainly be transferred via the serial
protection interface, a SIPROTEC 5-wide system feature. The
transmission via GOOSE messages with IEC 61850 system
interfaces is provided as well, if the available communication
structures in the substations fulll the intra-substation requirements acc. to IEC 61850-90-1.
The following teleprotection schemes are provided for distance
protection:
Permissive underreach schemes PUTT
Pickup with expansion of measuring range
Acceleration with pickup
Direct underreaching trip
Permissive overreach schemes POTT
With overreach zone
Directional comparison pickup
Unblocking
Each permissive scheme can be extended with an
unblocking logic
Blocking
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Reverse interlocking
Transmission link protection
The send and receive signals are available as general signals
or as phase-selective signals. The phase-selective signals are
particularly advantageous as they guarantee reliable 1-pole
tripping, if 1-phase short circuits occur on different lines. The
teleprotection schemes are suitable also for power lines with
more than two line-ends, e.g. teed feeder. Up to six line-ends are
possible.
Transient blocking (current reversal guard) is provided for all permissive and blocking schemes in order to suppress interference
signals during tripping of parallel lines.
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
The function provides two types of stages:

df/dt rising
2.9
df/dt falling
Of each type of stage, up to ve stages can be set up in the
function.
By dening the measurement window length, either the
measuring accuracy or the starting time can be optimized for the
specic application.
On undervoltages, the function is automatically blocked to
exclude imprecise or incorrect measurements.
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
Weak or no infeed: Echo and tripping (ANSI 85/27)
Adaptive measurement
To prevent delayed tripping of distance protection permissive

schemes and ground-fault directional comparison scheme during
weak or zero infeed situations, an echo function is provided.
If no fault detector is picked up at the weak-infeed end of
the line, the signal received here is returned as echo to allow
accelerated tripping at the strong infeed end of the line. It is also
possible to initiate phase-selective tripping at the weak-infeed
end. A phase-selective 1-pole or 3-pole trip is issued if a send
signal is received and if the measured voltage drops correspondingly. This feature is available for all permissive underreach and
overreach schemes. As an option, the weak infeed logic can be
equipped according to a French specication.
An adaptive measurement method ensures a maximum of

sensitivity to detect internal faults under all conditions. To guarantee highest stability any measurement and communication
errors are taken into account (see Fig. 1.3 / 16). Simple settings
and supervision features shorten time of engineering and
commissioning.
Teleprotection for directional ground-fault protection

(ANSI 85/67N)
Different CT ratios at the line ends are handled inside the relay.
For fast clearance of faults up to 100% of the line length the

directional ground-fault protection can be expanded with a
teleprotection scheme.
With the setting of CT-error data the differential protection

device automatically calculates the restraint current and
adapts its permissible sensitivity according to the CTs data.
Thus no protection characteristic has to be parameterized.
Only IDiff > (sensitive stage) and IDiff >> (high-set current
differential stage) must be set according to the charging
current of the line/cable.
The following schemes are available:

Directional comparison
2.2
Blocking
2.3
Unblocking
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
The send and receive signals are available as general signals

or as phase-selective signals in combination with the phase
selector of the directional ground-fault protection. For conventional signal transmission the send and receive signals can be
freely assigned to binary inputs and outputs. The signals can
certainly be transferred via the serial protection data interface,
a SIPROTEC 5-wide system feature. The transmission via GOOSE
messages with IEC 61850-system interfaces is provided as well,
if the available communication structures in the substations
fulll the intra-substation requirements according to
IEC 61850-90-1.
The transient blocking (current reversal guard) function can
be enabled in order to suppress the interference signals during
tripping of parallel lines. Communication of the teleprotection
functions for distance protection and ground-fault protection
can use the same signaling channel or separate and redundant
channels.
A sensitive measurement stage (IDiff >) offers the detection of

high resistive faults. Special algorithms guarantee high
stability even with high-level DC components in the shortcircuit current.
A high-set differential stage (IDiff >>) offers high-speed fault
clearance with very short tripping times.
No external matching transformers are needed.
Enhanced communication features guarantee stability and

accuracy even under disturbed or interrupted communication
on all kinds of media like optical bers, pilot wires or
communication networks.
Differential and restraint currents are monitored continuously
during normal operation and are displayed as operational
measurements.
High stability during external faults even with different
current transformer saturation levels.
When long lines or cables get switched on, transient charging
currents load the line. To avoid higher settings and less
sensitivity of the IDiff >> stage, the set point may be increased
IDiff > for a settable time. This offers higher sensitivity under
normalload conditions.
Differential
current
IDiff
IN, Operation
Tripping
range
0.6
Line differential protection (ANSI 87L, 87T)

Line differential protection is a selective short-circuit protection
for overhead lines, cables, and busbars with single-side and
multi-side infeed in radial, looped, or meshed systems. It can
be used at all voltage levels. Line differential protection works
strictly phase-selectively and allows instantaneous tripping of
1- or 3-phase short circuits at up to six line ends. Depending
on the device variation 1-/3-pole (7SD87/7SL87) or only 3-pole
tripping (7SD84/7SD86/7SL86) is possible. The devices in a
differential protection topology communicate with each other
via protection interfaces (protection-data communication). The
exible use of available communication media saves investment
in communication infrastructure and guarantees the protection
of lines of all lengths.
0.4
Stabilization
range
IDiff>
SIP5 G-0003.EN.ai
Adaptive
stabilization
0.2
0.4
IStabilization
IN, Operation
Fig. 1.3 / 16
Trigger characteristic
3.6
3.7
0.6
Charging current compensation
Particularly long cables and very high-voltage lines can cause
considerable, permanently owing capacitive load currents.
These must be considered via the trip threshold of the sensitive
differential protection stages because they produce a differential
current.
The charging current compensation serves to improve the
sensitivity so that maximum sensitivity can be protected even
at high charging currents.
Charging current compensation requires that local voltage
transformers are connected.
The principle of distributed compensation guarantees
maximum availability, since with local failure of measuring
voltages of a device, the remaining devices continue to
guarantee their part of the compensation.
The data required for the differential calculations is cyclically

exchanged in full-duplex mode in the form of synchronous,
serial telegrams between the protection units. Enhanced
supervision features ensure stability in operation in any communication environment:
Telegrams are secured with CRC check sums to detect
transmission errors. Only valid telegrams get operated by the
differential protection.
Supervision of all communication paths between the units
without additional equipment.
Unambiguous identication of each unit is ensured by the
assignment of settable communication addresses for each
unit within a differential protection topology.
Detection of reected telegrams in the communication
networks.
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
Transformer in the protection range
Detection of time delay changes in the communication

networks.
1.9
Apart from normal lines, line differential protection can also

protect lines with a transformer in block connection. The current
transformers selectively delimit the protection range.
Dynamic compensation of delay time in the differential

measurement and supervision of the maximum permissible
signal-transit time.
A separate transformer protection device can therefore be

omitted, since line differential protection acts as a transformer
protection with measuring points that may lie far away from
one another.
Generation of alarms on disturbed communication connection.

Faulty telegram counters are available as operational
measurement.
2.2
With few additional transformer parameters such as rated

apparent power, primary voltages, vector groups and any
neutral-point groundings of the respective windings, there is
no need for external matching transformers.
The sensitivity of differential protection can be further
increased by capturing the earth currents of grounded
neutralpoint windings.
The inrush current detectionstabilizes the differential
protection against tripping due to transformer inrush
currents. This can occur phase-selectively or in 3-phase by
means of the crossblock function.
Switched communication networks can lead to unsymmetrical

delay times in receive and transmit directions. The resulting
differential current is compensated by the adaptive measuring
techniques of the differential protection.
With a high-precision 1 s pulse from a GPS receiver the relays
can be synchronized with an absolute, exact time at each line
end. In this way, delay times in receive and transmit path can
be measured exactly. Thus the differential protection can be
used in communication networks with a maximum of sensitivity even under massive unsymmetrical delay conditions.
2.1
2.3
2.4
2.5
Breaker-and-a-half schemes
Differential protection can be integrated easily into breaker-anda-half schemes. With corresponding hardware extension (see
standard variants), two 3-phase current inputs per device are
congurable. Thus ultimately topologies of up to 12 measurement points with 6 devices can be congured. The protection of
a STUB-BUS can be assumed by the separate STUB differential
protection.
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
Improved communication features

The line differential protection uses the protection interfaces
in the Differential protection conguration (Type 1, see
Protection-data communication). Different communication
modules and external converters allow the interfacing and use
of all available communication media.
Direct ber-optic data transmission is immune to
electromagnetic interference and offers highest performance.
Using the external communication converters via existing
pilot wires or communication networks is possible.
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Communication topologies / modes of operation
Ring topology
Differential protection devices may work in a ring or chain line

topology. The use of a test mode offers operating conditions and
maintenance.
Device 2 / 7SD8
1.1
1.2
The system tolerates the loss of one data connection in a ring

topology. The ring topology is rerouted within 20 ms into a
chain topology, while the differential protection function is
still working.
I2
1.3
Device 3
7SD8
1.4
When a chain topology is given by the communication

infrastructure, cost effective relays with only one active
interface are necessary at the chain ends.
1.5
1.6
I3
SIP5 G-0004a.EN.ai
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
For important two-end lines a hot standby transmission is

possible by a redundant communication connection to ensure
high availability. When the main connection is interrupted,
the communication switches over from the main path to a
secondary path.
I1
Device 1 / 7SD8
Fig. 1.3 / 17
For service or maintenance reasons individual differential

protection devices within multi-end topologies can be logged
out by a signal via binary input. Circuit-breaker positions
and load currents get checked before a logoff is initiated. The
remaining devices are able to operate in this reduced
topology.
Differential protection in ring topology
2.1
Chain topology
2.2
Device 2 / 7SD8
The whole conguration can be set up into a test mode. All

functions and indications are available except the breakers
will not trip. The local relay can be tested without tripping or
intertripping at the other relays.
2.3
Device 3
7SD8
2.4
STUB differential protection (ANSI 87 STUB)

I2
2.5
I1+ I2
I1+ I2
I3+ I1
Device 1 / 7SD8
Subtotal
I3
SIP5 G-0031.EN.ai
I3+ I1
Connection
to other
devices
2.6
Fig. 1.3 / 18
Differential protection in chain topology
2.7
STUB differential protection is a full-edged line differential protection, but without communication between the line ends. It is
used with a teed feeder or a breaker-and-a-half scheme, when a
feeder of the line section can no longer be selectively protected
by opening the disconnector (example distance protection).
The activation of the STUB differential protection occurs through
the feedback of the disconnector position. The SIPROTEC 5 line
protection device must be equipped with two 3-phase current
inputs in its hardware for this. The STUB differential protection
corresponds structurally and with regard to the setting parameters to the line differential protection (ANSI 87L) in all regards,
with the exception of protection data communication.
It guarantees the selective protection of the remaining line
section and rapid tripping times up to 10 ms.
2.8
Phase-selective circuit-breaker intertripping and

remote trip / indications
2.9
Normally the differential fault current is calculated for each

line end nearly at the same time. This leads to fast and
uniform tripping times. Under weak infeed conditions,
especially when the differential protection function is
combined with an overcurrent pickup a phase-selective
breaker intertripping offers a tripping of all line ends.
Therefore high-speed transfer-trip signals get transmitted to
the other line ends. They can also be initiated by an external
relay via binary inputs. Therefore they can be used to
indicate, for example, a directional decision of the backup
distance protection.
The transformer differential protection is a selective short-circuit

protection for power transformers with different types of design
(standard transformers and autotransformers) and different
connection designs. The number of protectable windings (sides)
and the number of usable measuring points depends on the
device type (see above explanations).
Additional remote signals can be freely assigned to binary

inputs and outputs and are circulating between the different
devices (see Protection-data communication).
Integrated adaptation to the transformer ratio with different

rated currents of the current transformer (primary and secondary) taken into account
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Transformer differential protection (ANSI 87T)
The following properties are essential for the protection

function:
Restraint tripping characteristic with freely settable characteristic sections in accordance with Fig. 1.3 / 19
3.6
Flexible adaptation to the different transformer vector groups
3.7
Adaptive adjustment of the trip characteristics by detection of

the transformer tapping
Additional consideration given to neutral point currents with
grounded winding and thus increase of the sensitivity by one
third
1
,GLII
,,UDWHG
Redundant stabilization procedure (2nd harmonic + curve wave

analysis) to detect safely inrush procedures at the transformer
1.2
Further stabilization options through the evaluation of the 3rd

or 5th harmonic in the differential current. The 5th harmonic is
suitable for detecting safely a steady-state overexitation of the
transformer and thus for avoiding an overfunction
Additional stabilization procedures against external faults with
current transformer saturation. The rst procedure responds to
high-current faults and monitors the differential current
curve (differential current detected outside the add-on
stabilization characteristic for a limited time, see Fig. 1.3 / 19).
Changeover to an internal fault is safely detected. The second
procedure works with low-current faults. Phase-angle shifts
can occur in the secondary current due to the DC component
in the short-circuit current and remanence of the current
transformer. If jumps occur in the stabilization current and if
DC components are detected in the differential current at the
same time, the tripping characteristic is increased for a limited
time.
B
3
The protection function was adapted to the special conditions

of the autotransformer in order to ensure the protection of
autotransformers. The pure node point protection can be used
as an additional sensitive protection of the autotransformer
winding. The node point protection works parallel to the classical differential protection. The autotransformer banks become
highly sensitive to ground faults and interturn faults with it.
Fig. 1.3 / 21 shows the basic idea.
1.3

1.4

1.5
B
3
B

1.6
$GGLWLRQDOVWDELOL]DWLRQH[WHUQDOIDXOW
3

B

B
3
B
3
1.7
1.9

Fig. 1.3 / 19
,UHVW
,,UDWHG
1.8

Restrain tripping characterisitc of the function Idiff
2.1
2.2
If asynchronous motors are connected to transformers,

differential currents can occur due to the distorted transmission of the starting current. The start detection (jump in the
stabilization current and DC component evaluation) will raise
the tripping characteristic.
High-power internal faults are detected safely and quickly with
the high-current stage IDiff-fast (see Fig. 1.3 / 20). In order to
avoid an overfunction due to q-axis currents (e.g. use in
one-and-a-half layout), the instantaneous values of the differential and stabilization current are evaluated. Internal and
external faults are safely detected within a few milliseconds.
1.1
)DXOWFKDUDFWHULVWLFIHGIURPRQHVLGH
2.3
,GLII
2.4
B
3
2.5
,UHVW
Fig. 1.3 / 20
2.6
Characteristics of the function Idiff-fast
2.7
2.8
S
03
,SK
2.9
87
03
,SK
03
,SK
2.10
3
87Node
03
,SK

1RGH 'LIIHUHQWLDOSURWHFWLRQDXWRWUDQVIRUPHU
03
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Fig. 1.3 / 21 Protection of an autotransformer through two differential

protection in one device
3.7
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
Differential Protection for Phase-Shifting Transformers
Differential ground-fault protection (ANSI 87N T)
The differential protection function for phase-shifting transformers function (PST) adds to the existing transformer differential
protection function (ANSI 87T).
Ground faults close to the neutral of a grounded neutral

winding can be detected by the longitudinal differential protection only to a limited extent. The ground-fault differential
protection will support you here.
Phase-shifting transformers serve for controlling the reactive

and active power in high-voltage systems. Their goal is voltage
stability, an even load distribution in parallel transmission lines
and to avoid unbalance currents in the transmission system
loops. The main function of a phase-shifting transformer is to
change the effective phase shift between the input and output
voltage of a transmission line. In doing this, the function
controls the current load that can be transmitted with one line.
Phase-shifting transformers are integrated in series in the system
to inuence the active power ow with additionally fed voltage.
This situation occurs, for example, when the increase in transmission capacity requires building an additional line. Specic
control of the angle between line current and voltage enables
maximum possible utilization of both lines. A further typical
application is the control of the load ow or of the energy ow
direction at the coupling point of 2 systems.
The neutral point current and the calculated zero sequence

of the phase currents are evaluated in accordance with Fig.
1.3 / 23. An overfunction in the case of external ground faults
is avoided with special stabilization measures. The phase
angles of the zero sequence are monitored in addition to the
differential current and stabilization current based on the
zero quantities. The tripping quantity is the zero sequence in
the neutral point.
/
,/
/
/
,/
/
/
,/
/
, ,/,/,/
, ,<
2.1
,<
2.2
6,3527(&
2.3
2.4
_, _
,&KDU

2.5
Fig 1.3 / 22
2.6
2.7
(Power output distribution between 2 lines with different

phase angle values)
r
There are 3 function blocks for adapting the differential protection to different types of phase-shifting transformers:
2.8
Single-core PST are phase-angle transformers with a maximum

phase shift of 60
2.9
Two-core PST are transformers with regulation in quadrature

with a maximum phase shift of 90
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Special transformers are transformers with xed wiring of

windings, which result in a non-integer vector group digit (e.g.
SG 0.25 = 7.5). They can be used as converter transformers,
for example.
The transformer differential protection automatically considers
the resulting value and angle changes. This means that the
changes do not need to be considered in the settings of the
pickup characteristic of the differential protection. The reversing
switch enables sign inversion between negative and positive
idling phase shift also under full load. In this case, the blocking
settings of the I-DIFF stage of the differential protection are
adjustable.
r
r
r
, ,
Fig. 1.3 / 23
Basic principle ground-fault differential protection
When used in autotransformers an additional measure was

taken to avoid malfunction in the case of external ground
faults. The protection function determines independently
the side of the autotransformer winding which is required
for the safe operation of the protection function. The
measuring point is selected which will lead to the highest
stabilization current (see Fig. 1.3 / 24).
This procedure is also used if there are several three-phase
current measuring points at the star side, such as in breakerand-a-half layout (see also Fig. 1.3 / 23).
Other protection functions are provided in the differential
protection devices. These functions can be used as additional
protection and monitoring functions and as backup protection for the upstream or downstream network. Monitoring of
limit values is also possible.
3.6
3.7
0
,
,
0
to high-current faults and monitors the progression of the

differential current (temporary departure of the differential
current from the additional restraint range, see Fig. 1.3 / 26).
Transition to an internal fault is reliably detected. The second
method works with low-current faults. In this case, phase
angle displacement in the secondary current can occur due
to the aperiodic component of the short-circuit current and
the remanence of the current transformer. If sudden changes
occur in the restraint current and aperiodic components are
simultaneously detected in the differential current, the trip
characteristic will increase for a limited time.
0
0
13
,
7
On induction motors, differential currents can occur due to

corrupted transmission of the starting current. The tripping
characteristic is raised by start detection (sudden change in
the restraint current and aperiodic component evaluation).
([WHUQDOIDXOW0VLGH
,$QJ5()0 !B0 r
,$QJ5()0 B0 r
,5()7ULS ,&KDU N ,$QJ5()0
Abb. 1.3 / 24
High-current internal faults are reliably and quickly detected

by the high-current stage Idiff (see Fig. 1.3 / 26). To avoid
unwanted operation due to transverse currents (e.g. use in
one-and-a-half breaker switchgear), the instantaneous values
of the differential and restraint current are evaluated.
Internal and external faults are distinguished in just a few
milliseconds.
Measuring point selection for several infeeds

on the star side
Motor differential protection (ANSI 87M)
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
Detects ground faults and multi-phase short circuits on motors

Detects ground faults for the operation of motors on power
systems with grounded neutral point
2.3
,GLII
2.4
Stable during startup procedures with current transformersaturation thanks to intelligent saturation methods
Reliably trips on internal high-current faults due to an
additional high-current stage.
B
3
The motor differential protection is based on a current comparison

(Kirchhoff's current law). The basic principle is that in a fault-free
protected item the currents add up to zero. If a differential current
occurs, this is a sure sign of a fault within the protected item.
The difference is calculated by the current direction denition.
The current direction toward the protected item is dened as
positive. The current difference is obtained by vector addition of
the currents.
2.5
,UHVW
Fig. 1.3 / 26
Characteristics of the function Idiff-fast
2.6
I
I1
Isc1
Protection
object
W1
I2
Isc2
2.7
)DXOWFKDUDFWHULVWLFIHGIURPRQHVLGH
,GLII
,,UDWHG
2.8
W2
I2
I1
2.9
B
3

2.10

Idiff = I1+I2
Load:
Idiff = I+(-I) = 0
Short circuit: Idiff = Isc1+Isc2
B
3
I
B

3.1
$GGLWLRQDOVWDELOL]DWLRQH[WHUQDOIDXOW
3

Fig. 1.3 / 25
Basic principle of the differential protection

with 2 sides as an example
B

B
3

B
3

The protection function has the following features:

Error-current-restrained tripping characteristic with freely
settable characteristic sections as shown in Fig. 1.3 / 26
Additional restraint methods against external faults with
current transformer saturation. The rst method responds

3.2
,UHVW
,,UDWHG
3.3
3.4
3.5
Abb. 1.3 / 27
Restrain tripping characterisitc of the function Idiff
3.6
3.7
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Busbar differential protection (ANSI 87B)

Busbar protection is selective, reliable, and fast protection
against busbar short circuits in medium-voltage, high-voltage,
and extra-high-voltage installations with the most varied busbar
congurations.
The protection is suitable for switchgear with closed-core or
linear-characteristic current transformers.
It short tripping time is especially advantageous with high shortcircuit powers or if the power system stability is at risk.
1.6
The modular structure of the hardware enables the protection to

be optimally adapted to the conguration of the installation.
1.7
The protection function has the following features:
1.8
Phase-selective measurement and display
1.9
2
2.1
Double-ended fault locator *
Shortest tripping times (<10ms)
Tripping characteristic with freely settable characteristic

sections as shown in Fig. 1.3 / 26
2.4
Sensitive tripping characteristic for low-current faults can

additionally be activated, for example, in impedance-grounded
systems as shown in Fig. 1.3 / 27
Low requirements of the non-saturated time of the current
transformers due to fast detection of internal or external faults
within 2 ms
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
Single-ended fault locator
Additional disconnector-independent check zone as a further

tripping criterion
2.3
2.7
Fault locator (ANSI FL)
Selective tripping of defective busbar sections
2.2
2.6
The voltage differential protection function is used to detect

C-element faults within a capacitor bank. It can be used if a
voltage tap occurs within the capacitor installation. The function
calculates the differential voltage based on phase selectivity
between the input voltage multiplied with a scale factor and the
busbar voltage.
The integrated fault locator calculates the fault impedance and

the distance-to-fault. The result is specied in ohms, miles,
kilometers or in percent of the line length. Parallel line and load
current compensation are also available.
Excellent stability on external faults, even on instrument transformer saturation, by means of stabilization with through-fault
currents
2.5
Voltage Differential Protection for Capacitor Banks

(ANSI 87V)
Due to the load current there is an angular displacement

between the voltages of both line ends. This angle and possible
differences in the source impedance angle cause the angular
displacement between both line end currents. As a result, the
voltage drop across RF (resistance of failure) is affected by this
angle between the currents RF. The single ended measurement
cannot compensate for this.
As an option for a line with two ends, a fault locator function
with measurement at both ends of the line is available. The
full line model is considered. Thanks to this feature, measuring
accuracy on long lines under high load conditions and high fault
resistances is considerably increased.
Three intermeshing measuring methods permit very short

tripping times on busbar faults or ensure maximum stability
during large through-fault currents
The integrated circuit breaker failure protection detects failure of
circuit breakers during busbar short circuits and provides a trip
signal for the circuit breaker at the opposite end of the line. On
failure of a bus coupling circuit breaker, the adjacent busbar is
tripped.
Capacitor Bank Differential Protection (ANSI 87C)

Acquires ground faults and multiphase short-circuits at
capacitor banks
Acquires ground faults during the operation of capacitor banks
in systems with earthed star point
Features the required stabilization procedures for closing
operations
Secure and very fast tripping in case of internal high-current
faults using an additional high-current stage.
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
* in preparation
1
Region 1
1.1
Region 2
1.2
1.3
PDC 2
1.4
PDC 1
IEEE C37.118
Struct_WAM-en.pdf
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Fig. 1.3 / 28
Connection of 3 Phasor Measurement Units with two Phasor Data Concentrators (PDCs) SIGUARD PDP
Phasor Measurement Unit (ANSI PMU)

Phasor Measurement Units make a valuable contribution to
dynamic monitoring of transient processes in energy supply
systems. The advantage to the conventional RMS values is at
rst, that the phasors of voltage and current are transmitted.
Second, all measurements are precisely timestamped and so it is
possible to correlate it to the exact measuring time independent
from the communication delay. Phasors and analogs are transmitted from the PMU with congurable reporting rate.
2.5
2.6
Due to the high-precision time synchronization (via GPS), the

measured values of different, widely separated substations can
be compared, and it is possible to draw conclusions about the
system condition and dynamic events such as power swings
from the phase angles and dynamic curves.
2.7
Via an own Ethernet module, the PMU function transmits its

data by means of the standardized protocol IEEE C37.118. The
analysis can be carried out with a Wide Area Monitoring System
(Fig. 1.3 / 28), for example SIGUARD PDP.
2.10
2.8
2.9
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Control
Control
Transformer automatic voltage control (ANSI 90V)

The transformer voltage control functionality (ANSI 90V) is
used to control power transformers (two-winding transformers,
three-winding transformers, system coupling transformers) and
auto-transformers with motor-driven stage switch. This function
serves to control the following:
1.1
1.2
SIPROTEC 5
1.3
In case of two-winding transformers: the voltage at the

secondary side of the power transformer
Protection
1.4

1.5
Control
Automation
1.6

Recording
1.8
Cyber Security
2
2.1
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Fig. 1.3 / 29
Control_us.pdf
Communication
1.9
2.3
In case of system coupling transformers: selectable depending

on the power direction the voltage of winding 1 or winding 2
Monitoring
1.7
2.2
In case of three-winding transformers: the voltage of the

secondary winding 1 or winding 2
SIPROTEC 5 includes all bay level control and monitoring functions that are required for efcient operation of the switchgear.
For convenient local control, the large, freely congurable
graphics display is available for control images.
Frequent operations, such as starting of switching sequences or
indication of the signal list can be initiated via one of the nine
function keys. With key switches for the selection of local/remote
and locked/unlocked, the required safety is guaranteed.
The application templates supplied provide the full functionality
that you need for your application. Protection and control
functions access the same logical elements. From the point of
view of the switching device, protection and control are treated
with equal priority.
The modern, scalable hardware can be optimized for the system
conditions. You can simply put together the desired hardware
quantity structure. For example, a single SIPROTEC 5 can be used
to control and monitor an entire breaker-and-a-half scheme.
The function offers automatic voltage control, within a preset

voltage band, on the secondary side of the transformers or
alternatively at a remote load point (Z compensation or R/X compensation) in the system. To compensate voltage uctuations in
the meshed system, use the LDC-Z procedure (Z compensation).
For voltage drops in the line, you can use the LDC-X and R
procedure (R/X compensation).
The control principle is based on the fact that an up or down
command to the tap changer causes a rise or fall in voltage,
depending on the voltage change ( V) for each step.
The voltage control functions in each step and compares the
measured actual voltage (Vact) with the dened target voltage
(Vtarget). If the difference is greater than the set bandwidth (B),
an up or down command is output to the tap changer after the
dened delay (T1) has elapsed.
The voltage control function additionally monitors the current
on the primary and secondary sides to block the controller in
impermissible operating conditions (overcurrent/undercurrent,
overvoltage/undervoltage, reverse power).
$4$
03
,SK
OLTC
)*7UDQVIRUPHU6LGH
)* &LUFXLW%UHDNHU$4$
,SK
,SK
49 51
50BF
Ctrl
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
03
,SK
A new level of quality in control is achieved with the application

of communication standard IEC 61850. For example, binary
information from the eld can be processed and data (e.g., for
interlocking across multiple elds) can be transmitted between
the devices. Cross communications via GOOSE enables efcient
solutions, since here the hardwired circuits are replaced with
data telegrams.
&%
)* 7UDQVIRUPHU6LGH
)* 7UDQVIRUPHU
,SK
)* &LUFXLW%UHDNHU%4$
,SK
50
87
51
%,
%2
50BF
Ctrl
8SK
59 59N
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
03
8SK
&%
%,
%2
)* 9ROWDJH&RQWROOHU:
8SK
,SK
90V
Ctrl
%,
%2
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
7DSSRVLWLRQ
All devices have up to 4 switching objects (switches, disconnectors, grounding switches) via the base control package. Optionally, additional switching objects and switching sequence block
can be activated (switching sequence function chart (CFC)).
%4$
Fig. 1.3 / 30
Application example: SIPROTEC 7UT85 with differential

protection and voltage control function
3.5
3.6
3.7
Automation and monitoring
Automation
An integrated graphical automation function enables you to

create logic diagrams clearly and simply. DIGSI 5 supports this
with powerful logic modules based on the standard IEC 61131-3.
1.1
1.2
SIPROTEC 5
All devices have a powerful base automation package. This

makes it easy to provide specic functions for automating a
switching cell or switchgear and substation.
Protection

Depending on the requirements of the application the scope

of the CFC (Continuous Function Chart) function chart can be
expanded. The scope covered by the basic function chart is
always available while the other packages are optional extras.
1.3
Control
1.4
Automation
1.5
1.6
Basic function chart (CFC)

Recording
1.7
Arithmetic function chart (CFC).

Communication
Cyber Security
Test
Fig. 1.3 / 32
Example automation applications are:

Interlocking checks
1.8
Monitoring-us.pdf
With the basic function chart (CFC) package you can graphically
link all internal digital information, such as internal protection
signals or operating states directly to the logic modules and
process them in real time. To evaluate and process measured
values, e.g. monitoring of thresholds, the arithmetic function
chart (CFC) package must be purchased.
Monitoring
Switching sequences (switching sequence function chart (CFC))

Indication derivations of switching actions
Indications or alarms by processing available information
Load shedding a feeder (arithmetic function chart (CFC) and
switching sequence function chart (CFC))
Management of decentralized energy feeds
System transfer depending on the grid status
Automatic grid separations in the event of grid stability problems.
Of course, SIPROTEC 5 provides a substation automation system
such as SICAM PAS/PQS with all necessary information, thus
ensuring consistent, integrated and efcient solutions for
further automation.
SIPROTEC 5 devices can take on a wide variety of monitoring

tasks. These are divided into four groups:
Self monitoring
Monitoring grid stability
Monitoring power quality
Monitoring of equipment (condition monitoring).
Protection

Control
Automation
Monitoring
Recording
Cyber Security
Test
Fig. 1.3 / 31
Automation-us.pdf
Communication
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Self monitoring
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with many self-monitoring procedures. These procedures detect faults internal to the device as
well as external faults in the secondary circuits and store them in
buffers for recording and reporting. This stored information can
then be used to help determine the cause of the self monitoring
fault in order to take appropriate corrective actions.
Grid stability
SIPROTEC 5
1.9
Grid monitoring combines all of the monitoring systems that are

necessary to assure grid stability during normal grid operation.
SIPROTEC 5 provides all necessary functionalities, e.g., fault
recorders, continuous recorders, fault locators and phasor measurement units (PMUs) for grid monitoring. The SIGUARD PDP
Wide Area Monitoring System is available for analyzing and
displaying the synchrophasor measurement units. The grid
monitoring functionality of SIPROTEC 5 devices allows them to
be programmed to monitor grid limit violations (e.g., dynamic
stability assessment via load angle control) and actively trigger
the appropriate responses. This data in the grid control systems
can also be used as input variables for online load ow calculation and enable signicantly faster response if statuses in the
grid change.
Power quality
Besides availability, the end consumers demand that the electrical energy they receive is also of high quality. The increasing use
of power electronic components can have detrimental effects
on power quality. Poor power quality can cause interruptions,
production outages, and high follow-up costs. Accordingly, it
is essential to capture and evaluate the grid variables reliably
according to generally valid quality criteria as dened in the
standard EN 50160.
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Monitoring, data acquisition and recording
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
Monitoring (contin.)
For this, SIPROTEC 5 provides corresponding power quality
recorders e.g. SIPROTEC 7KE85. These can be used to detect
weak points early so that appropriate corrective measures can be
taken.
Protection
The large volume of data is archived centrally and analyzed

neatly with the SICAM PQS system.
The measuring-transducer inputs (analog inputs) (0 mA to

20 mA) enable connection to various sensors and monitoring
of non-electrical variables, such as for example gas pressure,
gas density and temperature. Thus, SIPROTEC 5 enables a wide
range of monitoring tasks to be carried out.
2.3
Process values are stored together with a time stamp in the

operational log
The circuit-breaker statistics provide essential data for condition based maintenance
Process variables (e.g., pressure, SF6 loss, speed, temperature
etc.) are monitored to ensure they remain within the limits via
measurement transducers connected to the sensors
Further measured values can be acquired or processed via
external 20 mA or temperature measuring devices that are
connected serially or via Ethernet.
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
The recorded and logged eld data is comprehensive. It represents the image and history of the bay. It is also used by the
functions in the SIPROTEC 5 device for monitoring, inter-bay and
substation automation tasks. It therefore provides the basis for
these functions now and in the future.
Measurement and PMU
A large number of measured values is derived from the input
variables and presents a current image of the process.
Depending on the device design, the following base measured
values are available:
Operational measured values
Fundamental phasor and symmetrical components
Protection-specic measured values, e.g., differential and
restraint current for differential protection
Mean values
Minimum values and maximum values
Energy measured values
Control
Automation
The monitoring of equipment (condition monitoring) is an

important tool in asset management and operational support
from which both the environment and the company can benet.
Equipment that typically requires monitoring includes for
example: circuit breakers, transformers and gas compartments
in gas-insulated switchgear (GIS).
2.2
2.5

Equipment
SIPROTEC 5 provides the process interfaces, buffers, recorders

and automation functions necessary for monitoring the system:
2.4
SIPROTEC 5
Monitoring
'DWDDFTXLVLWLRQDQG
5HFRUGLQJ
Communication
Cyber Security
Test
Fig. 1.3 / 33
Data acqu-us.pdf
Besides the base measured values, phasor-measured units

(PMUs) can also be activated in the devices. Phasor measured
values support a range of applications for monitoring grid
stability.
For this purpose, SIPROTEC 5 devices record the necessary PMU
data. These are high-precision, time-stamped phasors, power
frequency and the change in the power frequency. They can be
transmitted to central analysis systems via the high-performance
communication system.
Measured values are per-unit quantity both in primary and
secondary values, and also in reference values. These values are
also made available to other applications, e.g., transferred to the
systems control or for automation tasks.
Standard devices can be supplied with up to 24 analog inputs.
The Fault Recorder SIPROTEC 7KE85 or the busbar protection
SIPROTEC 7SS85 supports up to 40 analog inputs. With version 5
the busbar protection supports up to 60 analog input.
The analog inputs of the SIPROTEC 5 devices can be selected
with a corresponding accuracy class and dynamic range suitable
for connection to both protection and measurement cores. The
innovative current terminal technology enables the secondary
rated current to be changed via setting. The current transformer
input can also be changed on site if for example a measurement
instead of protection class CT input is required (exchange of CT
terminal module). The following precisions are typical:
Processing via the protection-input transformer:
I Cl. 0.5 (0.5 % accuracy)
P, Q Cl. 1 (1 % accuracy)
Processing via the measuring-input transformer:
I Cl. 0.2 (0.2 % accuracy)
P, Q Cl. 0.5 (0.5 % accuracy).
Statistical values
Limiting values.
3.6
3.7
Separate measuring transducers (analog inputs) are therefore
unnecessary. The highly precise measured data enables
extended energy management and makes commissioning much
easier. SIPROTEC 5 thus provides the following measured values
for analysis and further processing:
Youll nd the description for the fast scan recorder, slow scan
recorder, continuous recorder and the trigger functions in the
chapter of the Fault Recoder SIPROTEC 7KE85.
The base measured values with high dynamic range and high
accuracy (protection-class current transformer)
High-precision time synchronization of all devices is necessary to

allow the recordings of digital fault recorders at different locations to be compared with each other. Hence, the time synchronization is an important property and must be performed with
high accuracy. Especially the use of the Phasor Measurement
Unit (PMU) requires precise time stamping.
The base measured values with very high accuracy (instrument

transformer)
Phasor measurement with highly precise time stamping for
subsequent task such as grid stability monitoring.
Recorder
In SIPROTEC 5, various data logs and recorders provide recording
large volumes of data. They feature a large number of analog
and binary inputs, and a high sampling frequency. An extremely
wide range of records can be converted. Either continuously or
as determined by various trigger criteria.
Time synchronization
Time synchronization can occur through 1 or 2 timers. Depending on time source, precision of 1 ms is attained. Events are
logged with a date and time with 1 ms resolution.
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Time synchronization is implemented by either:
1.8
DCF77 signal
1.9
IRIG-B
Besides storing the data fail-safe on internal storage devices,

SIPROTEC 5 devices can also transfer the data to central analysis
systems. Consequently, you are able to monitor networks with
regard to typical characteristics.
SNTP protocol
Substation automation protocol (e.g. IEC 60870-5-103,

IEC 61850)
2.1
IEEE 1588 protocol (accuracy 1 s)
2.2
Fault recorder
Second pulse (for especially precise applications)
The fault recording stores analog and binary traces during a fault
event, e.g., in the event of phase or ground faults, and preserves
the records, including high-precision time stamps for subsequent
analysis. Calculated measured values, e.g., power or frequency
can also be incorporated into the fault recording function.
Analysis takes place after the data is read out from the device by
DIGSI using SIGRA. Recorded data is archived to prevent data loss
in the event of supply voltage failure. Analog and binary tracks
for recording are freely congurable, and pre-trigger and seal-in
times can be programmed within a very wide range. SIPROTEC 5
fault recording provides long recording times with outstanding
accuracy.
DIGSI 5 protocol (not cyclical)
2.3
Timing master over protection interface
2.4
Recording of up to 24 analog channels

Sampling frequencies programmable between 1 kHz and 8 kHz
High recording capacity for individual records of 20 s for
24 channels with 8 kHz sampling frequency
Storage capability for up to 128 fault records
The recording duration for all records is limited by the available
storage capacity of the device, and depends on the
number of congured channels and sampling frequency.
Example:
Line protection with 8 analog channels (4 I, 4 V),
Sampling frequency 1 kHz, 6 measured value channels and
20 binary channels: resulting recording capacity of the
device about 890 s!
Up to 100 freely congurable binary and 50 additional measured value tracks
Due to the large number of up to 120 measured values,
SIPROTEC 7SS85 has a differing recording duration
The SIPROTEC 7KE85 fault and power quality recorder has yet
more features:
Extended trigger criteria: Gradient trigger (M / t),
binary trigger, network trigger
Higher-frequency sampling of 16 kHz for up to 40 analog
channels
Longer recording duration due to internal mass storage.
Internal time with integrated Quartz

Time synchronization in the device is battery-buffered. Thus the
internal clock continues to run with the Quartz precision of the
device even in case of failure of the auxiliary voltage.
The recommended GPS time signal receiver (7XV5664-1)
from Meinberg (Fig. 1.3 / 34) synchronizes the internal time
of all connected protection devices. The internal clock of the
protection devices are updated using the respective telegram
(IRIG-B, DCF77). Optical ber can also be used to transmit time
signals (telegrams or second intervals) without interference
even over larger distances and in electromagnetically polluted
environments.
SIPROTEC 5 devices generally support redundant time synchronization. The time information can be provided by two external
clocks. One functions as the primary time source. If it fails,
switchover to the second (secondary) clock is performed.
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
*36DQWHQQD
1.1
/LJKWQLQJ
SURWHFWLRQ
Operational log
2000
indications
Cyclical recording of operational

indications (e.g., control processes)
Fault log
1000
indications
per fault
Event-controlled recording of faults.

Maximum of 128 faults can be stored.
Maximum of 1000 indications per fault
can be recorded
1.2
56
1.3
1.4
*36
)2
2XW
)2
2XW
1.5
)2
2XW
,5,*%RU'&)WHOHJUDP
1.6
)2
5
1.7
)2
5
7RV\QFWUDQVIRUPH
RUVWDUFRXSOHU
%
6\QFWUDQV;9
;
;
9
1.8
1.9
3RUW$
User-specic log 200

indications
Option of cyclical or event-drive

recording of user-dened signals
Ground-fault log 100

indications
per
groundfault
Event-controlled recording of groundfaults. Maximum of 10 ground faults

can be stored.
Maximum of 100 indications per
ground-fault can be recorded
Logs of parameter setting

history (cannot
be erased)
200
indications
Recording of all parameter changes

and conguration downloads
Communication
buffer
500
indications
Recording of status of all congured

communication connections, such
as e.g., faults that arise, testing and
diagnostic operation and communication loads
Security log
(cannot be
erased)
500
indications
Recording of successful and unsuccessful access attempts to areas of the

device with restricted access rights
Diagnostic
buffer
500
indications
Recording and display of concrete

instructions for action in case of
necessary maintenance (e.g., battery
monitoring), detected hardware
defects or compatibility problems
3RUW*
2
2.1
WRPD[
2.2
6,3527(&
2.3
2.4
)2
*36
Fig. 1.3 / 34
6,3527(&
)LEHURSWLFFDEOH
*OREDOSRVLWLRQLQJV\VWHP
SIPROTEC 5 device with IRIG-B or DCF77 time

synchronization
Table 1.3 / 2 Overview of typical operational logs
Event-log buffer
2.5
2.6
2.7
Event-log buffers mark important events with a time stamp

(accurate to 1 ms) for subsequent analysis.
The long recording length is achieved with large event-log
buffers and separate buffers for different event categories. The
events to be logged are freely congurable and for improved
manageability.
Conguration of user-specic event-log buffers for cyclical or
event-driven recording is also supported.
Convenient and thorough analysis
2.8
Event-log buffers of different categories enable easier, targeted

analysis. Changes to parameters and conguration data are
recorded.
2.9
Ease of maintenance
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
Hardware and software are constantly monitored and irregularities are detected immediately. In this way, extremely high
levels of security, reliability and availability are achieved at the
same time. Important information about essential maintenance
activities (e.g., battery supervision), hardware defects detected
by internal monitoring or compatibility problems are recorded
separately in the diagnostic buffer.
All entries include specic instructions for taking action.
Table 1.3 / 2 provides an overview of typical operational logs.
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Communication and Cyber Security
Communication
Establishment of connection after password testing
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with high-performance

communication interfaces. These are integrated interfaces or
interfaces that are extendable with plug-in modules to provide
a high level of security and exibility. There are various communication modules available. At the same time, the module is
independent of the protocol used. This can be loaded according
to the application. Particular importance was given to the
realization of full communication redundancy:
If the optional connection password has been activated for

remote access, remote access via the Ethernet cannot take place
until the password has been successfully veried. Only once the
connection has been established, the user has read/write access
to the device.
Multiple serial and Ethernet based communication protocols

Redundant, independent protocols with control center possible
(e.g. IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3 serial and TCP, Modbus TCP,
IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850 Ed1 and Ed2)
Full availability of the communication ring when the switching
cell is enabled for servicing operations
Seamless Ethernet redundancy protocols PRP and HSR
Various numbers of plug-in modules with different communication protocols.
Access control with conrmation code

Security prompts must be answered for security-critical actions,
e.g., changing parameters, in order to obtain write access to the
device. These prompts can be congured by the user, and may
be different for different application areas.
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
Secure Standard Conguration

By default only the connection to DIGSI 5 is enabled in the
device. Consequently, by default all other Ethernet services and
their respective ports are inactive in the device.
Automation
1.3
Unsuccessful and unauthorized access attempts are also recorded and an alarm can be triggered by an independent telecontrol link. In addition, security-critical operations are recorded in
the device. These logs are safeguarded against deletion.
SIPROTEC 5
Control
1.2
1.7
All les that can be loaded into the device via DIGSI 5 are digitally signed. In this way, corruption from outside by viruses or
trojans of, e.g. rmware les, is reliably prevented.

1.1
Secure Logging
Integrity Protection for Files
Protection
2.4
Monitoring
Recording
2.5
SIPROTEC 5
Cyber Security
Test
Fig. 1.3 / 35
Communication-us.pdf
&RPPXQLFDWLRQ
Protection

Control
Automation
2.6
Monitoring
2.7

Recording
2.8
Cyber Security
Communication
&\EHU6HFXULW\
Test
Authenticity, Integrity and Condentiality

In general, secure authentication takes place between the device
and DIGSI 5. This precludes another program from accessing the
devices and reading or writing data there.
Through this secure transport protocol the integrity and
condentiality of the transported data are ensured. This hinders
manipulation and unauthorized access of the data.
Fig. 1.3 / 36
2.9
Cyber Sec-de.pdf
A multi-level security concept for the device and DIGSI 5 provides

the user with a high level of protection against communication
attacks from the outside and conforms to the requirements of
the BDEW whitepaper and NERC CIP.
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Test
1.1
1.2
Test
To shorten testing and commissioning times, extensive test and
diagnostic functions are available to the user in DIGSI 5. These
are combined in the DIGSI 5 Test Suite.
1.3
Hardware and wiring test
1.4
Function and protection-function test
1.5
Simulation of digital signals and analog sequences by integrated test equipment
1.6
De-bugging of function charts
1.7
Communication testing
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
SIPROTEC 5
The test spectrum includes, among other tests:
Protection

Automation
Monitoring
Circuit-breaker test and AR (automatic reclosing) test function

Recording
Communication
Loop test for active connections

Protocol test.
The engineering, including the device test, can therefore be
done with one tool. A browser can be used for diagnostics
of services and protocols on Ethernet modules. Via a module
website these diagnostic data are available to the user in the
network.
Control
Cyber Security
Test-de.pdf
Fig. 1.3/ 37
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
The modular, exible structure of the hardware and

software ensures perfectly customized solutions for all
your requirements in the network. With SIPROTEC 5, you
have exibility throughout the entire product lifecycle,
and your investment is thus protected.
Hardware
Perfectly tailored t Hardware building blocks
The SIPROTEC 5 hardware building blocks offer a freely
congurable device. You have the choice:
Either you use a pre-congured device with a quantity
structure already tailored to your application, or you build
a device yourself from the extensive SIPROTEC 5 hardware
building blocks to exactly t your application.
The exible hardware building blocks offer you:

Base modules and expansion modules, each with
different I / O modules
Various on-site operation panels
A large number of modules for communication,
measured value conversion
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Flexible and modular
1.6
With SIPROTEC 5, Siemens has also taken a new path with the
design. Proven elements have been improved and innovative
ideas have been added. When looking at the new devices, the
modular structure is evident. In this way, the scope of the
process data can be adapted exibly to the requirements in the
switchgear assembly. You can choose: Either you use a precongured device with a quantity structure already tailored to
your application, or you build a device yourself from the
extensive SIPROTEC 5 hardware building blocks to exactly t
your application. Pre-congured devices can be extended or
adapted as needed.
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
With the devices SIPROTEC 7xx85, 7xx86 and 7xx87 you can
also combine different base and expansion modules, add
communication modules and select an installation variant that
ts the space you have available. The devices SIPROTEC 7xx82
and 7xx84 can not be extended with expansion modules.
With this modular principle you can realize any quantity
structures you desire. In this way, hardware that is tailored to
the application can be selected. Fig. 1.4 / 1 shows a modular
device consisting of a base module and 4 expansion modules.
SIPROTEC 5: The advantage of modular building blocks
The SIPROTEC 5 hardware module building blocks provides the
cumulative experience of Siemens in digital protection devices
and bay controllers. In addition, specic innovations were
realized that make the application easier for you, e.g. recorder
and PQ functionalities.
2.3
2.4
Fig. 1.4 / 1
SIPROTEC 5 device built in modules
User-friendly operation panel

Eight freely assignable function keys for frequently required
operator control actions
2.5
Separate control keys for switching commands

Context-sensitive keys with labeling in the display
Complete numeric keypad for simple entry of setting values
and easy navigation in the menu
The SIPROTEC 5 hardware building blocks offer:
Up to 80 LEDs for signaling, 16 of which are in two colors.
2.6
Durability and robustness
Application-friendly design
Tailored hardware extension
2.7
No opening of device necessary for installation and servicing

Easy battery replacement on the back of the device
Simple exchange of communication modules with plug-in
technology
Electronically settable (no jumpers) threshold for binary
inputs
Rated current (1 A / 5 A) of current transformer inputs
congurable electronically (no jumpers)
Robust housings
Excellent EMC shielding in compliance with the most recent
standards and IEC 61000-4
Extended temperature range
25 C to + 70 C / 13 F to + 158 F.
Modular principle
Freely congurable and extendable devices
Large process data range (up to 24 current and voltage
transformers for protection applications and up to 40 for
central busbar protection as well as more than 200 inputs
and outputs for recording applications possible)
Operation panel that is freely selectable for all device types
(e.g. large or small display, with or without key switches,
detached operation panel)
Identical wiring of ush-mounting and surface-mounting
housings.
Removable terminal blocks

Pre-wiring of terminals is possible
Simple replacement of current transformers, e.g. with
sensitive ground current transformers if neutral grounding
method is changed.
Increased safety, since open current transformer circuits are
no longer possible (safety CT plug).
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Hardware
Perfectly tailored t Operation
1
1.1
1.2
Hardware building blocks with system

SIPROTEC 5 offers a modular, freely congurable device design.
This maximum exibility is guaranteed by the SIPROTEC 5
modular system. This contains coordinated components which
you can combine to congure your individual device:
1.3
Base modules and expansion modules, each with different I/O

board
1.4
Various front operation panels, e.g. with large display
1.5
A large number of modules for communication, measured

value conversion.
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
With reference to SIPROTEC 5, the term device always designates all the basic, extension and plug-in modules as well the
matching front panels combined together.
A base module together with a front operation panel is already
a standalone device in itself. In order to obtain additional
functionality, and above all more connections for process
integration, you can supplement a base module with expansion
modules. Fig. 1.4 / 1 shows you a single line sample conguration with a base module and 4 expansion modules.
Base and expansion modules
2.5
A SIPROTEC 5 device can consist of exactly one base module,

and in the case of a two-tier device, optionally up to 9 expansion modules and a power-supply module. Base and expansion
modules are distinguished rstly by their width. A base module
takes up a third of the width of a 19-inch frame, while an
expansion module takes up a sixth. The larger width of the base
module creates sufcient space at the rear for connection to
the process (terminals) as well as plug-in modules. Expansion
modules can provide either additional process or communication connections and are available for 7xx85, 7xx86, 7xx87 and
6MD8.
2.6
Fig. 1.4 / 2 shows the rear side of a device consisting of a base

module in which the power supply, the CPU module and an I/O
board are permanently installed, as well as 4 expansion
modules for extending the I/O quantity structure, and communication modules. Each expansion module contains an I/O
board. The components are connected by bus connector plugs
and mechanical interlockings.
2.3
2.4
2.7
Fig. 1.4 / 2 Rear view of base module with 4 expansion modules
Such a device can be ordered pre-congured from the factory.

In this context you can choose between the standard variants
predened by Siemens and the devices you have combined
yourself. Every SIPROTEC 5 device can also be converted or
extended according to your wishes. The modular concept
absolutely ensures that the nal device meets all standards,
particularly with regard to EMC and environmental requirements.
On-site operation panels
The on-site operation panel is a separate component within the
SIPROTEC 5 modular system. This allows you to combine a base
or expansion module with a suitable front operation panel,
according to your requirements. The modular system offers 3
different on-site operation panels for selection, both for base
modules and for expansion modules.
The following variants are available for base modules
(Fig. 1.4 / 3):
With a large display, keypad and 16 multi-colored LEDs
With a small display, keypad and 16 multi-colored LEDs
16 multi-colored LEDs.
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Fig. 1.4 / 3
Operation panels with (from left) large and small display, and operation panel without display
Hardware
Perfectly tailored t Operation
On-site operation panels (continued)
Elements of the on-site operation panels
The following variants are available for expansion modules

(Fig. 1.4 / 4):
The operator elements are illustrated with the example of the

on-site operation panel with a large display.
Without operating or control elements
The central element is the generously sized display for text and
graphics. With its high resolution, it creates ample space for
symbols in graphical representations (Fig. 1.4 / 5).
1.2
Below the display there is a 12 key keypad. In combination with

4 navigation keys and 2 option keys you have everything you
need to navigate conveniently and quickly through all information that is shown in the display. 2 LEDs on the upper border
of the operation panel inform you about the current device
operating state.
1.4
With 16 LEDs (single-colored)

With 16 LEDs (single-colored) and key switch.
The SIPROTEC 5 module is exible with regard to selection of
the operation panel. You can order any device type with a large,
graphical display or with a smaller, economical standard display.
For applications without device operation an operation panel
without display is also available. The operation panel with a
small display seven lines for measured values or menu texts as
well as the graphic representation of for example single busbar.
All operation and control keys are available to the user,
i.e. he can also control switching devices.
16 additional LEDs, to the left of the keypad, ensure quick,

targeted process feedback. The USB interface enables fast data
transfer. It is easily accessible from the front and well protected
with a plastic cover.
1
1.1
1.3
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
1 Labeling eld for LEDs

2 16 LEDs (red)
1
2
3 Key switch S5
Remote / Local
1
2
4 Key switch S1
Interlocking Off / Normal
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
3
4
Fig. 1.4 / 4
Designs of the expansion modules
2.6
The operation panel with large display also enables representation of a more complex control display (Fig. 1.4 / 5) and thus
offers more room for measured values and the display of event
lists. This operation panel is therefore the rst choice for bay
controllers, busbar protection or combined protection and
control devices.
2.7
2.8
2.9
As a third option is available without keypad and display. This

variant is appropriate for devices that are seldom or never used
by the operational crew.
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Fig. 1.4 / 5
Display of measured values in the large display
3.5
3.6
3.7
Hardware
Perfectly tailored t Installation variants
Elements of the on-site operation panels (continued)
1.2
The keys O and I (red and green) for the direct control of
equipment, a reset key for the LEDs, and the control key for
switching to the control display (mimic diagram), complete the
operation panel (Fig. 1.4 / 6).
1.3
Options
1.4
You can order any SIPROTEC 5 device, regardless of its individual conguration, in 3 different installation variants:
1.1
1.5
As ush-mounting device
1.6
As surface-mounting device with integrated on-site operation

panel
1.7
As surface-mounting device with the on-site operation panel

detached.
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Surface-mounting device with the on-site operation panel

detached
If the operation panel is to be installed detached from the
device, it can be installed as a separate part and connected to
the device with a 2.5 or 5 m long connecting cable. In this way,
the SIPROTEC 5 device can be situated, for example, in the
low-voltage xture and the operation panel can be installed
precisely at the correct working height in the cabinet door. In
this case, the device is fastened like a surface-mounting device
on the cabinet wall. An opening must be provided in the door
for the operation panel.
The construction of the ush-mounting devices will be recognizable from the previous sections. We would like to brie y
introduce you to the two other variants here.
Surface-mounting device with integrated on-site
operation panel
For wall-installation the SIPROTEC 5 devices can be ordered in
the surface-mounting housing (Fig. 1.4 / 7). Thanks to a new
concept, these devices have terminal connection diagrams that
are identical to the corresponding ush-mounting devices. This
is achieved by installing the devices using the principle with
the face to the wall and then attaching the operation panels to
the terminal side. With the brackets that are used, sufcient
space remains for the wiring, which can be routed away upwards
and downwards.
Fig. 1.4 / 7
Device in surface-mounting housing with integrated

operation panel
2.5
1 Graphical display
2 Labeling eld for LEDs
3 16 LEDs (green or red, settable parameters)
4 16 LEDs (red)
5 LED reset
2.6
6 USB interfaces
2
1
2.7
7 Labeling eld for function keys

8 Numerical keys and function keys
2.8
9 Control/command keys
2.9
10 Context-sensitive keys
2.10
11 Cursor keys
12 Key switch S5 Remote / Local
10
3.1
11
10
3.2
3.3
13 Key switch S1 Interlocking Off / Normal
12
13
3.4
3.5
3.6
Fig. 1.4 / 6
SIPROTEC 5 operation panel
3.7
Hardware
Perfectly tailored t SIPROTEC 5 terminals
Hardware features
1
7xx82
Hardware expandable
7xx85, 86, 87, 6MD8
1.1
1.2
no
yes
Binary Inputs
11/23
exible
Binary Outputs
9/16
exible
Transducer
0-4
exible, 0-12
Current Inputs
4/8
exible
Voltage Inputs
4/0
exible
Case (x19)
1/3
1/3 to 2/1
Large display
320 x 240
320 x 240
Pushbuttons
Key switch
no
optional
Small display (lines)
LEDs
Power Supply
16
exible, 16-82
DC 24-48 and DC 60-250 / AC 115-230
DC 24-48 and DC 60-250 / AC 115-230
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
Table 1.4 / 1
Hardware features
2.1
2.2
The SIPROTEC 5 terminals
2.3
Innovative terminals offering many advantages were developed

for the SIPROTEC 5 family (Fig. 1.4 / 2 page 1.4 / 2).
2.4
All terminals are individually removable (Fig. 1.4 / 9). This

enables pre-wiring of the systems, as well as simple device
replacement without costly re-wiring.
Current terminals (safety CT plug):
2.5
The 8-pole current terminal with 4 integrated current transformers is available in 3 designs:
4 protection-class current transformers
3 protection-class current transformers +
1 sensitive protection-class current transformer
4 instrument transformers.
The terminal design enables the following advantages for the
connection of currents:
2.6
Fig. 1.4 / 8
Voltage and current terminal block with bridges
2.7
Exchange of the current transformer type also possible

retroactively on-site (e.g. protection-class current transformer
for instrument transformer, sensitive for normal ground
current transformers in cases of network conversions)
2.8
2.9
Additional safety during tests or device replacement, since

the secondary current transformer circuits always remain
closed.
2.10
3
Voltage terminal:
3.1
The voltage transformers and the binary input and output

signals are connected via the 14-pole voltage terminal.
The cable entry to the terminal enables clear access to the
terminal connection. Bridges precisely matching the current
and voltage terminals are available for bridging contacts with
common potential (see spare parts / accessories, page 3.6 / 1
and Fig. 1.4 / 8).
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Fig. 1.4 / 9
Removed current terminal block
3.6
3.7
Hardware
Perfectly tailored t Modules
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Selection of the input / output boards
Module CB202
Which and how many process connections a base or expansion

board has depends on the choice of a particular input/output
board. The modular building block concept includes different
input/output boards.
Module CB202 represents a special case. CB202 (CB = Carrier

Board) provides 3 positions for plug-in modules.
These can be used to plug in up to 2 communication modules
or up to 3 measurement transducer modules. Combinations are
also possible, e.g. 2 communication modules and one measurement transducer module.
The IO202 input/output board is used e. g. as a base measuring

module. By equipping several modules with this module, you
can achieve up to 40 measuring channels per SIPROTEC 5
device.
In the module there are connections for:
4 voltage transformers
The power supply is integrated, so that the CB202 can be

powered independently of the main device. Communication
with the main device is assured via an RJ45 connector and
the bus connection on the front of the module.The CB202 is
always integrated in an expansion module (Fig. 1.4 / 11).
4 current transformers, optionally protection-class current

transformer, sensitive protection-class current transformer or
instrument transformers
8 binary inputs (BI)
6 binary outputs (BO), designed as 4 fast speed (Typ F)
normally-open contacts and 2 fast speed change-over
contacts.
The connections are distributed on (Fig. 1.4 / 10):
1 x 8-pole current terminal block
3 x 14-pole voltage terminal blocks
Select the modules suitable for your purposes so that you can
build the SIPROTEC 5 device that precisely matches your
application. You will nd an overview of the modules that are
available and their quantity structures in Table 1.4 / 3 Module
quantity structures.
Second module tier
2.5
If the number of inputs and outputs of a unit with 4 expansion

modules is not enough, a second tier can be added. This
requires a PS203 power supply in the second tier on the rst
mounting position. The remaining 5 positions can be lled with
expansion modules from the SIPROTEC5 module range. Exception: The CB202 must always be in the rst tier and only one
can be used with each unit.
2.6
Fig. 1.4 / 11
Expansion module based on the example of the CB202
Process bus module PB201

Expanding SIPROTEC 5 devices is simple with the SIPROTEC 5
expansion module PB201. The module offers 24 channels for
sampled measured values in accordance with IEC 61850-9-2.
Integrated resampling enables the use of Merging Units with
different sampling frequencies. To ensure network redundancy,
the IEC 62439 redundandy protocols PRP and HSR have been
integrated. In addion, the PB201 provices an integrated web
server for advanced daignosis functionality.
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
Interfaces:
3.1
3.2
3.3
A: 2 LC Duplex interfaces channel C A
B: 2 LC Duplex interfaces channel CB
C: 2 LC Duplex interfaces channel C
Service: 1 LC Duplex interface service port.
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Fig. 1.4 / 10
Rear view of an expansion module IO202
Hardware
Plug-in modules
Plug-in modules are available for communication or analog
inputs. The communication modules are described in the
Communication section.
Measuring-transducer module ANAI-CA-4EL
The analog input module has four 20 mA inputs. It can be
plugged into one of the slots in the PS201 or CB202. Multiple
measured value modules can be used with each device (one
in each available slot), but as a rule slots are needed for
communication modules. The connections are created via an
8-pole screwed terminal block (Fig. 1.4 / 13).
The technical data for the measuring-transducer module
is provided in Section Summary of technical data
(see chapter 3.5).
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
Fig. 1.4 / 12
2.1
Process-bus PB201
2.2
Measuring ranges of the current transformer modules
2.3
The measuring range (full modulation) of the current transformers can be set to different values electronically depending
on the eld of application. In all cases, you can choose between
protection-class and instrument transformers. Only protection
transformers can be used for busbar protection because
of the large dynamic range involved. The possible measuring
ranges according to rated current are shown in the following
Table 1.4 / 2 Measurement ranges according to rated current.
2.4
A large dynamic range is necessary for network protection

applications, so that short-circuit currents can be recorded
without distortion. A value of 100 I rated has proven optimal.
For 5 A transformer rated current, this corresponds to a setting
of 500 A, and consequently of 100 A for 1 A transformers. For
applications in generator protection, while it is true that there
are very large primary currents, a dynamic range of 20 I rated
is still quite sufcient. Thus a measuring range of 100 A is
obtained for a setting I rated = 5 A and a measurement range of
20 A for I rated = 1 A.
Abb. 1.4 / 13
Measuring-transducer module ANAI-CA-4EL
Arc protection module ARC-CD-3FO
2.5
Up tp 3 optional point sensors can be connected per arc

protection plug-in module, which means a total of up to 15
sensors on modular SIPROTEC 5 devices. Point sensors are
avialable with connection cable lengths between 3 m and 20 m.
2.6
2.7
2.8
A smaller dynamic range means that greater accuracy is

achieved in the rated current range. Consequently, the dynamic
range for instrument transformers and sensitive protectionclass current transformer input for ground fault currents is
extremely limited. In this case, limited means that the input
current is chopped on the analog side. Of course, the inputs in
this case are protected against overdriving.
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
Rated current
Irated
Measuring
range
Measuring
range 7xx82
devices
Protection-class
current
transformers
5A
500 A
250 A
1A
100 A
50 A
3.3
Instrument
transformers
5A
8A
8A
3.4
1A
1,6 A
1,6 A
Sensitive
ground-current
input
5A
8A
8A
1A
1,6 A
1A
Table 1.4 / 2
Measuring ranges according to rated current
Abb. 1.4 / 14
Arc protection module ARC-CD-3FO
3.2
3.5
3.6
3.7
Hardware
IO102
Base module for all 7xx82 devices that

require current and voltage measurement
1.7
IO103
Base module for all 7xx82 devices that require

current measurement
1.8
IO110
1.9
Availabe in the expansion module
BO power relay
Measuring transducer 20 mA/10 V
BO change-over
contacts type F
BO change-over
contacts
BO normally-open
contacts type HS
BO normally-open
contacts type F
BI (isolated)
2 2)
Implemented in
device row
Base module for all 7xx82 devices

that require current measurement
Power supply
IO101
Available in the
base module
Power supply module for all 7xx82 devices
Number of slots for

plug-in modules
PS101
BO normally-open
contacts
1.4
I-input
1.3
U-input
1.2
Description
1.1
Designation
BI (connected to
common potential)
Module for additional binary inputs and

outputs for all 7xx82 devices without IO103
12
PS201
Power supply module for the rst device row
PS203
Power supply module for the second device

row
CB202
Module with 3 additional slots for modules
2.1
PB201
Prozessbus-Baugruppe
IO201
Base module for protection applications that

require no voltage measurement
IO202
Base module for all devices that require

current and voltage measurement
IO203
Module for device numerous current inputs
IO204
This module contains 4 power relays for

direct control of the operating mechanism
motors of grounding switches and
disconnectors
10
IO205
For protection applications with binary

inputs and binary outputs
12
IO206
For protection applications with binary

inputs and binary outputs
IO207
Geared toward bay controllers due to the

predominant number of binary inputs
(feedback from switchgear)
1.5
1.6
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
IO208
2.6
IO209
It is a typical module for protective

applications. In contrast to the IO202, it is
equipped with more relay outputs
2 2)
1,2
1,2
1,2
16
1,2
1,2
16
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
41)
48
3.3
Differentiation of relay types:

Type F fast relay with monitoring (pickup time < 5 ms)
Type HS high-speed relay (contact with solid-state bypass) with monitoring (pickup time < 0.2 ms)
3.4
1) 10 V voltage input for high-resistance RC-splitter
3.6
2) of which 1 life contact

The connection diagrams of the individual modules are included in the chapter appendix.
Table 1.4 / 3
3.5
3.2
Base module for all devices that require

current and voltage measurement. In contrast to the IO202 it has a reduced quantity
structure of binary inputs and outputs
Module for acquisition of large volumes of

data, for example, in the bay controller or
busbar protection. Process connection is
effected via special terminals
1,2
IO214
IO230
3.1
2.8
This module is used when extremely fast

tripping times (4 normally-open contacts,
0.2 ms pickup time) are required, such as,
e.g. power system for very high voltages
Special module for connecting special highresistance voltage dividers over 10 V voltage
inputs
Module for devices that require a numerous

voltage inputs
IO215
IO211
2.10
2.7
2.9
Module overview
3.7
Hardware
Standard variants
To make it easier to select the correct devices, Siemens offers

you pre-congured devices, which are called standard variants.
These combinations of a base module and one or more expansion modules are intended for specic applications. In this way,
you can order exactly the right device with a single order
number. And standard variants can also be modi ed easily
and quickly with additional expansion modules. Thus, it is
just as easy to add modules as it is to replace certain modules
with others. The available standard variants are listed in the
SIPROTEC 5 order congurator.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Fig. 1.4 / 15 shows one possible standard variant for the 7SL87.
This variant describes a 1/2 x 19 wide device having the
following quantity structure:
1.7
15 binary inputs
1.8
20 binary outputs
1.9
8 analog current inputs

8 voltage inputs.
The modules used in the device can be seen on the results page
of the SIPROTEC 5 congurator (see chapter Engineering
Fig. 1.5 / 1 for more details).
Fig. 1.4 / 15
Standard variants for 7SL87
2.1
2.2
In our example, the following modules are used in positions

1 to 3 (Fig. 1.4 / 14):
2.3
Position 1: IO208
2.4
Position 2: PS201
Position 3: IO202.
The individual terminations are dened by the mounting
location of the module and the terminal designations of the
module (see chapter 3.2, Connection diagrams).
As an example the connection points of the rst 4 current
inputs, that are on the IO208 at position 1, are designated
as follows:
2.5
I1: 1A1 and 1A2

I2: 1A3 and 1A4
I3: 1A5 and 1A6
I4: 1A7 and 1A8.
2.6
The additional 4 current inputs are at the 3rd mounting position

on the module IO202, and are designated as follows:
2.7
I1: 3A1 and 3A2
2.8
I2: 3A3 and 3A4
2.9
I3: 3A5 and 3A6

I4: 3A7 and 3A8.
2.10
Regardless of whether you choose a standard variant or

congure your devices freely you always receive a thoroughly
tested, complete device.
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Hardware
Perfectly tailored t Standard variants
1
1.1
Mounting position:
Module:
6
IO2xx
5
IO2xx
4
IO2xx
3
IO2xx
2
PS201
1
IO2xx
1.2
1.3
3A
1.4
6A
1A
5A
1.5
2B
1.6
4B
6B
3B
1B
1.7
1.8
4C
6C
3C
1C
1.9
6D
5D
4D
3D
1D
2.1
SIP5-0060.EN.ai
2.2
10
2.3
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
2.4
2.5
Current terminal A
Voltage terminal A, B, C, D
Terminal for time synchronization G
Plug-in module E, F
Terminal for detached on-site operation panel H
Battery compartment
Terminal for integrated Ethernet interface J
Terminal for COM link K
Base module 1/3 of 19 in
Expansion module 1/6 of 19 in
10-pole terminal M
15-pole terminal N
2.6
2
PS101
2L
2.9
3.1
3.2
3M
1B

3N
F

0RXQWLQJSRVLWLRQ
0RGXOH
[[GHYLFHV
2.8
1
IO10x
1A
2.7
2.10
3
IO11x
1D

Fig. 1.4 / 16
Connection designations and Counting method
Advantages of the exible hardware module:

With the exible hardware module, you conveniently
congure the optimal hardware scope for your
application
3.3
For many applications, the appropriate device

specication (standard variant) is already pre-dened
3.4
The hardware design is appropriate for your switching

cell
3.5
The innovative SIPROTEC 5 terminal with integrated

current transformers offers increased safety in
systems testing and exibility when exchanging the
transformer type
3.6
3.7
1.4/10 SIPROTEC 5 Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring Siemens SIPROTEC 5.01 Edition 2
Engineering
Holistic workow Order congurator
Project engineering with SIPROTEC 5 places your workow
in the center. It supports you from the beginning with the
single line diagram of the primary system on to ordering,
engineering and parameter setting all the way through
to testing and commissioning. For you, this means: fewer
errors, higher quality and higher efciency.
For you, holistic workow means optimal, integrated

support for all project phases:
Project specication
System engineering
Device engineering
Commissioning
Operation and service
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Product selection via the order

congurator
1.7
The order congurator assists you in the

selection of SIPROTEC 5 products. The
order congurator is a Web application
that can be used with any browser. The
SIPROTEC 5 congurator can be used to
congure complete devices or individual
components, such as communication
modules or extension modules.
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
At the end of the conguration process,

the product code and a detailed presentation of the conguration result are
provided. It clearly describes the product
and also serves as the order number.
2.2
2.3
2.4
All functions from the library

The SIPROTEC 5 devices always have a
base functionality available depending
on device type. You can extend these
exibly with any desired functions from
the library.
2.5
Additional functions are paid with your

credit balance, which is re ected in
function points. The function points
calculator assists you in nding the
correct function points value for your
application. This guarantees that the
selected device has the required functionality.
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
Fig. 1.5 / 1
Result representation of the conguration, hardware details
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Engineering
Holistic workow Order congurator
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
In the SIPROTEC 5 system, the main

function is determined by selection of
the device type, while the scope of
additional functionality is determined by
a single property, the function points
value. This means that the functionality
does not have to be xed in detail during
product selection. In the later engineering phase, any optional additional
function can be selected from the
device-specic function library. You must
simply ensure that your balance of
function points ordered for the device is
not exceeded. Extra function points can
simply be reordered at any time.
Clearly presented result representation
The successful conguration of a device
is represented on a clearly organized
result page. You can also save the result
as a .pdf le (Fig. 1.5 / 2). The specied
product code can then be adopted
directly into the information system
or the ordering system or DIGSI 5
(www.siemens.com/siprotec).
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
Fig. 1.5 / 2
Result representation of the conguration, functional scope
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Engineering
Holistic workow DIGSI 5
DIGSI 5 without detours
The product code calculated with the SIPROTEC 5 congurator
can be adopted directly into the engineering program DIGSI 5.
In this way you create your selected devices directly in DIGSI 5.
Since all device characteristics are uniquely specied via the
product code, engineering work with DIGSI 5 starts on a
consistent basis, without the need for a time-consuming
re-entry of the device characteristics.
From planning to engineering up to testing DIGSI 5
The all-in-one engineering tool DIGSI 5 assists you in your
workow from planning to operation of your systems with
SIPROTEC 5 devices. With DIGSI 5 you have full control over
the engineering. The functional scope of the tool covers all
tasks from device conguration and device setting to
commissioning and evaluation of fault data. This is how a
modern, efcient engineering process looks in short form:
a device is selected. In the next step, the device is assigned an

application template tailored to the application. Function
adaptations are possible at any time after the selection of the
application template. The high-performance copying functions
with consistency tests enable rapid project engineering. Then
the system conguration (routings, implementation of corresponding logic into function charts (CFC)) and the parameterization must also be performed.
The new program structure of DIGSI 5 is designed to optimally
support the required work steps during a project. The application-oriented engineering approach guarantees that you are
always aware of the workow. DIGSI 5 makes you more productive from design to engineering and even with installation,
commissioning and operation.
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
In the rough planning, the system layout is documented using

CAD. This system layout is created in the single line editor
based on the detail planning. Depending on the application, the
required functionality (protection functions, control and
automation scope as well as auxiliary functions) is dened and
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
Project navigation showing

ofine congurations
and accessible devices
Working area showing all editors
Add all new elements

from the library
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
SIP5-0054.EN.ai
Properties and status information

Fig. 1.5 / 3
Structure of the DIGSI 5 user interface
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Engineering
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
The project view leads through the

entire workow
In DIGSI 5 processing and maintenance
of all components of IEDs and of all
associated data is carried out in a
project-oriented fashion. This means that
the topology, devices, parameter values,
communication settings, process data
and much more are stored in one project.
All device data are a click away. By simply
opening the device in the project tree
and the entire contents is made available.
When you begin with a device, you can
process your tasks simply and intuitively.
The user interface of DIGSI 5 is divided
into several areas (Fig. 1.5 / 3, page 1.5 / 3).
In the project tree on the left everything
is displayed that belongs to your project,
for example devices and global settings.
With a double-click on an entry, an editor
opens up in the main area of the window.
This can be, for example an editor for
changing protection parameters, for
conguring communication mappings or
Fig. 1.5 / 4 Graphical denition of the topology of a substation in single line
for creating function charts (CFC).
In the lower area of the screen view, you
can quickly and conveniently access the
properties of all elements (e.g. with circuit breakers or signals).
This area also contains lists with warnings and errors.
From the application to the solution:
The libraries are particularly important in DIGSI 5. They are
Application templates and their modication
located on the right and contain everything that is used in the
editors. Here you select the required scope and insert it into your After the topology has been dened, the next step is to add the
required device. You simply adopt the ordering code from the
project. When conguring the hardware, you can select
congurator in DIGSI 5 and your device specication is already
different hardware components, e.g. a communication module.
known. In the following step, you select the application
On the other hand, if you are working with function charts
template appropriate for your application and adapt it accord(CFC), you select the corresponding logical building blocks and
ing to your requirements.
choose the required functionality while conguring the
protection scope. For this you move the elements to the
Remove functions that are not needed and add the desired
position of the editor where you need them.
functions. The library offers you an extensive selection that you
can use for this. The consistency of the device con guration is
Visual denition of the primary topology in single lines
continually checked.
The single line diagram describes the primary topology of your
system (Fig. 1.5 / 4). For this, simply select the correct single line Finally, you can graphically connect the application template
with the primary elements of the single line diagram (voltage
template from the library. Further processing, e.g. extension,
and current transformers as well as circuit breakers) (Fig. 1.5 / 6,
is possible without difculty. DIGSI 5 contains a library with
page 1.5 / 5). Thus a topological reference is created. Setting
elements that are familiar to you from the ANSI and ISO
values of the transformers (primary and secondary rated
standards.
values, as well as the neutral point formation with current
transformers) can then be adopted from the single line diagram.
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Engineering
Design of user dened control displays
With the display editor you can create

or change the factory-preset displays,
known as control displays. The editor
assists you in a typical workow. You simply decide which elds of your already
created single line diagram are to be
used for the display pages and that is
all there is to it. Naturally, the displays
can also be completely newly created
or imported.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
For this, drag a signal from the library to

a dynamic element in the display and the
connection is created.
1.7
1.8
Besides the use of symbols in accordance

with the IEC and ANSI standards, you can
create your own static or dynamic symbols in a symbol editor.
1.9
2
Routing and assignment

The routing matrix is one of the most
important functionalities of DIGSI 5. It is
conveniently divided between 2 editors:
Information routing and communication assignment. Both views are designed such that you can quickly complete your task. With pre- or self-dened
lters you reduce the displayed information to a minimum. As in Excel, you can
select which information is to be displayed for each column (Fig. 1.5 / 6).
2.1
2.2
Fig. 1.5 / 5
Graphical linkage of primary and secondary equipment
2.4
In the matrix, all signals are sorted

according to function and function
groups. Sources and destinations are
displayed as columns. The scope reaches
from the compressed form of representation to a detailed representation of
information in which you can view and
change each piece of information
(routing to binary inputs and outputs,
LEDs, buffers etc.) in different columns.
In this way, all information can be
congured very simply.
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
For communication assignment all

necessary settings are already populated
for the selected protocol. You can adapt
these simply and quickly to your needs.
With a large selection of lters and the
option to open and close rows and
columns you will nd it easy to display
only the information that you need.
2.3
2.9
2.10
Fig. 1.5 / 6
The entire exibility of the information routing editor
3
3.1
Saving time is a priority with DIGSI 5. All table-based data

displays furnish the functionality to ll adjacent cells with a
single mouse-click in the same way you know from Excel.
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Engineering
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Better protection of the system

against invalid operation
In SIPROTEC 5 devices, a PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) is integrated, in
which e.g. standard interlockings can be
executed. If you want to change or adapt
these, use the function chart (CFC) editor
that is included as a component in
DIGSI 5 Standard and Premium. Thanks
to the fully graphical user interface, even
users without programming knowledge
can fully utilize the functional scope and
thus exibly adapt the functionality of
the device (Fig. 1.5 / 7).
For this, an entire library is available to
you with building blocks that are compatible with IEC 61131-3. This library
contains simple logical operators, such
as AND, but also complex functions such
as timers relays, command chains for
switching sequences, and much more.
The use of the editor is more efcient
than ever before. You thus need fewer
building blocks in order to achieve your
objectives. This decisively improves the
readability of the function chart (CFC).
New display modes also increase clarity.
The new modes offer you a compressed
view of the building blocks and connection points, so that you can see all the
information you need without having
to scroll through it.
2.7
2.8
Setting the parameters of the device
2.9
All parameter settings are represented in

the same way. This occurs in the parameter editor, which displays all parameters
of a function. Here you have the choice
between different views of the settings.
On the one hand there is a primary view,
in which you can directly enter the
primary setting values.
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Simple creation of automation with the CFC editor
Fig. 1.5 / 8
Setting parameters was never simpler
Even the use of signals in a function chart

(CFC) is designed to be simpler. Drag a
signal via drag & drop from the signal
library to the input or output port of a
building block and you are nished.
Created logic plans can be tested even
without devices (ofine) with DIGSI 5.
This ensures the necessary quality for
commissioning and gives you a time
advantage.
2.6
Fig. 1.5 / 7
In this way, the conversion using conversion factor ratios, which can lead to setting errors, can be
avoided. The same applies for the per unit view, where setting
parameters refer to object rated values. If you decide on the
secondary view,
the setting parameters must be converted to secondary values.
3.6
3.7
Engineering
For setting special protection characteristics, the graphical representation of the
characteristics is advantageous. In the
parameter editor all characteristic
variants of the function are represented.
Through this you can immediately
graphically check the effects of changes
in the settings. Setting values of different
parameter groups can quickly and easily
be compared in a common window,
differences can be detected and compensated for (Fig. 1.5 / 8).
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Cooperating in teams
1.7
Improve your engineering performance

by cooperating in teams. While one crew
works on the settings of the routing,
others can dene the protection parameters or set the parameters of the system
interface. The individual areas can be
updated at any time with new entries of
colleagues. For example, when the
protection parameter crew has updated
its data this data can be adopted into the
project.
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
Fig. 1.5 / 9
Denition of test sequences for comprehensive tests of device congurations
Comprehensive testing support during

commissioning and operation
2.4
The testing and diagnostic functions

assist you in the commissioning phase.
You can thus quickly and simply test
the wiring or observe the effect that a
message carried over the system interface has in the superordinate station. The
error messages that are recorded in the
case of a fault of the protection object in
the relay are listed in DIGSI 5 and can be
displayed, saved and printed for documentation purposes.
The new testing options are an innovation (also see test). Multi-level test
sequences can be dened (even for
phasor) via a sequencer functionality.
These are loaded into the device with
DIGSI 5 and simulate the physical inputs
there. These are then executed in the
device via the integrated test sequencer,
which simulates the analog process
values. In this way, you can dene and
execute complex checks for testing your
project engineering and logic already at
an early stage.
2.3
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
Fig. 1.5 / 10
Graphical conguration of network connections between devices
With the test and diagnostic functions,

extensive test equipment is no longer
necessary or their tests are reduced to a
minimum. Processes that were developed for testing special
protection principles, e.g. for line differential protection, can be
found in the respective device manual.
3
3.1
The function chart (CFC) editor also offers new analysis

functions. DIGSI 5 thus enables ofine debugging of logic plans
as well as tracing of measured values both in the representation of the logic plan and in the representation of lists. Accordingly, overall testing effort is reduced during commissioning.
The results of the function chart (CFC) analysis can also be
represented after completion of the test sequence, e.g. with
the assistance of SIGRA. Thus even complex runtime relations
can be analyzed simply.
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Engineering
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
Direct online access of all accessible devices
Openness through import and export
DIGSI 5 also assists you in your workow if your devices engineered ofine are connected with the devices in your plant in
your system. In DIGSI 5, all devices accessible via communication
interfaces are displayed immediately next to your ofine devices.
The preferred communication in networks is Ethernet. Naturally,
you can individually access devices via a USB interface. In order
to work with a physical device, connect the online device and
ofine conguration via drag & drop and you are done.
DIGSI 5 offers a broad spectrum of exchange formats. These

include the standard formats of IEC 61850, as well as the
uniform data exchange format TEAX of Siemens Energy
Automation Tools. This XML-based format is the foundation for
all import-export scenarios and ensures efcient workows in
the engineering process. Since data must only be entered once,
engineering effort is reduced and you prot from consistent
data quality at all levels of automation.
Besides transferring the device conguration to individual

devices, you can also automatically transfer all device congurations to your devices.
Besides efcient data exchange for the levels of energy automation, the XML data format also supports the simple exchange
of data with other applications.
Besides online access, in addition to reading fault records and

message buffers, you can also display measured values and
messages. You can save snapshots of measured values and messages in archives for subsequent analysis or for documenting
tests of temporary operating states or commissioning.
Via the import interface, you can read data from other applications into DIGSI 5. This thus enables external project engineering of the devices. Similarly, you can export the settings data
to other applications for further processing. It is thus easy to
exchange data with other power distribution applications, e.g.
network calculations, protection data administration/evaluation
as well as data for the protection function test.
With Siemens ENEAS Generic Solutions, Siemens is taking the

next step forwards and offers a modular system with dened
templates, consisting of precise denitions and ready-made
project engineering and documentation solutions for congurations, SIPROTEC eld devices, SICAM station units, operating
management, for functions and communication. The result is
that all project phases from planning to commissioning, as well
as all upgrades, extensions and maintenance, are more efcient.
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Grid controller
level
Load
2.6
*NQPSU
&YQPSU
2.7
2.8
5PPMT
Station level
Load
5PPMT
Advantages for system engineering:

t $PNNPOEBUBCBTJTGPSQSPCMFNGSFF
EBUBFYDIBOHF
t %BUBPOMZIBTUPCFFOUFSFEPODF
2.9
3
3.1
Field level
Load
3.2
%*(4*
GPSTZTUFNBOE
EFWJDFFOHJOFFSJOH
3.3
3.4
Fig. 1.5 / 11
Open exchange formats allow reuse of data on all levels
3.5
3.6
3.7
t 1MBVTJCJMJUZDIFDLTFOTVSFDPOTJTUFOU
FOHJOFFSJOHEBUB
t 6TFSGSJFOEMJOFTTPGUIFUPPMTTBWFT
USBJOJOHFGGPSU
4*1&/BJ
*NQPSU
&YQPSU
2.10
Engineering
Holistic workow Effective fault analysis with SIGRA
Effective fault analysis with SIGRA
After a protection trip following a

network fault, it is important that the
disturbance is quickly and completely
analyzed. With the fault records saved in
the SIPROTEC 5 devices you can investigate and resolve even complicated faults.
The high-performance tool SIGRA assists
you in your evaluation. Besides the usual
time-signal representation of the
recorded measured variables, it is also
designed to display vector diagrams,
circle diagrams and bar charts, as well as
represent harmonics and data tables.
From the measured values recorded in
the fault records, SIGRA calculates
further values, e.g. missing variables
in the 3-phase system, impedances,
symmetrical components etc. Defect
tracing can be evaluated simply and
conveniently using 2 measuring cursors.
You are also able to evaluate several
fault records in parallel with SIGRA. For
example, the records from the ends of
a line differential protection: you can
synchronize these on a common time
basis, then process as usual and save as
a new record (representation in one
diagram). Thus, the defect trend can be
well documented.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
Fig. 1.5 / 12
SIGRA time signals
2.2
2.3
2.4
SIGRA also has an ofine fault locator.

In this context, the fault record from the
line ends are evaluated. Through the
precise determination of the fault
location you save time, which you can
then use to investigate the fault on-site.
2.5
SIGRA can be used for all fault records

present in the COMTRADE- and
SIPROTEC-le format. The software
product is available as an optional
package in addition to DIGSI 5 Standard,
as a standalone variant, and is a component of DIGSI 5 Premium.
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
Fig. 1.5 / 13
SIGRA vector diagram
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Engineering
Holistic workow Effective fault analysis with SIGRA
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Overview of functions
6 diagram types:
Time-signal representation (standard)
Circle diagrams (for example for RX)
Vector diagrams (reading of angles)
Bar chart
(for example for visualizing
harmonics)
Table (with values of several signals
at the same point in time)
Fault location determination
(display of fault location)
Calculation of additional values, such
as e.g. positive sequence impedances,
RMS values, symmetrical components,
phasors etc.
2 measuring cursors that are
synchronized in all views
High-performance panning and zoom
functions (e.g. section enlargement)
User-friendly project engineering via
drag & drop
Fig. 1.5 / 14
SIGRA circle diagrams
Fig. 1.5 / 15
SIGRA harmonics
Innovative signal routing in a clearly

structured matrix
Time-saving user proles, which can
be assigned to individual relay types or
series
Addition of further fault records and
synchronization of multiple fault
records with a common time basis
2.5
Simple documentation through

copying of the diagrams e.g. into
MS Ofce programs
Ofine fault location determination
2.6
2.7
Commenting of fault records,

commenting of individual measuring
points in diagrams and free placement
of these comments in diagrams
Application of mathematical operations
to signals.
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
DIGSI 5 and SIGRA assists you in an optimal and holistic manner for your
SIPROTEC 5 project:
Powerful and effective analysis of fault records
Integrated system and device engineering
Graphical user interface simplies and accelerates project engineering
Application templates and function groups as image of the primary
application and the primary objects, such as the line or circuit breaker,
guarantee a user-oriented working method and perspective
Test and simulations tools offer optimal plausibility checks
Communication
Designed to communicate Integrated interfaces
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with high-performance
communication interfaces. These interfaces are integrated
or extendable via plug-in modules to offer a high degree
of exibility. The concept of plug-in modules and loadable
protocols enables exchangeability and retrotting.
For you, Designed to communicate in SIPROTEC 5 means:

Up to 8 interfaces available
Data exchange via the IEC 61850 protocol for up to
6 clients
Flexibly retrottable plug-in modules for communication
Many protocols available
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with high-performance,

pluggable communication interfaces and thus support optimal
migration concepts in system modernizations.
USB connections on the front side
1.5
Access to the device with the DIGSI 5 operating program is

achieved via the USB-B socket at the front of the base module
using a standard USB cable. The complete conguration and
setting of the device can carried out via this connection.
1.6
Integrated interfaces on the rear of the base module

The base module offers various, permanently installed
interfaces on the rear. For even greater exibility, 2 slots are
available for plug-in modules. For this, please observe the
connection diagrams in the appendix, chapter 3.2.
Integrated Ethernet interface (port J)
This electrical RJ45 interface serves to connect DIGSI 5 via a
local Ethernet network. In this way, several devices can be operated from DIGSI 5 via an external switch. DIGSI 5 detects the
devices even without an IP conguration on the local network
and can then assign them network addresses.
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Optionally, the IEC 61850 protocol for connections with up to 6

clients can be activated on this interface. On SIPROTEC 7Sx82
units, GOOSE messages are also supported on this interface.
Time-synchronizing interface (port G)
Fig. 1.6 / 1
Front view of the device with USB interfaces
Via the 9-pole Sub-D socket (connection compatible with

SIPROTEC 4), the time in the device can be synchronized. The
set clock telegram IRIG-B005 (007) of a GPS receiver can be fed
with 5 V, 12 V or 24 V levels. In addition, the Central European
DCF77 format with summer and winter time changes is supported. An additional second pulse input enables microsecond-precise synchronization of the device from a highly precise
time source, e.g. a special GPS receiver. This accuracy is needed
for special protection and measuring tasks. In this way, devices
can be precisely synchronized to the microsecond supra-regionally. For this, Siemens provides a pre-fabricated complete
solution with time receiver, optical ber converters and
appropriate connection cables.
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
J
K
3.1
3.2
Fig. 1.6 / 2
Rear view of the device with integrated interfaces and

module slots (left side: basic module; right side: CB202)
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Communication
Designed to communicate Plug-in modules for communication
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Connecting a detached operation panel (port H)
Plug-in module positions of the device
A detached operation panel provided together with the

connection cable can be connected to this interface. The
maximum distance is 2.5 or 5 meters.
The base module can be extended via module slots E and F. All
available modules can be installed there. The expansion module
CB202 is designed for 3 additional plug-in modules if the two
slots in the base module are not sufcient. Any additional
plug-in modules can be installed in slots N and P. Analog
expansion modules can be plugged into slot M. This slot does
not support serial or Ethernet modules.
Connecting the extension unit CB202 (port K)

The base module offers slots for 2 plug-in modules. If further
plug-in modules are needed, these can be provided via a special
expansion module CB202. This module is connected via port K.
The expansion module is delivered with an appropriate cable
and is connected with port L on the module. The CB202 has its
own wide-range power supply. A great advantage here is that
the switch integrated in an Ethernet module can execute its
data forwarding function for neighboring devices even if the
power supply of the base device is switched off provided the
CB202 is still supplied. Thus an Ethernet ring is not disconnected when a device is in service.
Via plug-in modules the devices can be extended with protocol
interfaces and analog inputs. The devices can be ordered with
assembled modules or be extended with modules retroactively.
An expansion module CB202 (right photo in Fig. 1.6 / 2,
page 1.6 / 1) can also be assembled with plug-in modules.
The modules are easy to service, and can be plugged in without
having to open the device. Since the modules have their own
processor, the base functions of the device, e.g. the protection
functions and the protocol application, are largely independent.
Modules are delivered without congured protocols or applications. One or more appropriate modules are suggested in the
order congurator corresponding to the desired protocol on a
module. There are serial modules with 1 or 2 electrical and
optical interfaces. Different applications can run on both
interfaces, e.g. synchronous protection communication of a
differential protection on one interface and an IEC 60870-5-103
protocol on the second interface. Electrical and optical modules
for Ethernet are still available. For example, the IEC 61850
protocol as well as auxiliary services may be executed for each
module.
Serial plug-in modules

Serial electrical plug-in modules are used for asynchronous
serial protocols, e.g. IEC 60870-5-103, DNP 3. Optical
820-nm/1300-nm and 1550-nm modules can also be congured
as protection interface for the point-to-point connection.
Serial electrical RS485 module
This module has either 1 (USART-AB-1EL) or 2 (USART-AC-2EL)
RS485 interfaces. The use of RJ45 sockets enables the construction of an economical serial RS485 bus with patch cables,
which are simply looped through. This saves on wiring time
and cable costs. Fig. 1.6 / 3 shows an electrical serial module
with 2 interfaces on which 2 independent serial protocol
applications are executed.
Serial optical 820-nm module
This module exists with 1 (USART-AD-1FO) or 2 (USART-AE-2FO)
optical 820-nm interfaces (Fig. 1.6 / 4), with which distances
between 1.52 km can be bridged via 62.5-/125-m multimode
optical bers. The optical connection is made via ST connectors. Apart from serial protocols, the synchronous serial
protection interface can be operated on the module, and
enables optical direct connections via multimode optical bers.
2 devices can thus either exchange data, e.g. of the differential
protection via a short direct connection, or they can be connected through communication networks via a 7XV5662
converter. Additionally, the module can be connected directly
with an optical multiplexer input in accordance with standard
IEEE C37.94.
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Fig. 1.6 / 3
Serial electrical double module (USART-AC-2EL)
Fig. 1.6 / 4
Serial optical 820 nm double module (USART-AE-2FO)
Communication
Serial optical 1300 nm / 1550 nm module
Long distance modules are used for synchronous serial data

exchange of protection communication via multimode optical
bers or single mode bers. They are available with 1 or
2 interfaces (Table 1.6 / 1). The optical connection is made via
LC duplex plugs.
1.1
1.2
1.3
Long distance modules for different distances for

point-to-point connections of protection interfaces
Optical
wavelength
Module designation
with 1 or 2 interfaces
Application
1300 nm
USART-AF-1LDFO,
USART-AU-2LDFO
max. 24 km via 2 single mode

bers or
max. 4 km via 2 multimode
optical bers
1300 nm
USART-AG-1LDFO,
USART-AV-2LDFO
max. 60 km via single mode

bers
1550 nm
USART-AK-1LDFO,
USART-AY-2LDFO
100 km via single mode bers
Table 1.6 / 1
Long distance modules for different distances for

point-to-point connections with 2 bers
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
Fig. 1.6 / 5 Serial, optical double module for wide-range connections
via optical bers (for module designation see tables
1.6 / 1 and 1.6 / 2)
1.9
2
2.1
Use of modules in pairs
2.2
Special modules enable bi-directional data exchange via one

optical ber. This saves one ber per data connection on optical
ber lines, without functional limitations in comparison with
connections with two bers. These modules transmit at
1300 nm or 1550 nm, but must be used in pairs (see table 1.6 / 2
and Fig. 1.6 / 5). The optical connection is made via LC simplex
plugs.
Optical
wavelength
Module designation with Application

1 or 2 interfaces
1300 nm /
1550 nm
USART-AH-1LDFO <>
USART-AJ-1LDFO
USART-AX-2LDFO <>
USART-AY-2LDFO
Table 1.6 / 2
2.3
2.4
2.5
max. 40 km via a single mode

ber (with integrated ber optic
multiplexer)
WAN modules for point-to-point connections with one ber
Fig. 1.6 / 6 Electrical Ethernet module (ETH-BA-2EL)
2.6
Plug-in modules for Ethernet

Ethernet modules are used for Ethernet-based protocol applications e.g. IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3 TCP, time synchronization via SNTP, network management via SNMP, DIGSI 5 via
TCP etc. Several applications can run in parallel, whereby
unused applications can be switched off for security reasons.
2.7
Electrical Ethernet module
2.10
The ETH-BA-2EL module has 2 RJ45 interfaces (Fig. 1.6 / 6).

It can be congured with or without an integrated switch.
The maximum electrically permitted distance via CAT 5 patch
cables is 20 m.
2.8
2.9
3.1
3.2
Optical Ethernet module

The ETH-BB-2FO module has 2 optical LC duplex 1300 nm
interfaces (Fig. 1.6 / 7). It can be congured with or without an
integrated switch. The maximum optically permitted distance
via 50/ 125-m or 62.5/ 125-m multimode optical bers is
2 km. The optical transmission and receiving level is measured
in the module and can be displayed with DIGSI 5.
Fig. 1.6 / 7 Optical Ethernet module (ETH-BB-2FO)
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Communication
1.7
USB-A
1.8
1.9
9-pole SUB-D socket
1 x electrical Ethernet 10 / 100 Mbit / s, RJ45
1 x electrical serial RS485, RJ45
2 x electrical serial RS485, RJ45
2
2.1
1 optical serial, 1.5 km, 820 nm, ST connector
2 optical serial, 1.5 km, 820 nm, ST connector
2 x electrical Ethernet 100 Mbit / s, RJ45, 20 m
2.2
2 optical Ethernet 100 Mbit / s, 2 km, 1300 nm, LC duplex plug
2.3
Applications
2.4
DIGSI 5 protocol
IRIG-B, DCF77, highly accurate 1-s pulse
IEC 61850-8-1 server (without GOOSE, reporting to 6 clients)
IEC 60870-5-104
DNP3 (serial)
DNP3 TCP + IEC 61850-8-1 server (incl. GOOSE, reporting to 2 clients)

Modbus TCP
Modbus TCP + IEC 61850-8-1 Server (incl. GOOSE, reporting to 2 clients)
Slave Unit protocol (conection to 20 mA box or temp.box)
2.8
2.9
2.10
Protection interface (Sync. HDLC, IEEE C37.94) *
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Further Ethernet protocols and services

DHCP, DCP (automatic IP con guration)
RSTP, PRP and HSR (Ethernet redundancy)

SNTP (time synchronization over Ethernet)
SNMP V3 (network management protocol)
DNP3 TCP
2.7
IEC 60870-5-104 + IEC 61850-8-1 server (incl. GOOSE, reporting to 2 clients)
Synchrophasor protocol (IEEE C37.118-IP)
IEC 60870-5-103 (extended)
2.6
IEC 61850-8-1 server (incl. GOOSE, reporting to 6 clients)
2.5
Module type: ETH-BB-2FO
Physical connection
Module type: ETH-BA-2EL
1.6
Module type: USART-AE-2FO
1.5
Module type: USART-AD-1FO
1.4
Module type: USART-AC-2EL
Port or plug-in module
1.3
Front interface
1.2
Module type: USART-AB-1EL
1.1
Port J: Integrated Ethernet
Port G: Time synchronization
IEEE 1588 (Zeitsynchronisation ber Ethernet)

Diagnostic: Ethernet - module homepage (http)
Note: The plug-in modules of the type USART and ETH can be used in slots E and F in the base module,
as well as in slots N and P in the expansion module CB202.
They are not intended for use in slot M in the CB202 expansion module.
* Additional plug-in modules for protection interface: see table 1.6 / 4
Table 1.6 / 3
Communication applications and plug-in modules
3.5
3.6
3.7
Communication
Module type: USART-AY-2LDFO 4)
Module type: USART-AX-2LDFO 3)
Module type: USART-AJ-1LDFO 2)
Module type: USART-AH-1LDFO 1)
Module type: USART-AY-2LDFO
Module type: USART-AK-1LDFO
Module type: USART-AV-2LDFO
Module type: USART-AG-1LDFO
Plug-in module
Module type: USART-AU-2LDFO
Module type: USART-AF-1LDFO
Physical connection
1 optical serial, 1300 nm, LC duplex plug,
24 km (single mode ber), 4 km ( multi mode ber)
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.8
1.9
1 optical serial, 1300 nm, LC duplex plug, 60 km (single mode ber)
1 optical serial, bi-directional via 1 optical ber,
1300 nm/1550 nm, LC simplex plug, 40 km (single mode ber) 1)
2.1

1550 nm/1300 nm, LC simplex plug , 40 km ( single mode ber) 2)
2.2

1300 nm/1550 nm, 2 x LC simplex plug, 40 km (single mode ber) 3)
1550 nm/1300 nm, 2 x LC simplex plug, 40 km (single mode ber)
1.1
1.7
2 optical serial, 1300 nm, LC duplex plug,

24 km (single mode ber), 4 km ( multi mode ber)
2.3
2.4
4)
Application
Protection interface
Note: The plug-in modules of the type USART can be used in slots E and F in the base module, as well as in slots N and P in the expansion module CB202.
They are not intended for use in slot M in the CB202 expansion module.
USART-AH-1LDFO only in connection with USART-AJ-1LDFO or USART-AY-2LDFO on the opposite side
USART-AJ-1LDFO only in connection with USART-AH-1LDFO or USART-AX-2LDFO on the opposite side
USART-AX-2LDFO only in connection with USART-AJ-1LDFO or USART-AY-2LDFO on the opposite side
USART-AY-2LDFO only in connection with USART-AH-1LDFO or USART-AX-2LDFO on the opposite side
Plug-in module
Physical connection
3 x optical (for point sensors)
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
8-pole screw-type terminal strip
3.1
3.2
Application
Measuring transducer, 4 inputs, DC 20 mA
Arc protection
Note: The plug-in module types ANAI and ARC can be used in both slots in the base module (ports E and F),
as well as in all slots in the expansion module CB202 (ports M, N and P)
Table 1.6 / 5
2.5
Plug-in modules for applications with protection interface
Module type: ARC-CD-3FO
Table 1.6 / 4
Module type: ANAI-CA-4EL
1)
2)
3)
4)
Plug-in module for additional applications
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Communication
Designed to communicate Protocols
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Plug-in modules are delivered without a protocol application.

According to table 1.6 / 3 (page 1.6 / 4) a module can be initialized via DIGSI 5 with a protocol application. Every interface is
assigned the desired application via software. Assignments can
be erased and re-congured. This enables a high degree of
exibility when conguring the modules.
DIGSI 5 protocol
The DIGSI 5 protocol works with TCP services, which can be
routed via IP networks. Worldwide remote access to devices via
secure connections is an integral component of the communication concept. Notes on secure access via networks can be
found in chapter 1.9 of this catalog. The protocol is available
on the USB interface and all Ethernet interfaces. Optionally,
DIGSI 5 can also be operated via its own Ethernet module if
systems control functions and access for operating and
main-tenance are to be kept strictly separate.
IEC 61850 client-server communication via the integrated
Ethernet interface (port J)
This interface can be used in addition to DIGSI 5 as a simple
IEC 61850 systems control interface. It supports a client-server
connection with a reporting function (GOOSE is not supported
on port J). Messages, measured values and fault records can be
read from an IEC 61850 client. Parameters in the device can be
changed via the client and the time of the device can be set via
an SNTP server.
On SIPROTEC 7Sx82, this interface also supports GOOSE
messages of IEC 61850.
IEC 61850 client-server communication on Ethernet modules
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
Messages, measured and metered values can be transferred via

the client-server communication in static and dynamic reports
to a maximum of 6 clients (substation controller). Dynamic
reports are created and read by the client without resetting the
parameters of the device. The static reports are created in the
device via system congurator and are permanently saved in
the device as indication lists. Fault records can also be retrieved
in Comtrade format. Extensive control functions are available
from the client, e.g. for the safe switching of a circuit breaker.
The setting parameters of the device can be read and also
changed via the IEC 61850 protocol. The devices can be
integrated in interoperable, intelligent smart grids without
difculty. Changing the device settings during operation is
possible through systems control equipment, in order to adapt
selected setting parameters to the operating conditions.
Redundant solutions can be realized with 2 Ethernet modules as
well as with network redundant protocols like PRP and HSR.
Areas of use of IEC 61850 GOOSE

inside and outside of the substation
GOOSE has been established as a worldwide standard for
cross- communication between devices, in order to transfer
messages and measured values between devices. In addition to
GOOSE between devices within a substation, GOOSE is also
supported between devices in different substations. The
exchanged information is described in data terms via standard-conforming SCL les, which are dened in Edition 2 of
IEC 61850. The exchange itself occurs via high-performance
ethernet network connections. This data exchange can also be
realized via an Ethernet module used exclusively for this
purpose.
With GOOSE messages time-critical signals can be transferred
within a few milliseconds. In this case, GOOSE connections
replace transfer via contacts and binary inputs; for protection
signals, transfer times under 10 ms are required, and under 20
ms for switch positions and interlockings. Measured and
metered values are transferred in less than 100 ms. For this,
GOOSE applications are generated in the system congurator.
These data are exchanged in a high-performance manner via
GOOSE messages.
Receivers of GOOSE messages can constantly monitor the
reception of indications and measured values for a break of the
connection. The state of missing indications is automatically
updated at the receiver, in order to attain a safe state. This
allows a constant, high-quality monitoring of GOOSE communication to be realized. GOOSE messages transmitted during the
test mode of a device are ignored in the receivers if these are
in normal operation. A test of a device can be performed with
disconnection from the communication network.
Serial IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
The serial protocol is transferred via RS485 or an optical
820 nm interface. The compatible or Siemens specic extended
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is supported. The implementation is
compatible with existing solutions, e.g. with SIPROTEC 4
devices, which will enable a trouble-free exchange and extension of devices even in the very long term. In addition to
indications, measured values and fault records, metered values
and customer-specically dened indications of control functions are also available in protocol extensions. Control commands for switching devices can also be transferred via the
protocol. Setting values in the device can also be read or
changed via the generic services of the protocol. Information
about the device can be routed to the protocol interface by the
user with DIGSI 5. Information types and function numbers can
be freely congured here. This enables adaptation to existing
solutions and the interchangeability of devices without changes
in the substation controller. This is an important contribution to
investment security.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Communication
IEC 60870-5-104 protocol
The IEC 60870-5-104 substation and power system automation
protocol is supported via the electrical and optical Ethernet
module. Indications (single and double), measured values,
metered values can be transmitted to one or two (redundant)
masters. IEC 104 le transfer is also supported and fault
recordings can be read out of the device in Comtrade format.
In the command direction, secured switching of switching
objects is possible via the protocol. Time synchronization can
be supported via the T104 master or via SNTP across the
network. Redundant time servers are supported. All auxiliary
services on Ethernet such as the DIGSI 5 protocol, network
redundancy, or SNMP for network monitoring can be activated
concurrently with T104. Moreover, GOOSE messages of
IEC 61850 can be exchanged between devices.
Serial DNP3 or DNP3 TCP
DNP3 is supported as a serial protocol via RS485 or an optical
820 nm interface, and as an Ethernet-based IP variant via
the electrical or optical Ethernet module. In conjunction with
Ethernet, the switch integrated in the module can be used
such that redundant ring structures for DNP3 can be realized.
In this way, e.g. connection to a DNP3 device via a redundant
optical Ethernet ring can be established. Information about a
device can be routed and transferred to the DNP3 protocol, and
also the fault records of the device. Switching commands can
be executed in the control direction (Fig. 1.6 / 9).
Redundant connection to 2 serial substation controllers can

be established via 2 modules or 1 serial double module. With
Ethernet, 2 Ethernet modules that can work independently
from one another via 1 or 2 networks are to be provided for a
redundant connection.
Ethernet
Switch
Protokoll Modbus TCP
1.5
The Modbus TCP communication protocol is supported by the

electrical or optical Ehternet module. Modbus TCP and Modbus
RTU are very similar, with Modbus TCP using TCP/IP packets for
data transfer.
Modbus TCP can be used to transmit indications (single- and
double-point indications), measured values, metered measureands to one or two (redundant) masters. Switchgear can be
switched in command direction via the protocol. Time synchronization can be implemented via SNTP or IEEE1588 via the
network, supporting redundant time servers. All additional
services on Ethernet like the DIGSI 5 protocol, network redundany or SNMP for network monitoring can be activated at the
same time as Modbus TCP and GOOSE messages of IEC 61850
can be sent over the network between the devices.
Fig. 1.6 / 8
1.4
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
DIGSI 5
Station controller
IEC 60870-5-103 Master
Station controller
DNP3 TCP,
IEC 60870-5-104
Ethernet
Switch
Star coupler
Station controller
Serial optical
USART module
Ethernet module
with integrated
switch SIP5-0046.EN.ai
Separate client-server and GOOSE communication via

IEC 61850 with further serial connection to an
IEC 60870-5-103 master
2.6
2.7
2.8
Ethernet module
with integrated
Fig. 1.6 / 9
2.5
Star coupler
DNP3 TCP
"IEC 608705-104"
GOOSE ring
1.2
1.3
Serial optical
USART module
Client-Server
communication via
the integrated
Ethernet interface
1.1
For DNP3, the network topologies shown in Figs. 1.6 / 18 to

1.6 / 20, page 1.6 / 11 can also be used for Ethernet-based or
serial communication.
DIGSI 5
Station controller
IEC 61850 Client
DNP3 TCP/IEC 60870-5-104 communication with serial

connection to IEC 60870-5-103 master
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Communication
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
Synchrophasors protocol via Ethernet (IEEE C37.118)
Time synchronization with SNTP
SIPROTEC 5 devices optionally calculate synchrophasors and

work as a Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU). These measured
values, which are synchronized across large geographic areas
via a highly-accurate second pulse, allow for assessment of grid
stability. These values are transferred via an Ethernet network
with the IEEE C37.118 protocol to a data concentrator. Transfer
occurs via an optical or electrical Ethernet module (Fig. 1.6 / 10).
The device can poll the absolute time from 1 or 2 time servers
via an SNTP server, e.g.in the hardened unit 7SC80. In redundant operation, both servers are read and the time of the 1st
server is used for setting the device clock with a precision of 1
ms. If this server fails, time synchronization takes place via the
second server. In addition to Ethernet modules, SNTP can also
be used via the integrated Ethernet interface (port J).
SUP Slave Unit Protocol
Time synchronization with IEEE 1588
This Siemens-specic protocol is used to read out external

20 mA devices (20 mA Box) or temperature sensing devices
(thermo box) serially or via Ethernet. These devices are available as accessories to expand SIPROTEC 5 devices with analog
interfaces. The measured values of these devices can be further
processed in the SIPROTEC 5 device or are used for protection
functions such as overload protection or hot spot calculation of
transformers.
For greater precision of time synchronization via Ethernet, the

IEEE 1588 protocol is available. It can be activated on electrical
or optical Ethernet modules. The precondition is that the
network components, e.g. switches, support the protocol and
special IEEE 1588 time servers are present in the network. With
IEEE 1588, the signal propagation times of the time synchronization telegrams in the Ethernet network are measured so that
the terminal devices, e.g. SIPROTEC 5 receive time information
that is corrected by the signal propagation time, providing more
precise timing than SNTP. The Power Prole IEEE 1588 C37.238
is supported and the devices function as ordinary clocks
(terminals) in the network.
Further Ethernet-based protocols and services
2.2
Besides the actual protocol application, these services can run

in parallel on an Ethernet module, and can be switched on and
off by the user with DIGSI 5.
2.3
Ethernet redundancy with RSTP, PRP and HSR
2.4
The electrical and optical Ethernet module supports with the redundancy protocol (RSTP, HSR) the construction of redundant
ring structures. With HSR, uninterruptible ring redundancy is
achieved with up to 50 devices in the ring. PRP enables uninterruptible communication via parallel networks. These methods
can be activated via parameters. They are independent of the
substation automation protocol or the chosen auxiliary services.
2.1
2.5
Network monitoring with SNMP

The device can be integrated in network monitoring or network
management systems via the SNMP V3 protocol. Extensive
monitoring variables, e.g. the state of the Ethernet interfaces,
their data throughput etc., can be made known to the monitoring system via MIB (Management Information Base) les.
These variables are described in data-specic terms in MIB les
and can be cyclically read out and monitored by the monitoring
system. No values can be changed in the device via SNMP.
It serves exclusively as a diagnosis interface.
Data:
Fault records
Power Quality Data
Phasor Measurement
2.6
Tools:
SICAM PQS
SIGUARD PDP
2.7
2.8
7KE85
6MD8/7SL8
6MD8/7SL8
7KE85
7SJ8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
Distribution
Generation
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Fig. 1.6 / 10
Central evaluation of fault records and phasors
Communication
Transfer of data via the protection interface
The protection interface and protection topology enable data
exchange between the devices via synchronous serial point-topoint links from 64 kBit/s to 2 MBit/s. These links can be established directly via optical bers or via other communication
media, e.g. via dedicated lines or communication networks.
A protection topology consists of 2 to 6 devices, which
communicate point-to-point via communication links. It can be
structured as a redundant ring or as a chain structure
(see Fig. 1.6 / 11), and within a topology the protection links can
have different bandwidths. A certain amount of binary information and measured values can be transmitted bi-directionally
between the devices depending on the bandwidth. The connection with the lowest bandwidth determines this number.
The user can route the information with DIGSI 5.
This information has the following tasks:
Protection topology
PI 1
Type x
52
4 ends differential protection

and binary input signals
1.1
PI 1
Type x
1.2
52
2
SIPROTEC 5
SIPROTEC 5
PI 1
Type x
PI 1
Type x
52
1.3
PI 2
Type x
PI 2
Type x
1.4
1.5
52
1.6
4
SIPROTEC 5
1.7
SIPROTEC 5
SIP5-0023.EN.ai
Fig. 1.6 / 11
Topology data and values are exchanged for monitoring and

testing the link
Protection communication of the differential protection

and transfer of binary signals
1.9
2
Protection data, for example differential protection data or

direction comparison data of the distance protection,
is transferred.
The link is continuously monitored for data faults and failure,

and the runtime of the data is measured.
Protection links integrated in the device have previously been
used for differential protection (Fig. 1.6 / 11) and for teleprotection of the distance protection. In addition to these protection
applications, you can congure protection links in all devices in
SIPROTEC 5. At the same time, any binary information and
measured values can be transferred between the devices. Even
connections with low bandwidth, e.g. 64 kBit/s can be used for
this. Protection links that mainly serve to transfer data for the
differential protection are designated type 1 links and are used
in the 7SD8 and 7SL8 devices. Links for transferring any data
that can be congured in the other devices (e.g. 7SA8, 7SJ8),
are type 2. Protection interfaces must be of the same type on
both sides.
2.1
2 km with 62.5 m/125 m
multimode optical ber
52
PI
2.2
X21
G703.1
Communication
network
Communications converter
SIPROTEC 5
PI
SIPROTEC 5
Module type:
USART-AD-1FO
USART-AE-2FO
Fig. 1.6 / 12
2.3
2.4
52
USART-AD-1FO
USART-AE-2FO
SIP5-0024.EN.ai
Time synchronization of the devices can take place via

the link, in which case a device of the protection topology
assumes the role of timing master.
1.8
2.5
Protection communication via a communication network

with X21 or G703.1 (64 kBit/s / G703.6 (2 Mbit)) interface
2.6
Figs. 1.6 / 12 to 1.6 / 17 show possible communication variants

for establishing protection communications.
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
Fig. 1.6 / 13
Protection communication via a copper connection
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Communication
1
1.2
52
1.3
1.4
PI
X21
G703.1
Communication
network
Communications converter
1.6
SIPROTEC 5
PI
USART-AD-1FO
USART-AE-2FO
1.7
PI
SIPROTEC 5
Module type:
Single module USART-AF-1LDFO/4 km/duplex LC
Double module USART-AW-2LDFO/4 km/2 x duplex LC
Single module USART-AG-1LDFO/60 km/duplex LC
Double module USART-AU-2LDFO/60 km/2 x duplex LC
SIPROTEC 5
Module type:
USART-AD-1FO
USART-AE-2FO
FO direct connection
52
52
9 m/125 m single mode optical ber

PI
SIPROTEC 5
1.5
52
Single module USART-AK-1LDFO/100 km/duplex LC

Double module USART-AV-2LDFO/100 km/2 x duplex LC
SIP5-0029.EN.ai
2 km with 62.5 m/125 m

multimode optical ber
SIP5-0024.EN.ai
1.1
1.8
1.9
Fig. 1.6 / 14
Protection communication via an IEEE C37.94 (2 MBits/s)

interface direct ber optic connection to a multiplexer
Fig. 1.6 / 16
Protection communication via direct ber optic connections
2
2.1
40 km with 9 m/125 m with
a single mode optical ber
52
2.3
PI
2.4
FO direct connection
SIPROTEC 5
52
PI
SIPROTEC 5
Single module USART-AH-1LDFO/simplex LC

Single module USART-AJ-1LDFO/simplex LC
2.5
Fig. 1.6 / 15
Protection communication via single mode ber

and repeater
Fig. 1.6 / 17
Protection communication via a single mode ber
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
SIP5-0030.EN.ai
2.2
Communication
Designed to communicate Applications for communication
Ethernet Network topologies
Regardless of the selected protocol (IEC 61850, DNP3) the

electrical and optical Ethernet module are supported by
different network topologies.
Electrical or optical rings with a maximum of 40 devices can be

established with an integrated switch (Fig. 1.6 / 19). Both
interfaces of the module transmit and receive simultaneously.
Mixed operation with SIPROTEC 4 devices is possible in the ring
with a maximum of 30 devices. A special ring redundancy
process, based on RSTP, ensures short recovery times in case of
failure of a device, so that the protocol applications continue
running nearly interruption-free. This conguration is also
independent of the protocol application that runs on the
Ethernet module.
1.2
1.3
Switch
1.4
Switch
1.5
1.6
SIPROTEC 5
SIPROTEC 5
SIPROTEC 5
SIPROTEC 5
SIP5-0031.ai
If the module works without an integrated switch that can be

switched off through DIGSI 5, it is connected to external
switches individually or redundantly. In the case of a double
connection, only one interface processes the protocol applications (e.g. IEC 61850). The second interface works in Hot
Standby and the connection to the switch is monitored. In the
case of failure of interface 1, a switch is made to interface 2
within just a few milliseconds (Fig. 1.6 / 18).
1.1
1.7
1.8
1.9
Fig. 1.6 / 18
Simple or redundant connection to external switches
2.1
2.2
Seamless redundancy PRP and HSR
2.3
New technologies reduce the time for reconguration of

communication networks in case of interruptions to about
nothing. These technologies are:
2.4
Redundant substation control connection
PRP = Parallel Redundancy Protocol

Switch
Switch
Ethernet ring
Both systems have the same principle and are specied in

IEC 62439-3.
2.5
The same information (Ethernet frame) is being sent over two

ways. The receiver takes the rst that comes in and discards the
second one. If the rst does not get through, the second one is
still available and will be used. The mechanism is based deeply
in the Ethernet stack, means one MAC and one IP address for
both.
HSR is using the same principle, but in one Ethernet network

in a ring conguration. The same information (Ethernet
frame) will be sent in the two directions into the ring, and the
receiver gets it from the two sides of the ring. This means
some more effort in the devices but saves the costs for a
second Ethernet network.
SIPROTEC 5
Fig. 1.6 / 19
Circuit operation with integrated switch and ring redundancy
IEC 60870-5-103/
DNP3
Master
IEC 60870-5-103/
DNP3
Master
2.8
2.9
Serial connections
Star coupler
The methods can be activated via a setting parameter and do

not have any further parameters. They are therefore easy to set.
The number of network nodes is limited to 512 in both
methods.
2.10
Star coupler
3
3.1
HSR and PRP can be combined by so called Redboxes

(Redundancy Boxes). This cost-effective solution of Fig. 1.6 / 21
can be achieved by:
IEC 103 via serial

double module,
or independent
serial modules
2 switches at the control room

SIPROTEC 5
2 switches in the eld
Device 1
2 Redboxes (RB) per HSR ring

Up to 50 devices per HSR ring
Easy expansion by additional HSR switches.
2.6
2.7
Fig. 1.6 / 20
Device 2
Device n
Redundant optical connection of devices to

IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3 master (e.g. SICAM PAS)
3.2
3.3
SIP5-0033.EN.ai
PRP uses two independent Ethernet systems. This means

double amount of network equipment and respectively cost,
but it is simple.
SIP5-0032.EN.ai
HSR = High Available Seamless Ring Redundancy
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Communication
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
PRP-B
Switch
1.5
1.6
PRP-A
Switch
B
up to 50 devices on the ring
1.7
RB
RB
RB
RB
RB
RB
1.8
1.9
Switch
Switch
2
2.1
Redbox
2.2
2.3
RB = Redbox
2.4
Fig. 1.6 / 21
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
non HSR devices
Most cost-effective seamless n-1 structure
Serial redundancy
Redundancy in communication
Redundant connection to 2 substation controllers, e.g.

SICAM PAS, is possible via 2 independent, serial plug-in
modules or a serial double module. The serial IEC 60870-5-103
protocol or the serial DNP3 protocol, for example, can run on
the modules. Mixed operation is also possible. Fig. 1.6 / 20
shows a serial optical network that connects each of the serial
protocol interfaces of the device to a master. The transfer
occurs interference-free via optical bers. For the IEC 60870-5103 protocol special redundancy processes are supported in the
device. Thus, a primary master can be set that is preferred over
the 2nd master in the control direction. The current process
image is transferred to both masters.
You as the user can realize different levels of redundancy.

The number of independent protocol applications running in
parallel is limited by the 4 plug-in module positions.
A serial protocol can be run 2 times on a double module. But
it can also be realized on 2 modules. Different serial protocols
can be run in the device simultaneously, e.g. DNP3 and
IEC 103. Communication occurs with one or several masters.
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Communication
Redundancy in communication (contin.)
The Ethernet module can be plugged into the device one or
more times. This allows the same or different protocol applications to be executed multiple times. For IEC 61850 several
networks are possible, e.g. one for client-server communication
to a substation controller and a 2nd for the GOOSE connections
between the devices that could be assigned to the process bus
(Fig. 1.6/22). Through the client-server architecture of
IEC 61850, one server (device) can simultaneously send reports
to a maximum of 6 clients. The doubling of the interfaces on
the Ethernet module enables the establishment of redundant
network structures, e.g. optical rings or the redundant
connection to 2 switches.
Protection links can be implemented in double. If one connection fails, a switch is made to the 2nd connection.
Station controller
IEC 61850 Client
Station controller
Ethernet
Switch
1.2
1.4
Star coupler
Serial optical
USART module
1.5
1.6
Client-Server
communication via
the integrated
Ethernet interface
Fig. 1.6 / 22
1.7
GOOSE ring
Ethernet module
with integrated
Separate client-server and GOOSE communication

via IEC 61850 with further serial connection to an
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
For an application template of a device there is an appropriate

communication mapping (Fig. 1.6 / 23). In a communication
matrix, the user modies this mapping and erases and completes his own information. This mapping le is nally loaded
by DIGSI into the device, and determines the scope of information that is provided via the protocol. Protocol mappings can
be copied between devices, if they contain the same functions,
and can be exported into substation control applications.
2.4
2.5
Time synchronization
Time synchronization can occur through 1 or 2 timers. Depending on time source, precision of 1 ms is attained. Events are
logged with a date and time with 1 ms resolution (Fig. 1.6 / 24).
The following sources are possible, and can be congured
independently as a 1st or 2nd timer:
1.1
1.3
Integrated setting of communication in DIGSI 5

A communication protocol is con gured with DIGSI 5. According
to module type, DIGSI 5 offers the user the selection of the
respective, permissible protocols/applications. The protocol
parameters are set (e.g. baud rate, IP address etc.). Then the
module is initialized with the protocol application and, for
example, a serial module with the IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3
protocol and the communication parameters are loaded.
DIGSI 5
Fig. 1.6 / 23
Communication assignment with DIGSI 5 for the

IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
2.6
Port G for IRIG-B- or DCF77 telegram.

A highly precise second pulse can also be launched there for
special applications
2.7
Protocol interfaces via plug-in modules

(SNTP, IEEE 1588, IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3 etc.)
2.8
SNTP via port J

(integrated Ethernet interface (plug or integr.Port J))
2.9
2.10
Via a protection interface from the timing master

Via the DIGSI 5 protocol (not cyclical)
Internal time with integrated Quartz

Time synchronization in the device is battery-buffered. Thus
the internal clock continues to run with the Quartz precision
of the device even in case of failure of the auxiliary voltage.
Fig. 1.6 / 24
Time settings in DIGSI 5
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Communication
Designed to communicate Process bus
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
Process bus IEC 61850-9-2

The process bus measures current and voltage in a device
(merging unit). The measured values are digitalized in the
merging unit and transported to the protection devices via
optical Ethernet connections with help of the IEC 61850-9-2
communication protocol. The protection devices no longer
work with analog measured values, but directly use the
digitalized measured values from the sampled values data
stream.
The merging units are positioned in close proximity to the
transformer to minimize wiring work. The sampled values data
stream generated by the Merging Units can be transmitted to
one or several protection devices.
The PB201 Extension Module for SIPROTEC 5 enables simple
upgrading from SIPROTEC 5 devices to process bus solutions.
Arrangement relative to parallel operation in the feeder
with process bus
To test the process bus, a simple protection can be used for a
feeder. Modern protection devices such as the SIPROTEC 5
series have a modular expandable design. For instance, an
existing SIPROTEC 7SJ85 overcurrent protection device can be
expanded with process bus inputs. This enables a cost efcient
piloting. As another benet, state-of-the-art protection devices
are capable of efciently protecting more than one object. One
SIPROTEC 7SJ85, for example, is sufcient to protect up to
seven feeders. These two features and the fact that overcurrent
protection only requires the currents of a merging unit enable
effective parallel operation. If a system with less than seven
feeders is protected with one device, this device will still have
available capacity. This allows for a parallel arrangement with
the process bus. For this purpose, the device is tted with a process bus input module and the feeder current is simultaneously
measured in a merging unit.
Fig. 1.6 / 25
Separate client-server and GOOSE communication

via IEC 61850 with further serial connection to an
The current measured by the merging unit is subsequently

connected to the protection device via the process bus. The
protection device receives the measured current values twice.
Once, it measures the values itself and the second time it
receives the current values via the process bus. The protection
function is instantiated twice. The protection device protects
the same feeder via the conventional setting and via the
process bus. This enables direct comparison of the process bus
and the direct measurement.
7SJ85

4$
)* 9ROWDJHFXUUHQWSKDVH
2.7
11

&WUO
7SC805
2.8
0HUJLQJ8QLW
2.9
08
2.10
11
3
3.1
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
Fig. 1.6/ 26
Arrangement relative to parallel operation in the feeder with process bus
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$

&WUO
Communication
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
Fig. 1.6/ 27
Communication protocols in the Substation automation and power control systems
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
For you, designed to communicate in SIPROTEC 5 means:
Adaptation to the topology of your communication
structure using settings (ring, star or network)
Scalable redundancy in hardware and software
(protocols) to match your requirements
Pluggable, upgradeable communication modules
Extensive routines for testing connections, functions
and operating workows
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Simply usable Engineering in user language
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
IEC 61850 is more than just an Ethernet-based substation

control protocol. It comprehensively denes the
engineering process, data and service models, conformity
testing, and end-to-end communication in control
systems.
In Edition 2, the inuence of the standard is extended to
more sectors of the energy industry.
1.4
1.5
For you, IEC 61850 simply usable means:

IEC 61850 system specication and system description
DIGSI 5 helps to make the IEC 61850 data model easy to
manage
DIGSI 5 supports the IEC 61850 engineering process and
the system specication
Flexible data object engineering enables simple,
efcient operating concepts
Interoperability with IEC 61850 Edition 1 and Edition 2
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Ethernet-based substation automation protocol

IEC 61850 is more than just a substation automation protocol.
The standard comprehensively denes data types, functions
and communication in station networks. In Edition 2, the
inuence of the standard is extended to more sectors of the
energy industry. Siemens actively participated in designing the
process of adapting Edition 1 for Edition 2 for the purposes of
the standardization framework. Edition 2 lls in certain omissions and denes additional applications. As a global market
leader with Edition 1 SIPROTEC 4 devices, between Editions 1
and 2 we have solved the issues of interoperability, exibility
and compatibility: Cooperation with Edition 1 devices is
possible without difculties.
The internal structure of SIPROTEC 5 devices conforms to
IEC 61850. The net result is that rst time integrated, end-toend system and device engineering from the single plant
line to device parameterization conforming to the guiding
principles of IEC 61850 is possible.
DIGSI 5 with integrated IEC 61850 engineering covers the

complexity of the standard with a sophisticated operator
guidance system. In standard engineering, you as the user will
not be required to deal with the details of IEC 61850: you will
be addressed in your user language.
In the user language, distance protection is distance protection
with zones and dependent functions, not a collection of logical
nodes. Reports are message lists in which information about
the systems control is congured. GOOSE connections are
simply congured in the system congurator with source and
target information. You work in your language, with functions
and messages associated with a device. If you wish, you can
view the allocated IEC 61850 objects in the IEC 61850 protocol
language. This bilingualism is supported throughout the user
interface by DIGSI 5 and the export les on the substation
control system. As the user you can even add comments to the
data points you dene in your language, and then export them
for data purposes in the ICD and SCD description.
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
Fig. 1.7 / 1
System specication and conguration in DIGSI 5

the complexity of IEC 61850 does not reach the interface
Fig. 1.7 / 2
Creating the IEC 61850 station
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Simply usable Flexible engineering
Flexible engineering offers IEC 61850 experts a wide range
of freedom with regard to designing their own IEC 61850
structure, including with user-dened functions and objects.
Flexible object modeling, freedom in addressing objects and
exible communication services assure the highest possible
degree of interoperability and effective exchange and expansion concepts.
The name of the logical device (ldName) is freely editable. For
example, the standard-conforming name CTRL can be changed
to CONTROL. Structural changes can also be made by changing
the logical device (LD), so that the interface structure can be
exibly adapted to the users own requirements. Rigid manufacturer specications are a thing of the past. Prex and instance
of the logical node (LN) can also be edited.
The standard xes the length and rules that are checked by
DIGSI 5 when they are entered.
A high degree of exibility in communication is offered for

conguration GOOSE messages and reports. Addresses, dataset
names etc, can be set by you the user.
Flexible engineering offers a high degree of design freedom on
many levels, enhancing interoperability for more complete
communication interchangeability.
With the single line diagram, you as the customer can view the
topological structure of the system. DIGSI 5 has been prepared
so that it can export this topological structure of a system to
the IEC 61850-conforming SSD le. This description as an
extension of the SCD le represents the primary system for
technical data purposes. In the future, the objects of the device
with which processes of the primary system are controlled can
be adapted exibly to reect the customers specications.
Flexible engineering is the key to bringing the system view into
harmony with the IEC 61850 structure of the device.
Function levels of a device, which the standard maps to Logical

Nodes (LN), can be deleted, copied, and extended with the
users own objects. Messages can be added to a switching
object such as the LN XCBR, e.g., monitoring messages for a
circuit breaker that have not been dened in the original LN.
As the user, you can organize all of the information associated
with a given switching object in a Logical Nodes (LN).
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
Logical Nodes (LN) can be added from a library. These instructions can be supplemented with your own objects. You can also
dene and create generic nodes. For example, there are Logical
Nodes (LN), whose functionality is extended by the user. These
user-dened functions can be loaded into the device and run
there. Monitoring functions can be created and expanded as
required.
2.4
2.5
Fig. 1.7 / 3
Editor for adapting the IEC 61850 structure in the

SIPROTEC 5 view
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
IEC 61850 simply usable with SIPROTEC 5 means:
Converting the complexity of the IEC 61850 data model
into your familiar user language
Integrated, consistent system and device engineering
(from the single line to the complete system and device
parameterization on the basis of the IEC 61850 data
model)
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
Flexible object modeling, freedom in addressing

objects and exible communication services assure
the highest possible degree of interoperability and
effective exchange and expansion concepts
3.4
Full compatibility and interoperability with IEC 61850

Edition 1
3.6
3.5
3.7
Test und Diagnostics

Holistic workow DIGSI 5 Test Suite
1
1.1
1.2
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with extensive test and

diagnostics functions. These are available to users in
SIPROTEC 5 in conjunction with DIGSI 5 and they shorten
the testing and power-up phase signicantly.
1.3
The DIGSI 5 Test Suite offers:

Testing for functions and protection functions
Circuit-breaker test and AR test functions
Communication test including loop test
Protocol test
1.4
1.5
The integrated test sequencer
1.6
The objective of the extensive test and diagnostic functions

that are made available to the user with SIPROTEC 5 together
with DIGSI 5 is to shorten testing and power-up times. All test
functions are integrated in DIGSI 5. This enables engineering
including the device test to be carried out with one tool. The
most important functions should be listed as examples here.
There are also other specic test functions depending on the
device type.
In the hardware test, the state of the binary inputs can be read
out by DIGSI 5, and contacts and LEDs can be switched or
routed through DIGSI 5 for test purposes.
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
An innovative concept enables functions to be tested via the

test sequencer integrated in the device. Normally, the device receives analog and binary signals from the process or from an
external secondary test equipment. Previously, the protection
functions and communication were tested with variables such
as these. With SIPROTEC 5 devices these variables can now
be substituted with values supplied from an integrated test
equipment in a simulation mode. For this, the analog and
binary inputs are decoupled from the process and connected
to the integrated test sequencer.
The tester uses DIGSI 5 to create a test sequence, e.g., a
short-circuit sequence, loads it into the device and runs it in
simulation mode. The test sequencer in DIGSI 5 is capable of
handling test sequences consisting of up to six test steps. When
loaded into the device, this test sequence is run in real time and
simulates the functions of the device like a real process at
binary and analog inputs. Protection functions, control, logic
functions, and communication can thus be tested in real time
without secondary test equipment.
The parameters measured at voltage and current inputs are

represented in vector diagrams divided according to magnitude and phase angle (Fig. 1.8 / 1). Thus it is easy to detect and
check if the connections in the measurand wiring are transposed, as well as the vector group or the direction between
current and voltage. In devices that are connected via protection interfaces, even analog measurement points of remote
ends can be represented as vectors. This makes it easy to check
the stability of a differential protection.
In the wiring test, the wiring connections between devices are
tested. If the devices are connected to a network via Ethernet,
this test can be carried out with unprecedented ease. For this,
the contact on a device is closed with the aid of DIGSI 5.
This contact is connected to a binary input of one or more
SIPROTEC 5 devices via a wire connection. These automatically
send a report to DIGSI 5 to the effect that the binary input has
been activated by the closing of the contact. The tester can
then log this test and check the wiring between the devices.
The test sequence is started manually from DIGSI 5 or controlled via a binary input. This also makes it possible to test the
interaction between several devices.
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
Fig. 1.8 / 1
Display of analog measuring points in vector diagrams
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Testing device functionality and protection functions
The graphical representation of characteristic curves or diagrams of protection functions not only help the engineer who
parameterizes the test functions, but also the engineer who
tests them (Fig. 1.8 / 2).
1.1
1.2
In this test, the operating point of a protection function is

represented graphically in the diagrams, e.g., the calculated
impedance of a distance protection in the zone diagram.
Additionally, messages relating to the protection function are
logged, e.g. pickup or operate.
1.3
This test can be carried out with signals from the process or
with the test equipment integrated in the device.
1.6
1.4
1.5
1.7
Circuit-breakter test and AR test function
1.8
1.9
Fig. 1.8 / 2
Test of protection function with operating point of the

protection function in response characteristic curve
2.1
Rx Tx
Fiber
optic
A circuit-breaker test can also be deactivated and activated

without an interlocking check.
Auxiliary conductor
connection
Communication
converter
Copper 1
Optical
loop
Communication
converter
Copper 2
Communication testing
Since communication is an integral component of the devices
and they are interconnected either directly or via a substation
control system, they must be thoroughly tested at commissioning and monitored continuously during operation. The integrated test tools assist the user in ensuring that the communication paths are tested and monitored efciently.
Loop test for the protection interface
This test is launched by DIGSI 5 for a communication module
and a selected interface. It is used to detect faults in subsections when inspecting the physical connection of the communication path (Fig. 1.8 / 3). Test telegrams are sent from the
transmitting side Tx of an interface, and these are measured
again at the receiving interface Rx. The user thus has the
capability to insert loops at various points in the communication network and to test the connection of the loop. The
number of telegrams sent, received and corrupted is displayed
continuously in DIGSI 5, so that the quality of the connection
can be monitored.
LOOP #1
Fig. 1.8 / 3
LOOP #2
2.2
SIP5-0034.EN.ai
Switching sequences can be initiated via DIGSI 5 to test the

automatic reclosing (AR). However, this is only possible if
remote switching via the key switch is permitted. In addition, a
security prompt (conrmation ID) must be entered for switching authorization via DIGSI 5. There are additional security
prompts for non-interlocked switching. This provides protection
against unauthorized use or inadvertent actuation during
operation.
2.3
2.4
Loop test for protection interfaces
Online monitoring of communication connections
2.5
The data ow at communication interfaces can be constantly

monitored. To do this, the number of telegrams that are sent,
received and corrupted per time unit for serial connections and
Ethernet intefaces during operation is constantly measured and
displayed. If faults occur, an alarm can be issued.
A network management and monitoring system performs
detailed monitoring of Ethernet modules via the SNMP protocol.
For protection interfaces the delay time of the signals is also
monitored, and it is calculated during synchronization by means
of a highly precise second pulse in the transmit and receive
direction. Additionally, the communication topology is also
monitored constantly there and displayed in DIGSI 5.
GOOSE connections can be monitored permanently at the
receiving site during operation. This means that an outage is
detected within a few seconds.
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Test und Diagnostics

1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
Protocol test
For the protocol test, specic signal
values are set and reset using DIGSI 5
(Fig. 1.8 / 4). The test mode itself is congurable. The device sends the selected
value to the client using the congured
communication protocol e.g., IEC 61850.
In this case, a report is generated or a
GOOSE message is sent automatically
when this information is switched
correspondingly.
The device can be used to test substation
control information for all protocols (e.g.,
IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103, serial DNP3,
DNP3 TCP) without the going through the
process of generating signal states with a
test equipment. Signals that are transmitted across protection interfaces can
also be tested.
2.1
2.2
2.3
Fig. 1.8 / 4
Protocol test for substation automation technology or for GOOSE and

protection interfaces
Fig. 1.8 / 5
Test of external timers
2.4
Test and display of external timers
2.5
If the system time of the device is set

externally using 1 or 2 timers, this time
can be read out in the device or with
DIGSI 5. When the time protocol returns
these values, it indicates which timer
is setting the system time and issues a
statement regarding the quality of the
time source. Synchronization via external
clocks can thus be monitored and
displayed during operation (Fig. 1.8 / 5).
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Analysis of function charts
(CFC debugging)
1
1.1
Logic plans prepared in the form

of function charts (CFCs) can be tested
ofine in DIGSI 5. To this end, test
sequences can be generated with the
DIGSI 5 Sequencer to act on logical
inputs of the function chart or the analog
and binary inputs of the device. This
makes it possible to test not only the
function chart but also its interaction
with upstream and downstream functions. During this test, the values of
variables are displayed and changes over
time are logged in records that can be
analyzed later, e.g., with SIGRA. This
enables even complex temporal dependencies to be analyzed with ease.
Function charts (CFC) can thus be
created ofine in the ofce and tested
without using a device.
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
Fig. 1.8 / 6
Easy analyzing of function charts
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
For you, using the DIGSI 5 Test Suite means:
Considerably shorter testing and commissioning time
Commissioning support personnel in the adjacent substation is no longer
required
All test routines performed are documented
Testing without secondary test equipment is also possible
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Safety Concept
Safety and security inside Safety
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Safety for personnel and equipment are rst priority, but

availability is also critically important. And as the plant
landscape becomes more and more open and complex, the
conventional security mechanisms are no longer adequate.
Safety and Cyber Security includes:

Security concept in device design
Information security against IT attacks
(IT threats from the outside)
For this reason, a security concept has been implemented

in the SIPROTEC 5 device architecture that is designed to
address the multidimensional aspects of security in a
holistic approach.
Multilayer safety mechanisms in all links of the safety
chain provide you with the highest possible level of safety
and availability.
1.7
1.8
1.9
Security/IT Security:
Safety:
Prevention of threats presented by people and the

environment during operation
Prevention of dangers presented by a

technological system
2
People/Environment
2.1
People/Environment
2.2
2.3
2.4
Technological system
2.5
Fig. 1.9 / 1
Graphic of distinction between safety and security
Multilayer safety mechanisms
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
SIP5-0059.EN.ai
Technological system
Safety comprises all aspects of protection for personnel and

primary equipment installations. The devices and DIGSI 5
support this from the functional standpoint. Cyber Security
measures ensure secure operations in networks.
The manufacturer can support the user with these measures.
The responsibility to implement a comprehensive Cyber Security
concept lies with the operator of the system. The concept must
consider all system components with regard to all technical
aspects of Cyber Security.
Safety in the hardware design
The device system consisting of con gured hardware building
blocks, each with its own cooling system, reduces thermal
load, prolongs service life and enables error-free operation in
a wide ambient temperature range.
High availability is achieved with the auxiliary power supply
concept. Central wide range supply ensures the provision of
a common voltage to all components. Individually required
voltage levels are created in the modules concerned. Thus,
the possible outage of a local voltage level causes only one
module to malfunction, not the entire device. This selective
outage is reported.
Crossover wiring of internal analog/digital converters enables
the devices analog inputs to be monitored effectively and
potentially threatened functions to be blocked early, like
differential protection if a current channel fails.
Storage of calibration data in the analog acquisition module

enables completely safe exchange or extensions within the
module unit.
Fully pluggable terminals and plug-in module mean that a
wiring test is no longer necessary when devices or modules
are replaced.
Now that the current transformer is integrated in the terminal
block (Safety CT-Plug), open secondary current circuits cannot
occur anymore during replacement of a device or a module.
When the terminal is pulled out, the transformer is always
opened on the safe, secondary circuit.
The device does not need to be opened to adjust binary
input thresholds or adapt them to the rated current of the
transformer (1 A, 5 A). The device does not need to be
opened to replace the battery or change the plug-in modules.
Monitoring functions
Comprehensive monitoring functions ensure secure operation
by fast detection of irregularities and automatic initiation of
appropriate measures to avert incorrect responses. Depending
on the severity of the irregularity detected, a warning may be
issued, the functions concerned be blocked, or the entire
device may be isolated by disconnecting the life contact. In all
cases, the diagnostic buffer outputs the cause and appropriate
take-action instruction.
Safety Concept
Safety and security inside Safety
Hardware monitoring
Monitoring of protection interfaces
All hardware in the device is continuously monitored. This

includes for example the CPU, the auxiliary voltage, the battery
status, the internal clock, the storage modules, the analog
inputs, the bus connections, the expansion and communication
modules.
32-bit CRC checksum monitoring compliant with CCITT / ITU

for detecting corrupted telegrams
Monitoring of the analog inputs

As a data source for the protection functions, monitoring of the
analog inputs is assured in multiple stages. Some monitoring
functions are primarily dedicated to the commissioning
(incorrect or missing connections) and only generate a warning
indication. These include:
Current and voltage balance
Current and voltage sum
Phase-rotation supervision.
Other monitoring functions detect outages during operation
and rapidly initiate blocking of the affected functions:
Fuse failure monitor (loss of voltage)
Fast current sum supervision and broken wire monitoring for
the power circuits.
In addition, the proper working method of all analog-digital
converters is assured by plausibility monitoring at the sampling
level.
Tripping circuit monitoring (ANSI 74TC)
The circuit-breaker coil and its feed lines are monitored via two
binary inputs. If the tripping circuit is interrupted, and alarm
indication is generated.
Communication connections
Invalid telegrams are agged and are not used by the

protection system
Input signals (analog)
Sporadic interference is ignored, persistent interference

triggers blocking of the affected protection (differential
protection) and control functions
1.3
Propagation times are measured and taken into account for

purposes of differential protection
1.5
The topology of the protected area is monitored. Outages

in the communication connections automatically trigger
switching to other communication paths (ring to chain
operation or hot standby), or otherwise to blocking the entire
protected area. The same applies if outage of a device in the
topology is detected.
1.6
1.4
CRC checksum monitoring, sequence number monitoring and

repetition time monitoring for detecting incorrect or missing
telegrams
Applications consider the state of GOOSE messages that are
corrupt or transmitted under test conditions and switch to
safe mode.
Load management
The free congurability of protection functions and function
charts (CFC) enables them to be adapted to an enormous range
of applications. During engineering with DIGSI 5, the integrated
load model calculates the resulting device load. This ensures
that only viable congurations can be loaded into the device.
1.9
iA (SC); iB (SC); iC (SC); iN (SC)
iN
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.6
2.7
2.8
Monitoring
ADU1
1.8
2.5
Test modes and the health status of information are forwarded

and handled uniformly and consistently throughout the entire
system. Analysis functions take the modes into consideration
and guarantee secure operation. This is particularly critical
when protection and control-related data is transmitted via
protection interfaces and IEC 61850 GOOSE messages. But it
applies equally for signal processing in the function charts (CFC).
Input signals (discrete)
iC
1.7
Monitoring of IEC 61850 GOOSE messages
iA
iB
1.1
1.2
Standardized management of device modes
Telegrams are monitored for correct transmission. Faults

are reported via warning messages. Data associated with
protection and control is transmitted via protection interfaces
and IEC 61850 GOOSE messages. The transmitted information
is also monitored constantly on the receiving side.
2.9
Current:
iN (SC)= iA (SC) + iB (SC)+ iC (SC)
2.10
Voltage:
V0 (SC)=
1
3
3.1
(VA (SC)+ VB (SC)+ VC (SC))
3.2
ADU2
VA (SC); VB (SC); VC (SC); V0 (SC)
VB
VC
Vda-dn
(V0)
Fig. 1.9 / 2
3.3
Condition satised:
Measuring circuit OK
SIP5-0058.EN.ai
VA
3.4
3.5
3.6
Monitoring of analog input circuits for malfunctions during analog-to-digital conversion
3.7
Safety Concept
Safety and security inside Cyber Security
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Cyber Security
With the increasing integration of eld devices in Ethernetbased communication networks, communication must be
secured against internal faults and attacks from outside.
Standards such as NERC CIP (North American Electric Reliability
Corporation Critical Infrastructure Protection) and the BDEW
Whitepaper contain requirements for the safe operation of
devices in the critical communications infrastructure, and are
directed at both manufacturers and operators (requirements
for secure control and telecommunication systems by the
Bundesverband der Energie- und Wasserwirtschaft e.V. German
Association of Energy and Water Industries).
Cyber Security must be incorporated into the design of devices
right from the start. This has been carried out systematically in
the case of SIPROTEC 5. Measures in the hardware ensure that
key material for protecting the communication and datasets of
a device is stored in absolute security. Communication stacks
that are hardened against cyber attacks, a multistage access
concept in operation and permanent logging of all authorized
and unauthorized access attempts and of critical Cyber Security
actions provide the operator with a high degree of Cyber
Security when the devices are integrated in the operators
network.
By default only the connection to DIGSI 5 is enabled in the
device. Consequently, by default all other Ethernet services and
their respective ports are inactive in the device. For example, if
the RSTP ring redundancy protocol is the only protocol to be
used, then the user has to activate the protocol with DIGSI 5
(Fig. 1.9/3). This approach of secure default settings gives a
potential attacker no open interfaces, and only services that are
really in use are activated in a network.
been integrated in SIPROTEC 5 and DIGSI 5, and these are

described in the next section.
Fig. 1.9 / 3
Isolatable communication services during access

via Ethernet networks
Corporate /
transfer / network
Remote
DIGSI PC
Substation Server Network

Device Lan on
Substation
Control Network
DIGSI 5 PC
SICAM PAS w.
NTP Server
Product Security Blueprint

The Product Security Blueprint in conjunction with the
Application Note SIP5-APP-009 for SIPROTEC 5 devices provide
you with valuable notes in integrating devices in your network
and operating them securely. An overall security concept
should be drawn up and maintained in a Spanning Security
Blueprint. This documents typical network congurations, the
services used, and their ports. Measures for updating those
components that are critical for Cyber Security, password
protection and antivirus protection are also described.
Fig. 1.9 / 4 shows a recommendation of this kind for protecting a
switchgear. The SIPROTEC 5 devices are integrated in optical
Ethernet rings via switches. In these rings, the respective
Ethernet-based substation automation protocol, e.g., IEC 61850
or DNP3 and the systems control run without loss of performance. Accesses from a non-secure external network are
allowed via a gateway that is responsible for safeguarding the
network. The accessing party is authenticated, e.g., by DIGSI 5,
in the gateway, and communication is encrypted via VPN. This
is fully supported by the communication services of DIGSI 5.
SIP5-0055.EN.ai
Fig. 1.9 / 4
Secure operation of devices within a switchgear with

remote access from an external network
Fig. 1.9 / 5
Settings dialogs for passwords and security prompts
The technical control network and the network for remote

access can also be separated entirely by appropriate selection
of an independent Ethernet port for communication between
the device and DIGSI 5. This falls within the scope of the
operators philosophy. With their concept of pluggable
modules, the devices also enable solutions with separate
networks. An extensive range of Cyber Security features have
3.7
Safety Concept
Safety and security inside Cyber Security
Multilayer access security for device and DIGSI 5
Secure authentication takes place between the device and
DIGSI 5. This precludes another program from accessing the
devices and reading or writing data there.
If the optional connection password has been activated for
remote access, remote access via the Ethernet cannot take
place until the password has been successfully veried. Only
once the connection has been established, the user has
read/write access to the device. This connection password
conforms to the Cyber Security requirements for assigning
passwords dened in NERC CIP. It has 830 characters and
must include upper and lower case letters, digits and special
characters. Subsequent data exchange then takes place via an
encrypted, uninterceptable connection through an Ethernet
module.
Then, conrmation codes are requested for safety relevant
actions that have write access to the device, for example
changing parameters. These can be congured by the user
and there are various conrmation codes for the protection
and control functionality (Fig. 1.9 / 5, page 1.9 / 3).
These Cyber Security measures during remote access to the
device with DIGSI 5 ensure secure communication. The query
for password when logging into the device and the queries for
conrmation codes when executing safety-relevant actions
protect both the application and the user equally.
Incorrect password entries are identied and logged. An alarm

can be triggered via an independent telecontrol link. Cyber
Security critical operations such as remote access or reparameterization are recorded continuously. These entries cannot be
deleted from the device. They can be transmitted to the
substation automation unit and archived there. All les that can
be loaded into the device via DIGSI 5 are digitally signed. In this
way, corruption from outside by viruses or trojans of, e.g.
rmware les, is reliably prevented.
An additional aspect to consider is, that it is often not desirable
to have to enter the connection password or conrmation
codes during the conguration and testing phases. In contrast,
during this phase the reading of data in the operating state is at
the focus. Comprehensive access security can be deactivated in
the device until commissioning has been completed, and then
nally activated for operation.
Security Patch Management (Security updates) for DIGSI 5
In response to the requirements for protecting power equipment, patch management was introduced for DIGSI 5. This
means that regular security patches for the software components from third-party vendors integrated into DIGSI 5 or used
by DIGSI 5 are tested for compatibility with DIGSI 5. A list of
available security updates and compatibility notes is made
available for downloading in the Internet and is updated at
monthly intervals.
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
For you, safety and Cyber Security mean:
2.10
Long-lasting, rugged hardware with outstanding

EMC immunity and resistance to weather and
mechanical loads
Sophisticated self-monitoring routines identify and

report device malfunctions immediately and reliably
3.2
Conformance with the stringent Cyber Security

requirements dened in the BDEW Whitepaper and
NERC CIP
3.3
Encryption along the entire communication segment

between DIGSI 5 and the device
3.5
Automatic recording of access attempts and securitycritical operations on the devices and systems
3.6
3.1
3.4
3.7
Safety Concept
Notes
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
SIPROTEC 5 Devices
SIPROTEC 5 Devices
1
Chapter
1.1
1.2
Device Types
2.1
1.3
2.2
1.4
2.3
1.5
2.4
1.6
Line Protection
2.5
1.7
Distance protection
SIPROTEC 7SA82, 7SA86, 7SA87
1.8
Line differential protection

SIPROTEC 7SD82, 7SD86, 7SD87
1.9
Combined line differential and distance protection

SIPROTEC 7SL82, 7SL86, 7SL87
2
2.1
2.2
Breaker management
SIPROTEC 7VK87
SIPROTEC 7SJ86
2.3
Transformator Protection
2.6
2.4
2.7
2.8
Bay Controller SIPROTEC 6MD85, 6MD86
2.9
2.10
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
2 / 2 SIPROTEC 5 Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring Siemens SIPROTEC 5.01 Edition 3
Device Types
1
7UDQVPLVVLRQ
*HQHUDWLRQ
'LVWULEXWLRQ
6-
6/
6$
66
.(
6'
.(
0'
6-
9.
6.
1.2
.(
0'
87
6$
6/
0'
6$
6'
6-
6-
66
6-
6'
6-
87
.(
6-
6/
87
1.1
6-
1.3
6-
1.4
6'
6.
1.5
6'
6.
6$
6$
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
0
2.1
2.2
2.3
Fig. 2.1/ 1
Application areas of SIPROTEC 5 devices
2.4
Fig. 2.1/ 1 provides an overview of the application of

SIPROTEC 5 devices in the grid. This is a simplied illustration.
Particularly with the advent of regenerative suppliers, energy is
being injected into the grid at all voltage levels.
Protection functions
The protection objects are the busbars, the overhead lines or

cables, and the transformers. The corresponding protection
devices have been assigned to these objects.
Distance protection with PMU and control
7SA82, 7SA86, 7SA87
Line differential protection with PMU and

control
7SD82, 7SD86, 7SD87
On the next pages youll nd beside the SIPROTEC 5 relay

selection guide the application examples for SIPROTEC 5
devices.
Combined line differential and distance

protection with PMU and control
7SL82, 7SL86, 7SL87
Circuit-breaker management device with PMU

and control
7VK87
Device types
Overcurrent protection for lines with PMU
7SJ86
2.6
7UT82, 7UT85, 7UT86,

7UT87
2.7
Now that you have been introduced to the innovation highlights of the SIPROTEC 5 devices, the following text will
describe the devices. They are easily identied with the aid of a
ve-digit abbreviation code.
Overcurrent protection with PMU and control
Transformer differential protection

Transformer differential protection with PMU,
control and monitoring
Fig. shows the denition of device types based on designation
Bay controllers for control/interlocking tasks

with PMU and monitoring, optionally with
protection function
7SS85
2.10
6MD85, 6MD86
Bay controller
Fault Recorder with PMU

Distinguishing features
Denition of device types
2.9
3.1
Fault recorders and power quality recorders
Main protection functions
Fig. 2.1/ 2
7SK82, 7SK85
Busbar protection
Busbar protection
2.5
2.8
Motor protection
Motor protection with PMU and control
YY
7SJ82, 7SJ85
Line protection
The rst digit (6 or 7) stands for the digital equipment.

The two letters describe the functionality, and the last two
digits identify typical properties. For further details, please
refer to the catalog section of the respective device description.
7 XX
Device types
Table 2.1/ 1
7KE85
Available device types of the SIPROTEC 5 system
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
SIPROTEC 5 Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring Siemens SIPROTEC 5.01 Edition 3 2.1/ 1

Function overview SIPROTEC 5
= basic
= not available
Abbr.
7SA86
3-pole
Protection functions for 1-pole tripping
1-pole
Hardware quantity structure expandable
I/O
21/21N
Distance protection
Z<, V/ (V,I)
21T
Impedance protection for transformers
Z<
87L
Line differential protection for 2 line ends
87L
Line differential protection for 3 to 6 line ends

(dependent on Signicant properties)
14
Locked rotor protection
I> + n<
24
Overexcitation protection
V/f
25
Synchrocheck, synchronizing function
Sync
27
Undervoltage protection, 3-phase
V<
27
Undervoltage protection, positive-sequence system
V1<
27
Undervoltage protection, universal, Vx
Vx<
27Q
Q>/V<
32, 37
Power protection active/reactive power
P<>, Q<>
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
Temperature Supervision
46
Negative sequence overcurrent protection
I2>
46
Unbalanced-load protection (thermal)
I2 t>
46
Negative sequence overcurrent protection with direction I2>, (V2,I2)
47
Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence system
V2>
48
Starting-time supervision for motors
Istart
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
7SD87
Functions
ANSI
Type
1.5
7SA82
1.4
7SD86
1.3
7SD82
1.2
7SA87
1.1
Line differential
protection
Distance protection
49
Thermal overload protection
, It
2.6
49
Thermal overload protection for RLC lter elements of a

capacitor bank
, It
2.7
49H
Hot spot calculation
h, It
49R
Thermal overload protection, rotor
2.8
50/51 TD
Overcurrent protection, phases
I>
2.9
50N/51N TD
Overcurrent protection, ground
IN>
50HS
I>>>
Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault
SOTF
2.10
3
50N/51N TD
Overcurrent protection, 1-phase
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns
Sensitive ground-current protection for systems with

resonant or isolated neutral
INs>
Intermittent ground fault protection
Iie>
3.1
3.2
50/51
Emergency overcurrent protection, phases
I>
3.3
50N/51N
Emergency overcurrent protection, ground faults
IE>
50/51 TD
Overcurrent protection for RLC lter elements of a

capacitor bank
I>
CBFP
3.4
3.5
50BF
Circuit-breaker failure protection, 3-pole
50BF
Circuit-breaker failure protection, 1-/3-pole
CBFP
3.6
50RS
Circuit-breaker restrike protection
CBRS
3.7
Further functions continued on the next pages
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.1
2.6
2.7
1.6
1.5
Fault Recorder
Circuit breaker
management
1.4
1.3
7KE85
1.2
7VK87
1.1
6MD86
7UT86
6MD85
7UT85
Bay controller
Busbar protection
7UT82
7SS85
7SK85
7UT87
Transformer
differential
protection
Motor protection
7SL82
7SK82
7SJ86
7SJ85
7SJ82
7SL87
7SL86
Overcurrent
protection
Combined line
differential and
distance protection
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.9
2.8
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
2.10
3
3.1
3.7

= basic
= not available
1.1
1.2
7SA87
7SD82
7SD86
7SD87
ANSI
Functions
50EF
End fault protection
50L
Load-jam protection
I>L
51V
Voltage dependent overcurrent protection
t=f(I,V)
1.8
59C
Peak overvoltage protection, 3-phase, for capacitors
V> cap.
1.9
59
Overvoltage protection, 3-phase
V>
59
Overvoltage protection, positive-sequence system
V1>
59
Overvoltage protection, Compounding
V1comp>
59N
Overvoltage protection, zero-sequence system
V0>
59
Overvoltage protection, universal, Vx
Vx>
1.6
1.7
2
2.1
2.2
Abbr.
7SA86
1.5
Type
1.4
7SA82
1.3
Line differential
protection
Distance protection
60C
Current-unbalance protection for capacitor banks
Iunbal>
2.3
66
Restart inhibit for motors
It
2.4
67
Directional overcurrent protection, phases
I>, (V,I)
67N
Directional overcurrent protection for ground faults in

grounded systems
IN>, (V,I)
67N
Directional overcurrent protection, ground
IN>, (V,I)
67Ns
Dir. sensitive ground-fault detection for systems with

resonant or isolated neutral incl. a) V0>, b) Cos-/SinPhi,
c) Transient fct., d) Phi(V,I), e) Admittanz
2.5
Directional intermittent ground fault protection
Iie dir>
68
Power-swing blocking
Z/t
74TC
Trip circuit supervision
TCS
78
Out-of-step protection
Z/t
79
Automatic reclosing, 3-pole
AR
79
Automatic reclosing, 1-/3-pole
AR
81O
Overfrequency protection
f>
2.7
81U
Underfrequency protection
f<
2.8
81R
Rate-of-frequency-change protection
df/dt
2.6
2.9
2.10
3
85/21
Teleprotection for distance protection
85/27
Weak or no infeed: Echo and Tripping
85/67N
Teleprotection for directional ground fault protection
86
Lockout
87B
Busbar differential protection
3.1
WI
Bay
87T
87T
Transformer differential protection for phase angle

regulating transformer (single core)
87T
Transformer differential protection for phase angle

regulating transformer (two core)
3.5
87T
Transformer differential protection for special

transformers
3.6
87T Node
Differential protection (Node protection for

Autotransformer)
I Node
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.7
Further functions continued on the next pages
1.3
7SJ85
7SJ86
7SK82
7SK85
7UT82
7UT85
7UT86
7UT87
7SS85
6MD85
6MD86
7VK87
7KE85
1.4
7SJ82
Fault Recorder
Circuit breaker
management
1.2
7SL87
Bay controller
Busbar protection
1.1
7SL86
Transformer
differential
protection
Motor protection
7SL82
Overcurrent
protection
Combined line
differential and
distance protection
1.8
1.9
2.3
2.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
2.1
2.2
2.5
2.9
2.10
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
2.6
2.7
2.8
3.7

= basic
= not available
1.1
1.2
1.3
7SD82
7SD86
7SD87
1.8
Abbr.
7SA87
1.7
Functions
7SA86
1.6
ANSI
87N T
Restricted ground-fault protection
IN
87M
Motor differential protection
87C
Differential protection, capacitor bank
87V
Voltage differential protection, capacitor bank
87L/ 87T
Option for line differential protection: including power

transformer
Option for line differential protection:charging-current

compensation
1.9
2
Type
1.5
7SA82
1.4
Line differential
protection
Distance protection
Broken-wire detection for differential protection
2.1
87 STUB
STUB Differential protection (for one-and-half circuitbreaker applications)
2.2
90V
Automatic voltage control for 2 winding transformer
2.3
90V
90V
Automatic voltage control for grid coupling transformer
FL
Fault locator, single-ended measurement
FL-one
21FL
Fault locator, two-ended measurement
FL-two
PMU
Synchrophasor measurement (1 PMU can be used for

max. 8 voltages and 8 currents)
PMU
2.4
Arc-protection (only with plug-in module ARC-CD-3FO)

Measured values, standard
2.5
Measured values, extended: Min, Max, Avg

Switching statistic counters
Circuit breaker wear monitoring
Ix, It, 2P
CFC (Standard, Control)

CFC arithmetic
2.6
Switching sequences function

Inrush current detection
2.7

Control
2.8
Fault recording of analog and binary signals
2.9
Monitoring and supervision

Protection interface, serial
2.10
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
2-pole
SSR
Slow-scan recorder
SSR
CR
Continuous recorder
CR
FSR
Fast-scan recorder
FSR
ExTrFct
Extended trigger functions
ExTrFct
3.4
Region France: Overload protection for lines and cables

'PSL-PSC'
3.5
Region France: Overcurrent protection 'MAXI-L'
3.1
3.2
3.3
Region France: Net decoupling protection 'PDA'
3.6
3.7
Region France: Overload protection for transformers

Table 2.1/ 2
SIPROTEC 5 Function overview
1.2
7UT87
7SS85
6MD85
6MD86
7VK87
7KE85
2.1
2.2
2.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
7SK82
7SJ86
7SJ85
7SJ82
7SL87
7SL86
7SL82
7UT86
1.3
7UT85
Fault Recorder
Circuit breaker
management
1.1
7UT82
Bay controller
Busbar protection
7SK85
Transformer
differential
protection
Motor protection
Overcurrent
protection
Combined line
differential and
distance protection
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.7
Medium-voltage applications
Medium-voltage applications for all system grounding types
Fast fault clearance in double-feed lines (closed) rings
1.1
1.2

1.3
1.4
7SJ82/85

1.5
11
7SJ82/85
1.6

QA1
1.7
7SJ82/85
)* 9ROWDJHFXUUHQW
)* 9ROWDJHFXUUHQW

QA2

1
1.8

11

1
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU

Ctrl
Ctrl
FL
3URWHFWLRQFRPPXQLFDWLRQ
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
1.9
1
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU
11
1V
)* 9ROWDJHFXUUHQW

3URWHFWLRQFRPPXQLFDWLRQ
PI
Ctrl
PI
2
2.1
Fig. 2.3 / 1
Medium-voltage application for all system grounding types
Fig. 2.3 / 3
Fast fault clearance in double-feed lines (closed) rings
2.2
Properties
Properties
2.3
Reliable detection of transients and static ground faults
Directional DMT/IDMTL protection without grading times
2.4
Cost saving due to integrated transient function
Fast fault clearance
Directional and non-directional protection and control

functions
Low-cost due to integrated protection interface
Acquisition and transmission of PMU variables possible.
Adaptable to different communication infrastructures.
Protection and control of multiple feeders

with one device
Central control of multiple feeders and

dedicated protection
2.5
Monitored data exchange
QA1
2.6

QA1

QA2

QA3

2.7
QA2

7SJ85
11

QA3

)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$

)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
&WUO
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
Ctrl
&WUO
2.8

2.9
11

11
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$

)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
&WUO
Ctrl
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$

Ctrl
2.10
)* 9ROWDJHFXUUHQW
)* 9ROWDJHFXUUHQW

)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
&WUO
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
&WUO
)* 0RWRU

)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
&WUO
3
3.1
3.2
Fig. 2.3 / 2
Protection and control of multiple feeders with one device
Fig. 2.3 / 4
Central control of multiple feeders and dedicated protection
3.3
Properties
Properties
3.4
Reduced investment because 1 device for multiple feeders
Protection for each bay
3.5
Simple parameterization
Central control for multiple feeders
3.6
Shorter commissioning times

Cost savings because up to 7 feeders possible with 1 device.
High availability because backup protection functions can be

activated in the controllers.
3.7
Motor protection applications
Motor protection and simplied differential protection
Induction motor: protection and control
1
1.1

4$
)* 0RWRU
27
32
1.2

4$
38
59
46
6
48
1 1V
)* 0RWRU
27
5
32
38
59
66
46
48
1 66
6
5
1V
1.7
)* $QDORJXQLWV
57'
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
&WUO
1.6
0
57'
1.8
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
RTD
1.9
&WUO
RTD
1.4
1.5
)* 0RWRU
)* $QDORJXQLWV
1.3
2
Fig. 2.3 / 9
Induction motor: protection and control
Fig. 2.3 / 11
Protection and control of multiple feeders with one device
2.1
2.2
Properties
Properties
Reduced investment because protection and control in one

device
High sensitivity and short tripping times due to differential

protection function
Thermal motor protection functions for reliable motor

monitoring
Cost saving due to integration of the differential protection

function in a separate function group.
2.3
2.4
Thermal motor protection functions with direct connection of

temperature sensors.
Motor protection with differential protection

4$
Motor differential protection with Krondorfer starter

4$
)* 0RWRU
27
32
38
59
46
48
1 66
6
)* 0RWRUVWDWRU
5
51
)*
0RWRUGLII
0

4$
0

4$
)* $QDORJXQLWV
)* 0RWRUVLGH
&WUO
0
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
Fig. 2.3 / 10

4$
Motor protection with differential protection
Fig. 2.3 / 12
2.7
2.8
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU
57'
&WUO
2.6
)* 0RWRUVLGH
1V
)* 0RWRU
2.5
Motor differential protection with Krondorfer starter
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
Properties
Properties
Autonomous differential protection functions
Acquisition, monitoring and control of all circuit breakers
3.4
High sensitivity and short tripping times due to differential

protection function
Differential protection function also available during starting.
3.5
Separate acquisition and monitoring of the current

transformers.
3.6
3.7
Transformer protection applications
Autotransformer bank
Two-winding transformer
1.1
1.2
1.3

4$
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
49
1.4
)* $XWRWUDQVIRUPHUVLGH
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
+
%)
49
&WUO
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
%)
%)
7
%)
71RGH
$XWRWUDQVIRUPHUJURXQG
)* VLGH
&WUO
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$

&WUO
&WUO
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
)* 7UDQVIRUPHU
$XWRWUDQVIRUPHU
)* FRPSHQVDWLRQVLGH
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$

1.7
1.8

87
1.6
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
81
)* 7UDQVIRUPHU
1.5
59
%)
&WUO
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
%)

4$
&WUO
1.9
2
2.1
Fig. 2.3 / 5
Two-winding transformer
Fig. 2.3 / 7
Autotransformer bank
2.2
Properties
Properties
2.3
Clear assignment of the functions to the primary element
2.4
Reduced investment
Reduced investment due to integration of the differential and

node protection function in one unit (87 and 87 Node)
Simple parameterization
High sensitivity with single line to ground faults.
Reduced wiring and faster commissioning.
2.5
Two-winding transformer with 2 incoming feeders

(e.g. double circuit-breaker switchgear) protection

4$
4$
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
2.6
49
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
1
%)
&WUO
Separate acquisition, monitoring and control of all circuit

breakers
2.7
11
)* 7UDQVIRUPHU
2.8
87
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
%)
&WUO
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
2.9
2.10
)* /LQH
High sensitivity with single line to ground-fault differential

protection
Cost savings due to 87T and 87T N in one unit.

4$
Properties
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
21
%)
&WUO
3
3.1
3.2
Fig. 2.3 / 6
Two-winding transformer with 2 incoming feeders

(e.g. double circuit-breaker switchgear)
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Protection and backup protection solution for 3-winding
transformers
3-winding transformer with differential protection 87T and

distance protection 21
1
1.1
1.2

1.3
7SA86

1.4
87
1
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH

4$
1
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
&75/
7UT86
1
<1\G

7
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
7UT86

7
7SJ85

4$
7SA86
1

1

&75/
%)
&75/

1.7
1.8
1.9
2
)* /LQH

1.6
%)

4$

1.5
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH

)* 7UDQVIRUPHU
%)
1

2.1

2.2

Fig. 2.3 / 8
2.3
Protection and backup protection solution for 3-winding

transformers
Abb. 2.3 / 8
3-winding transformer with differential protection 87T and

distance protection 21
Properties
Properties
Free design of the protection and backup protection concept
Backup protection function integrated for the grid
Inclusion of line protection devices
Simple engineering
Increased availability.
Increased exibility for different plant congurations
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Line protection applications
Protection and control separate
Distance protection of two parallel lines with one device
1.1
1.2
1.3

4$
4$
1.4
4$
)* /LQH

1.5
)* /LQH

)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
/

%)
Ctrl
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
1.6
%)
Ctrl
)* /LQH
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$

1.7

%)
Ctrl
)* 9ROWDJHFXUUHQW
1.8

1.9
11
/LQH
/LQH
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$

%)
Ctrl
2
2.1
Fig. 2.3 / 13
Protection and control separate
Fig. 2.3 / 15
Distance protection of two parallel lines with one device
2.2
Properties
Properties
2.3
Clear assignment of protection and control in separate devices
Low-cost due to protection of both lines in one device
Less external components by detection and selection of

busbar voltage in the device
Stable due to consideration of the inuences of the parallel

line for the distance protection function.
2.4
High reliability due to backup protection functions in the

6MD8 bay controller
High availability due to emergency control in the
7SL8 protection device.
2.5
Low-cost protection and device redundancy
Self-restoring multi-leg congurations
7SD8

4$
7SD8
/
/
4$
)* /LQH
/
2.6
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$

%)
Ctrl
3URWHFWLRQLQWHUIDFH

Ctrl

2.8
)* /LQH
/
2.9
)* /LQH
2.10

/LQH

Ctrl
Ctrl
3,
PI
)* /LQH
2.7
7SD8
/

PI
PI
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$

%)
Ctrl
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$

%)
Ctrl
3URWHFWLRQLQWHUIDFH
3,
7SD8

)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$

%)
Ctrl
/LQH
3URWHFWLRQLQWHUIDFH
Ctrl
7SD8

Ctrl
7SD8

Ctrl
/
/
/
PI
PI
PI
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Fig. 2.3 / 14
Low-cost protection and device redundancy
Fig. 2.3 / 16
Self-restoring multi-leg congurations
Properties
Properties
High availability due to protection and device redundancy

Low-cost because only 2 devices required for 2 lines
High availability because differential protection is also active

when a communication link fails
Reliable because of parallel processing of the protection

functions in the devices.
Self-restoring due to automatic switchover from ring to chain

topology
High ease of maintenance because single line ends can be
taken out of the differential protection con guration for
commissioning and servicing.
Line protection applications
Impedance Protection on Transformer LV side
Dual Breaker Applications
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
6$
6$

)* /LQH
7

/
5,
1

4$
N9

4$

4$
1.4
)* /LQH

1.5
6WXE
1.6
1.7

4$
1.8
1.9
2
Fig. 2.3 / 17
Impedance Protection on Transformer LV side
Fig. 2.3 / 18
Dual Breaker Applications
2.1
Properties
Properties
2.2
With 21T, the impedance protection for transformers, an

effective back-up protection with zones reaching into the
transformer is achieved
With separate measurement of the CT current from both

breakers a Stub protection is possible.
2.3
Separate measurement of CT currents improves stability

during heavy through fault current owing from one bus to
the other when both breakers are closed.
2.4
A 2nd impedance protection, 21L, can be applied in the

same FG to achieve proctection of the LV bus using reverse
interlocking (85-21 RI)
The 21L also provides the essential back-up protection for
the MV feeders with very sensitive fault detection and
stability during heavy load conditions.
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Breaker-and-a-half application
Modular and distributed protection and control solution
Low-cost device and protection redundancy in

breaker-and-a-half switchgear
1.1
%%
1.2
)* /LQH
1.3
1.4
1.5

%)

QA1

%)
&WUO
)* /LQH

&WUO
QA1
&WUO
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
&WUO
)*
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
&WUO
)*
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
/LQH
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$

QA2
)*
&WUO
/LQH

)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
&WUO
QA2

)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
&WUO
/LQH
2.1

/LQH
)* /LQH
2.2
2.3

)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
1.7
1.9
)* /LQH
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
1.6
1.8
/

)* /LQH

QA3
)* /LQH
/

)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
%)
2.4

)*
)*
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
QA3
&WUO
)*
&WUO
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
&WUO
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
&WUO
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
%)

&WUO
%%
2.5
Fig. 2.3 / 19
Modular and distributed protection and control solution
Properties
Clarity due to clear assignment of protection and control
Clear assignment of the primary protection function (line

differential protection 87) to a line in one device (Main 1)
2.6
Simple reliable central control of the entire diameter
2.7
Reliable due to emergency control in every line in the

protection device
2.8
Reduced wiring due to integrated voltage selection
2.10
Low-cost device and protection redundancy in

breaker-and-a-half switchgear
Properties
High availability due to protection redundancy
(Main 1 and Main 2)
2.9
Fig. 2.3 / 20
System-wide diameter bus based on IEC 61850

electrically isolated data exchange,
reduced wiring
easy expansion.
The distance protection function (21) is implemented in the

protection device of the other line by a 2nd line function
group
High availability and reliability due to device and protection
redundancy
Low cost.
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Applications for capacitor banks
Protection of a capacitor bank in an H-circuit
Protection of a MSCDN-capacitor bank

(MSCDN=mechanically switched capacitor damping
networks)

4$
%%

4$
)* &DSDFLWRUEDQN

&
&
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
%)
&WUO
Fig. 2.3 / 21
1.2
7SJ85
1.3

&

1
&
)*&DSDFLWRUEDQNVLGH
&DSDFLWRUEDQN
1

&
&

)LOWHUVHFWLRQ
&DSDFLWRUEDQN

1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
Protection of a capacitor bank in an H-circuit
1.1
%%
)*&DSDFLWRUEDQNVLGH
7SJ85

2
2.1
)* 6LGH
2.2
2.3
Properties
)* 'LIIHUHQWLDOSURWHFWLRQ
Precisely adapted due to dedicated function group and

application-specic protection function, such as peak
overvoltage protection (ANSI 59C) and sensitive currentunbalance protection (ANSI 60C)
2.4

)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
Low cost due to integration of all required functions into

one device.
%)
&WUO
2.5
Fig. 2.3 / 22
Protection of a capacitor bank in an H-circuit and

of an associated lter circuit
Properties
Optimum protection of complex banks and lter circuits by
exible hardware and exible function design
2.6
Low cost due to integration of all necessary functions into

one device with up to 7 3-phase measuring points
2.7
Calculation of current sum and current differential at the

current interface of the protection function group V/I
3-phase.
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Busbar protection
Double busbar with coupling
1.1
%XV
FRXSOHU
ED\
%D\
1.2
1.3
4%
1.4
4%

4%
4$
7SS85
1.7
1.8

4$
1.9
)* 'LVFRQQHFWRU4%
)* 'LVFRQQHFWRU4%
)* &XUUHQWWUDQVIRUPHU%(
%,
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
2.1
%)
2.2
()
&WUO
)* 'LVFRQQHFWRU4%
)* 'LVFRQQHFWRU4%
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
%)
()
&WUO
)* 'LVFRQQHFWRU4%
)* 'LVFRQQHFWRU4%
%
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
%)
()
,QKHUHQW&%)3
&KHFN]RQH
2.4
%XV]RQH
%XV]RQH
6XSHUYLVLRQ
Fig. 2.3 / 23
Double busbar with coupling
Properties
Central busbar protection
Grouping of all primary components of a bay in the
bay image
2.7
2.8
2.9

4$
)* %XVEDU
2.3
2.6
4%
%,
1.6
%%
%%
4%

4%
1.5
2.5
%D\
Congurable busbar function group

One device for up to 15 measuring points
Flexible adaptation to the topology
(up to 4 busbar sections and 4 couplings can be congured)
Integrated disconnector image
Convenient graphical conguration with DIGSI 5.
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
&WUO
%,
Grid monitoring and PMU
Grid monitoring and PMU
1
1.1
1.2
SIGUARD PDP
1.3
1.4

1RGHGHYLFH$
1.5
SIPROTEC 5
1.6
308
1.7
1.8

1.9

1RGHGHYLFH%
1RGHGHYLFH&
SIPROTEC 5
SIPROTEC 5
308
308
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Fig. 2.3 / 24
Principle of distributed phasor measurement
Properties
Each SIPROTEC 5 device can be equipped or retrotted with
the PMU function
2.5
Online and ofine evaluation of the PMU data in the

monitoring system, SIGUARD PDP.
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Overcurrent Protection
SIPROTEC 7SJ82, 7SJ85

Description
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Overcurrent protection SIPROTEC 7SJ82, 7SJ85
Features
Overcurrent protection devices are part of the

modular system of SIPROTEC 5. They support all SIPROTEC 5
system features and can be used individually as well as universally in the framework of system solutions. In the following,
the specic properties of the SIPROTEC 5 overcurrent protection
devices are described.
The two device types 7SJ82 and 7SJ85 offer different hardware
conguration options.
SIPROTEC 5 overcurrent protection devices are multifunctional

devices whose main protection functions are based on the
overcurrent protection principle. They protect primarily feeders
and lines in the distribution network but they are also suitable
for use in the high-voltage network. The exible congurability
of the hardware quantity structure also allows protecting
several feeders with one device. The numerous functions and
high exibility make the device suitable for a great number of
further protection and monitoring applications. We recommend
the SIPROTEC 7SJ86 specically as a backup and emergency
protection for line protection. The great number of automatic
functions permits use in all elds of power supply.
The devices also contain all important additional functions
which are necessary for safe network operation today. This
includes functions for protection, control, measurement and
monitoring. The large number of communication interfaces
and communication protocols satises the requirements of the
communication-based selective protection, as well as automated
operation.
Basic distinguishing features

7SJ82
Various hardware congurations are available for binary

inputs and outputs within the 1/3 base module
7SJ85
Hardware conguration can be exibly expanded and

congured for analog inputs, binary inputs and outputs,
measuring transducers and communication using 1/6 expansion modules
Table 2.4 / 1
Overview of the different distinguishing features
Function library and application templates

A common function library provides all protection, automation,
monitoring and additional functions for the SIPROTEC 5 devices.
These functions are truly the same for all devices. Once established, congurations can be transferred from device to device.
This results in substantially reduced engineering effort.
The tables on the following pages list the available functions
from the library for every device type. Predened templates are
available in DIGSI for the standard applications. These templates
already contain basic congurations, required functions and
default settings.
Commissioning and maintenance work can be completed

safely, quickly and thus cost-effectively with high-performance
test functions. Because of a modular structure design, the
SIPROTEC 5 devices can always be exibly adapted to specic
requirements.
2.5
7UDQVPLVVLRQ
*HQHUDWLRQ
'LVWULEXWLRQ
6-
2.6
6/
6$
66
.(
6'
.(
0'
6-
9.
87
2.7
6.
2.8
2.9
.(
0'
6$
6/
0'
6$
6'
6-
6-
66
6-
6'
6-
6'
6.
87
.(
6-
6/
87
6'
6.
6$
6$
6-
6-
2.10
0
3
3.1
3.2
3.4
3.5
3.6
Fig. 2.4 / 1
Application of SIPROTEC 5 devices
3.7
Applications.pdf
3.3
Overcurrent Protection SIPROTEC 7SJ82

Properties
Properties SIPROTEC 7SJ82
Main function
Feeder and overcurrent protection

for all voltage levels
Inputs and outputs
4 current transformers,
4 voltage transformers (optional),
11 or 23 binary inputs,
9 or 16 binary outputs
1.2
Various hardware quantity structures are available for binary inputs and outputs in the 1/3 base
module, it is not possible to add
1/6 expansion modules,
available with large and small display
1.4
1/3 19 inch
The overcurrent protection device SIPROTEC 7SJ82 is part of the

new SIPROTEC 5 series of modular eld devices.
This device is especially designed for cost effective and compact
medium voltage and sub-transmission application areas.
With its exibility and its high-performance DIGSI 5 engineering
tool, the SIPROTEC 7SJ82 ts perfectly for protection, control,
monitoring, and measuring applications in electrical energy
systems.
Functions
1.5
7SJ82_Rueckansicht.tif
Housing width
1.3
7SJ82_Frontansicht_dt.tif
Hardware exibility
1.1
2.1
2.2
Overcurrent protection device SIPROTEC 7SJ82
High available Ethernet redundancy protocols PRP and HSR
Directional and non-directional time overcurrent protection

with additional functions
Cyber Security in accordance with NERC CIP and BDEW

Whitepaper
Optimization of the tripping times by direction comparison and

protection data communication
Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) for synchrophasor measured

values and IEEE C37.118 protocol
Recognition of static, intermitting and transient ground faults

(transient function) in resonant-grounded and iso-lated
networks
Time synchronization using IEEE 1588
Serial protection data communication via ber-optic cable,

two-wire connections and communication net-works (IEEE
C37.94 et al.) including automatic switch between ring and
chain topology
Power protection, congurable as active or reactive power

protection
Protection functions for capacitor banks, e.g. overcurrent,
thermal overload, current unbalance, peak overvoltage or
Control, synchrocheck and system interlocking
Circuit-breaker failure protection
Powerful automation with graphical CFC (Continuous Function
Chart)
Support of single line in small and large displays
Integrated electrical Ethernet port J for DIGSI and complete IEC
61850 functionality (reporting and GOOSE)
Two optional pluggable communication modules, usable for
different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5103, IEC 60870-5-104, Modbus TCP, DNP3 (serial and TCP))
2.3
2.4
2.5
Powerful fault recording

Additional functions for simple tests and easy commis-sioning.
Table 2.4 / 2 shows all available functions for SIPROTEC 7SJ82.
Frequency protection and frequency change protection for

load shedding applications
1.8
All functions can be congured freely with DIGSI 5. For the

application of some of the functions, you require the appropriate
number of free function points within the device. The function
point calculator in the online congurator provides support in
determining the required number of function points for your
device.
Overvoltage and undervoltage protection
1.7
1.9
Fig. 2.4 / 2
Arc protection
1.6
2.6
Applications
The overcurrent protection device SIPROTEC 7SJ82 is a universal
protection, control and automation device on the basis of the
SIPROTEC 5 system. It is especially designed for the protection of
feeders and lines.
Typical feeder and overcurrent applications are:
Detection of short circuits in electric operational equipment
of radial networks, lines which are supplied from one or two
sides, parallel lines and open or closed looped networks of all
voltage levels
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1

systems with radial, ring-shaped or meshed topology
3.2
Backup protection of differential protective schemes of all

types of lines, transformers, generators, motors, and busbars
3.3
Protection and monitoring of capacitor banks
3.4
Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
3.5
Reverse power protection

Load shedding applications
3.6
Switchover automation.
3.7

Applications
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
Application templates are available in DIGSI for standard

applications. They comprise all basic congurations and default
settings.
Directional overcurrent protection resonant-grounded /

isolated system
The following application templates are available:
Overcurrent protection (directional and non-directional) for

phases
Non-directional overcurrent protection
Sensitive directional ground fault detection for static ground

faults
Overcurrent protection (non-directional) for phases and

ground
Sensitive directional ground fault detection for transient and

static ground faults (transient function)
Directional overcurrent protection grounded system
Measuring voltage failure supervision.

phases and ground
Capacitor bank: H-connection

Overcurrent protection for phase and ground
Measuring voltage failure supervision
Peak overvoltage protection
1.9
Overload protection
Undercurrent protection
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Application example SIPROTEC 7SJ82 Direction comparison

protection via protection data interface for lines supplied
from two sides
Direction comparison protection can be realized with the help of
direction determination of the directional overcurrent protection
in the case of lines which are supplied from two sides. The
direction comparison protection is designed to selectively isolate
a faulty line section (e.g., sections of rings) in high speed, i.e. no
long graded times will slow down the tripping process.
The precondition of this procedure is that direction information

can be exchanged between the individual protection relays.
This information exchange can be realized via an protection data
interface, for instance. Alternatives to the protection data interface are IEC 61850 GOOSE or pilot wires for signal transmission
with an additional voltage loop.
2.6
3
3.1
)RUZDUG
QGVWDJH
7 V
)RUZDUG
7UDQVIHURIWKHIRUZDUG
LQIRUPDWLRQ
3.2
Fig. 2.4 / 3
6,3527(&
VWVWDJH
7 V
%DFNZDUG
QGVWDJH
7 V

%DFNZDUG
6,3527(&
VWVWDJH
7 V
)RUZDUG
QGVWDJH
7 V
)RUZDUG
%DFNZDUG
QGVWDJH
7 V
LQIRUPDWLRQ
Application example: Principle of the direction comparison protection of doubly fed line sections
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Visio-DwDOCP07-240611-enUS-01.pdf
%DFNZDUG
2.10
6,3527(&
VWVWDJH
7 V
2.9

6,3527(&
VWVWDJH
7 V
2.8
3.3

2.7

Applications
Fig. 2.4 / 4 shows the function scope and the basic conguration
of a SIPROTEC 7SJ82 for this application. The template
Directional overcurrent protection grounded network is used
as a basis. In addition, the device has to be equipped with a
communication module for the protection data communication
of course. The protection data communication function group is
created automatically when the module is congured.
The information which has to be transmitted to the remote end

and which has to be received by the remote end is determined
via the DIGSI editor communication assignment. The reception
information can be linked directly with the binary input signals
of the directional overcurrent protection. An additional logic
with the help of a CFC chart is not required.
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
7SJ82
MP
I-3ph 1
I-3ph

1
V-3ph

1.8
Ctrl
1.9
I-3ph
627)
MP
V-3ph 1
67N FL
&%
CI
/LQH
)*
03
4$ &%
%,
%2
3,
&,
Fig. 2.4 / 4
1.7
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
BI
BO
)* 3URWHFWLRQFRPPXQLFDWLRQ
PI
7RWKHRSSRVLWH
HQGRIWKHOLQH
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
%LQDU\LQSXW
%LQDU\RXWSXW
3URWHFWLRQLQWHUIDFH
&RPPXQLFDWLRQLQWHUIDFH
2.4_4_7SJ82_mit WirkKom_enUS-01.pdf
QA1
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
&RQILJXUDWLRQYLD&RPPXQLFDWLRQPDSSLQJLQ',*6,
1

'LUHFWLRQDOWLPHRYHUFXUUHQWSURWHFWLRQSKDVHV
1
'LUHFWLRQDOWLPHRYHUFXUUHQWSURWHFWLRQJURXQG

$XWRPDWLFUHFORVLQJ
627) ,QVWDQWDQHRXVWULSSLQJDWVZLWFKRQWRIDXOW
)/
)DXOWORFDWRU
&WUO
&RQWURO
Application example: Direction comparison protection of doubly fed line sections with protection data communication
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Functions, application templates
Application templates
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
Functions
24
25
27
27
27
27Q
32, 37
37
Undercurrent
38
46
46
46
Negative sequence overcurrent protection with direction
47
49
49
Thermal overload protection for RLC lter elements of a capacitor bank
50/51 TD
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground
50HS
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, 1-phase
50Ns/ 51Ns Sensitive ground-current protection for systems with resonant or isolated
neutral
50/51 TD
Overcurrent protection for RLC lter elements of a capacitor bank
50BF
50RS
51V
59C
59
Abbr.
3-pole
V/f
Sync
V<
V1<
Vx<
Q>/V<
P<>, Q<>
I<
59
59N
59
60C
67
67N
67Ns
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
74TC
79
81O
81U
81R
86
87N T
87C
90V
FL
PMU
Capacitor bank:
H-bridge
ANSI
Non-directional OC
(4*I, 4*V)
1.4
Non-directional OC
(4*I)
1.3
Directional OC resonant-grounded
/ isol. System
1.2
Directional OC grounded system
1.1
Available in 7SJ82
I2>
2 2 t>
I2>, (V2,I2)
V2>
, It
, It
I>
IN>
I>>>
SOTF
IN>
INs>
Iie>
I>
CBFP
CBRS
t=f(I,V)
V> cap.
V>

Dir. sensitive ground-fault detection for systems with resonant or isolated
neutral incl. a) V0>, b) Cos-/SinPhi, c) Transient fct., d) Phi(V,I), e) Admittanz
V1>
V0>
Vx>
Iunbal>
I>, (V,I)
IN>, (V,I)

Lockout
Synchrophasor measurement (1 PMU can be used for max. 8 voltages and 8
currents)
Iie dir>
TCS
AR
f>
f<
df/dt
Further functions see next page
FL-one
PMU
IN
I
Non-directional OC
(4*I, 4*V)
Capacitor bank:
H-bridge
The conguration and function points for your application can be ascertained in
the SIPROTEC 5 order con gurator under: www.siemens.com/siprotec
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.7
1.8
1.1
1.6
Ix, It, 2P
Function points
Table 2.4 / 2
Non-directional OC
(4*I)
Abbr.
/ isol. System
Functions
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
ANSI
Available in 7SJ82
1.9
2.1
2.2
3
30
3
50
3
0
3
0
100
2.3
2.4
SIPROTEC 7SJ82 Functions and templates
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Properties
1
1.1
1.2

Main function
Feeder and overcurrent protection protection

for all voltage levels
Inputs and outputs
5 predened standard variants with

4 current transformers, 4 voltage transformers,
11 to 59 binary inputs,
9 to 33 binary outputs
Hardware exibility
Flexible, adaptable and expandable I/O quantity

structure within the scope of the modular
SIPROTEC 5 building blocks, 1/6 expansion
modules can be added
Available with large or small display or without
display
Housing width
1/3 19 inch to 2/1 19 inch
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
2.1
The feeder and overcurrent protection SIPROTEC 7SJ85 is part of

the new SIPROTEC 5 series of modular, exible and intelligent
digital eld devices.
With its modularity and exibility and its high-performance
DIGSI 5 engineering tool, the SIPROTEC 7SJ85 ts perfectly for
protection, control, monitoring, and measuring applications in
electrical energy systems.
2.2
Functions
2.3

device.
1.9
2
2.4
Directional and non-directional time overcurrent protection

with additional functions
2.5
Protection of several feeders with up to 24 analog inputs

networks
2.6
Arc protection
2.7

2.8

protection
2.9
2.10
3

Fig. 2.4 / 5
Overcurrent protection device SIPROTEC 7SJ85
Serial protection data communication via ber-optic cable, twowire connections and communication networks (IEEE C37.94 et
al.) including automatic switch between ring and chain topology
Cyber Security in accordance withNERC CIP and BDEW Whitepaper
Additional functions for simple tests and easy commissioning.
Table 2.5/4 shows all available functions for SIPROTEC 7SJ85.
Applications
feeders and lines.
Typical feeder and overcurrent applications are:
Detection of short circuits in electric operational equip-ment of
radial networks, lines which are supplied from one or two sides,
parallel lines and open or closed looped networks of all voltage
levels
3.1
3.2


Chart)
Backup protection of differential protective schemes of all types

of lines, transformers, generators, motors, and bus-bars
Integrated electrical Ethernet port J for DIGSI and IEC 61850

functionality (reporting)
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Reverse power protection

Load shedding applications
Switchover automation.

Applications
settings.
Sensitive directional ground fault detection for transient and

static ground faults (transient function)
1.1
7SJ85 Non-directional overcurrent protection
Capacitor bank: H-connection + 1 x RLC

ground
Time-overcurrent protection for phases and ground
1.3
Capacitor bank unbalance protection
1.4

Overload protection
1.5
7SJ85 Directional overcurrent protection grounded system

phases and ground
Undercurrent protection.
1.6
Capacitor bank: MSCDN
1.7
Overcurrent protection for phase and ground
1.8

1.2
7SJ85- Directional overcurrent protection resonant-grounded /

isolated system
Differential protection for capacitor

phases
Overload protection
1.9
2
2.1
Undercurrent protection.
Sensitive directional ground fault detection for static ground

faults
2.2
2.3
2.4
Application example SIPROTEC 7SJ85 Direction comparison

protection via protection data interface for lines supplied
from two sides
Direction comparison protection can be realized with the help of
direction determination of the directional overcurrent protection
in the case of lines which are supplied from two sides. The
direction comparison protection is designed to selectively isolate
a faulty line section (e.g., sections of rings) in high speed, i.e. no
long graded times will slow down the tripping process.
2.5
The precondition of this procedure is that direction information
can be exchanged between the individual protective relays. This
information exchange can be realized via an protection data
interface, for instance. Alternatives to the protection data interface are IEC 61850 GOOSE or pilot wires for signal transmission
with an additional voltage loop.
2.6
2.7
)RUZDUG
QGVWDJH
7 V
)RUZDUG
6,3527(&
VWVWDJH
7 V
%DFNZDUG
%DFNZDUG
6,3527(&
VWVWDJH
7 V
QGVWDJH
7 V
LQIRUPDWLRQ
Fig. 2.4 / 6
%DFNZDUG
6,3527(&
VWVWDJH
7 V

)RUZDUG
QGVWDJH
7 V

2.8
6,3527(&
VWVWDJH
7 V
2.9
)RUZDUG
QGVWDJH
7 V
LQIRUPDWLRQ
Application example: Principle of the direction comparison protection of doubly fed line sections
The SIPROTEC 7SJ82 application example (Fig. 2.4 / 4) on

page 2.4 / 5 shows the functions and the basic conguration for
this application.
%DFNZDUG
Visio-DwDOCP07-240611-enUS-01.pdf

2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Applications
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Application examples of SIPROTEC 7SJ85 Protection and

control at a double busbar
function group. These functions are added from the DIGSI function library simply via Drag and Drop.
The double busbar feeder in Fig. 2.4 / 7 is protected and also

controlled by a SIPROTEC 7SJ85. The template Directional overcurrent protection grounded network is used as a basis for
this example. In addition to the application template, the circuitbreaker failure protection, auto-reclosing and synchrocheck
functions are required and congured in the circuit-breaker
Operational measured values and metered energy values are

calculated in the function group Voltage Current 3ph.
They are available for output at the display, transmission to the
substation automation system and processing in the CFC.
A switching sequence in the CFC, which is triggered by a function key, causes an automatic busbar changeover.
1.5
1.6
1.7
QB1
QB2
1.8
7SJ85
1.9
QA1
MP
V-1ph 1
I-3ph
QB9
2.1
V-3ph
2.2
MP
I-3ph 1
2.3
2.4
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
1
V-1ph
627)
V-3ph
I-3ph
67N FL

50BF

2SHUDWLRQDOYDOXHV
Ctrl
(QHUJ\PHWHUHG
YDOXHV
&%
BI
BO
Ctrl Dco
BI
BO
MP
V-3ph 1
)* 'LVFRQQHFWRU4%
)* 'LVFRQQHFWRU4%
2.5
6ZLWFKLQJVHTXHQFH
IRUEXVEDUFKDQJHV
Ctrl Dco
BI
BO
)* 'LVFRQQHFWRU4%
/LQH
Ctrl Dco
BI
BO
2.6
)*
03
4$ &%
4% 'FR
%,
%2
&)&
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
Fig. 2.4 / 7
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
'LVFRQQHFWRU
%LQDU\LQSXW
%LQDU\RXWSXW
&RQWLQXRXV)XQFWLRQ&KDUW

%)

1

1

627)
&WUO
)/
6\QFKURFKHFN
,QVWDQWDQHRXVWULSSLQJDWVZLWFKRQWRIDXOW
&RQWURO
$XWRPDWLFUHFORVLQJ
'LUHFWLRQDOWLPHRYHUFXUUHQWSURWHFWLRQSKDVHV
'LUHFWLRQDOWLPHRYHUFXUUHQWSURWHFWLRQJURXQG
)DXOWORFDWRU
Application example: Overcurrent protection SIPROTEC 7SJ85 at a double busbar feeder
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Applications
Application example protection of a capacitor bank
Fig. 2.4 / 8 shows protection of a capacitor bank in an H-circuit.
For this application, the device has special functions for the
protection of capacitor banks. Thanks to the modularity and
performance of SIPROTEC 5, the complete application can be
protected by one device.
Properties:
Short-circuit protection (ANSI 50, 50N) for phase and ground
faults
Peak voltage protection (ANSI 59C), for protection of the dielectric of the bank from harmful peak voltages, in particular,
caused by harmonics; consideration of harmonics up to the
50th order, the peak voltage being calculated from the current
by integration
Overload protection (ANSI 49) for protection of the bank from

thermal overload
Very sensitive current-unbalance protection (ANSI 60C)
for detecting the failure of a single capacitor element, as a
monitoring and protection function; manual and automatic
comparison in the bay. The automatic comparison permits
consideration of dynamic unbalances, e.g. caused by
temperature inuences
Undercurrent protection (ANSI 37) for tripping the local circuit
breaker when the incoming feeder is disconnected; and
therefore protection from hazardous energization of the nondischarged bank, e.g. in phase opposition
Circuit-breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF).
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
%%

4$
03
9SK
03
,SK
&DSDFLWRUEDQN
2.2
7SJ85
03
,SK
2.3
)* &DSDFLWRUEDQN
9SK
,SK
,DV\P

1

)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
&
,SK
%)
&WUO
&
CB
,5/&
)*
03
%,
%2
4$ &%
&WUO
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
%LQDU\LQSXW
%LQDU\RXWSXW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
&RQWURO
2.4

%)
1
&
&
%,
%2
8QGHUFXUUHQWSURWHFWLRQ
2YHUORDGSURWHFWLRQ
2YHUFXUUHQWSURWHFWLRQSKDVHV
3HDNRYHUYROWDJHSURWHFWLRQ
8QEDODQFHSURWHFWLRQIRUFDSDFLWRUEDQNV
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
Fig. 2.4 / 8
Protection of a capacitor bank in H-circuit
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Applications
1
1.2
In Fig. 2.4 / 9, not only the capacitor bank in H-circuit but also the
associate attenuator circuit are protected by the 7SJ85. Thanks
to the modularity and performance of SIPROTEC 5, the complete
application can be protected by one device.
1.3
Properties:
1.4
Acquisition of up to 7 3-phase measuring points
1.1
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
consideration of dynamic unbalances, e.g. caused by

temperature inuences
Application example MSCDN capacitor bank
Short-circuit protection (ANSI 50, 50N) for phase and ground

faults
Peak voltage protection (ANSI 59C), for protection of the dielectric of the bank from hazardous peak voltages, in particular,
caused by harmonics; consideration of harmonics up to the
50th order, the peak voltage being calculated from the current
by integration
Differential Protection (87C) across the complete capacitor

bank to prevent short-circuits within the entire installation
Overload and overcurrent protection across both resistors as
well as a simple differential protection device to detect the
failure of one of the two resistors. To this end, the current
sum and current difference are calculated with the current
measured points in the R branches, at the inputs of the V/I
3-phase function groups
Undercurrent protection (ANSI 37) for tripping the local circuit
breaker when the incoming feeder is disconnected; and
therefore protection from hazardous energization of the nondischarged bank, e.g. in phase opposition
Circuit-breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF).
Overload protection (ANSI 49), for protection of the bank from

thermal overload
Very sensitive current-unbalance protection (ANSI 60C),
for detecting the failure of a single capacitor element, as a
monitoring and protection function; manual and automatic
comparison in the bay. The automatic comparison permits
2.2
%%
2.3
2.4
7SJ85
FG Cap.bank 1
4$
2.5
MP V-3ph 1
9SK
MP I-3ph 1
,SK 1

&
06&'1
MP I-3ph 2
FG CB
FG Cap.bank 2
,SK %)
MP I-3ph 4
&WUO
,SK &
,XQEDO
&%
%,
%2
&
FG V/I 3ph
2.7
2.8
2.9
MP I-3ph 5
,SK
MP I-3ph 6
FG V/I 3ph
MP I-3ph 7
2.10
,SK
+-
++

1)

FG Diff.prot.

FG Side
,SK
1) 50 as simple differential protection
3.1
)*
03
%,
%2
4$&%
&WUO
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
&
9SK
MP I-3ph 3
2.6
,XQEDO
Fig. 2.4 / 9
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
%LQDU\LQSXW
%LQDU\RXWSXW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
&RQWURO

%)
1

&
&

8QGHUFXUUHQWSURWHFWLRQ
1HJDWLYHVHTXHQFHV\VWHP
RYHUFXUUHQWSURWHFWLRQ
7KHUPDORYHUORDGSURWHFWLRQ
'HILQLWHWLPHRYHUFXUUHQWSURWHFWLRQ
2YHUYROWDJHSURWHFWLRQ
3HDNRYHUYROWDJHSURWHFWLRQ
&XUUHQWXQEDODQFHSURWHFWLRQ
MSCDN capacitor bank

24
25
27
27
27
27Q
32, 37
37
38
46
46
46
47
49
49
74TC
79
81O
81U
81R
86
87N T
87C
87V
90V
90V
90V
/ isol. system
Non-directional OC
(4*I, 4*V)
Capacitor bank: Hbridge + 1*RLC
Capacitor bank:
MSCDN
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.7
1.8
I>
IN>
I>>>
SOTF
IN>
INs>

Overcurrent protection for RLC lter elements of a capacitor bank
Dir. sensitive ground-fault detection for systems with resonant or isolated neutral incl. a) V0>, b) Cos-/SinPhi, c) Transient fct., d) Phi(V,I),
e) Admittanz
Iie>
I>
CBFP
CBRS
t=f(I,V)
V> cap.
V>
V1>
V0>
Vx>
Iunbal>
I>, (V,I)
IN>, (V,I)

Lockout
Voltage differential protection, capacitor bank
Iie dir>
TCS
AR
f>
f<
df/dt
1.1
1.6
I2>
22 t>
I2>, (V2,I2)
V2>
, It
, It
50/51 TD
50HS
50Ns/ 51Ns Sensitive ground-current protection for systems with resonant or
isolated neutral
50/51 TD
50BF
50RS
51V
59C
59
59
59N
59
60C
67
67N
67Ns
Abbr.
3-pole
I/O
V/f
Sync
V<
V1<
Vx<
Q>/V<
P<>, Q<>
I<
Functions
Undercurrent
Thermal overload protection for RLC lter elements of a capacitor
bank
Non-directional OC
(4*I, 4*V)
ANSI
Available in 7SJ85
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3.1
3.2
IN
I
V
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

1
1.6

CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
Function points
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Ix, It, 2P
Table 2.4 / 3
Capacitor bank:
MSCDN
Functions
Abbr.
FL-one
Synchrophasor measurement (1 PMU can be used for max. 8 voltages PMU
and 8 currents)
Capacitor bank: Hbridge + 1*RLC
1.5
ANSI
FL
PMU
Non-directional OC
(4*I, 4*V)
1.4
/ isol. system
1.3
1.2
Available in 7SJ85
1.1
Non-directional OC
(4*I, 4*V)
SIPROTEC 7SJ85 Functions and templates
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
30
50
100
300

Standard variants
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7SJ82
U1
1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I
1.1
Run
Error
SIPROTEC
Housing width 1/3 x 19"

11 binary inputs,
9 binary outputs (1 life contact, 8 standard),
4 current transformer inputs
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
1.2
1.3
Contains the modules: Base module with PS101 and IO101
1.4
U2
1/3, 23 BI, 16 BO, 4 I
1.5
Run
Error

23 binary inputs,
SIPROTEC
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
1.7
Contains the modules: Base module with PS101, IO101 and IO110
U3
1.8
1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V
1.9

11 binary inputs,
4 current transformer inputs,
4 voltage transformer inputs
Run
Error
SIPROTEC
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
2
2.1
2.2

U4
1.6
2.3
1/3, 23 BI, 16 BO, 4 I, 4 V

s
Run
Error

23 binary inputs,
SIPROTEC
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
2.4
U5
1/3, 7 BE, 7 BA, 8 I
2.5
Run
Housing width 1/3 x 19

7 binary inputs,
Error
SIPROTEC
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
The technical data can be found in the manual. www.siemens.com/siprotec
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Standard variants
1
1.1
Standard variants for 7SJ85

S1
Run
1.3
SIPROTEC
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
1.4
S2
1/2, 17 BI, 16 BO, 4 I, 4 V

17 binary inputs,
16 binary outputs (1 life contact, 9 standard, 6 fast),
1.6
1.7
1.8
Run
Error
SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
Contains the modules: Base module with PS201 and IO202,

expansion module IO206
1.9
2
Error

11 binary inputs,
1.2
1.5
1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V
S3
1/2, 27 BI, 17 BO, 4 I, 4 V

27 binary inputs,
2.1
2.2
2.3
Run
Error
SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[

2.4
S4
2/3, 43 BI, 25 BO, 4 I, 4 V

43 binary inputs,
2.5
Run
Error
SIPROTEC
/LQH
[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
2.8
2.9
SIPROTEC
5/6, 59 BI, 33 BO, 4 I, 4 V

s
2.7
SIPROTEC

expansion module 2x IO207
S5
2.6


59 binary inputs,
expansion module 3x IO207
The technical data can be found in the manual. www.siemens.com/siprotec
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Run
Error
SIPROTEC
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC
Line Protection
SIPROTEC 7SA8, 7SD8, 7SL8, 7VK87, 7SJ86
Line Protection Devices

1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
SIPROTEC 5 Line protection devices
Features
SIPROTEC 5 line protection devices are part of the modular

system of SIPROTEC 5. They support all SIPROTEC 5 system
features, and can be used individually as well as universally
in the framework of system solutions. In the following, the
specic properties of the SIPROTEC 5 line protection devices are
described. The description of the SIPROTEC 5 system features is
found in the system catalog.
The device types are dened by their main protection functions

and by essential distinguishing features.
SIPROTEC 5 line protection devices are based on the distance

protection and differential protection principles. They protect
overhead lines and cables of all voltage levels with the highest
possible degree of selectivity and security. A large number of
additional protection and automation functions makes use in all
areas of line protection possible.
The devices also contain important auxiliary functions that
are necessary for safe network operation today. This includes
functions for control, measurement and monitoring. The large
number of communication interfaces and communication
protocols satises the requirements of communication-based
selective protection, as well as automated operation.
Commissioning and maintenance work can be completed safely,
quickly and thus cost-effectively with high-performance test
functions. Because of a modular structure design, SIPROTEC 5
line protection devices can always be exibly adapted to specic
requirements.
For devices with exible congurability of the hardware quantity

structure, you can select various standard variants when
ordering. Expandability through supplemental modules allows
for individual adaptation to specic applications such as more
analog channels for breaker-and-a-half schemes, or more binary
contacts (see Overview of the standard variants).
A common function library makes all protection, automation,
monitoring and auxiliary functions for the SIPROTEC 5 line
protection devices available. Thus, the same functions are truly
the same for all devices. Once established, congurations can
be transferred from device to device. This results in substantially
reduced engineering effort.
On the following pages of this catalog, the selection of functions
available from the library is shown in table format. Pre-dened
templates are available in DIGSI for standard applications. These
templates contain basic congurations, required functions and
default settings for standard applications.
Denition of device types based on designation

2.5
7 XX
Fig. 2.5 / 1
7
2.6
2.7
YY
XX
YY
Main protection:
7
SA
Distance protection
SD
Differential protection
SL
Distance and differential protection
2.8
SJ
2.9
VK
Circuit-breaker management
2.10
3
Essential distinguishing features:

7
82
exclusively 3-pole tripping

Two hardware variants available
86
exclusively 3-pole tripping

Hardware quantity structure exibly congurable
87
1- and 3-pole tripping

Hardware quantity structure exibly congurable
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Table 2.5 / 1
3.5
3.6
3.7
Line Protection Devices

Overview
Type designation
Distance protection
7SA82
7SA86
7SA87
7SD82
Overcurrent protection for overhead line
7SD86
7SD87
7SL82
7SL86
7SL87
Circuit-breaker management
7SJ86
1
1.1
1.2
3-pole trip command
Flexibly congurable hardware
1-/3-pole trip command
Table 2.5 / 2
7VK87
1.3
1.4
1.5
Overview of the various distinguishing features of the main protection types
1.6
1.7
7UDQVPLVVLRQ
*HQHUDWLRQ
'LVWULEXWLRQ
6-
6/
6$
66
.(
6'
.(
0'
6-
9.
6.
1.9
.(
0'
87
1.8
6$
6/
0'
6$
6'
6-
6-
66
6-
6'
6-
6'
6.
2.1
87
.(
6-
6/
87
6'
6.
2.2
6$
6$
6-
6-
2.3
0
2.4
Fig. 2.5 / 2
Visio-Anw_SIP5-LS-us.pdf
2.5
Areas of application of the SIPROTEC 5 devices in the power transmission system
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Distance Protection SIPROTEC 7SA82

Properties
1
1.1
1.2
Properties SIPROTEC 7SA82

Main function
Distance Protection for medium voltage and

subtransmission
Tripping
3-pole, min. tripping time 19 ms
Inputs and outputs
4 voltage transformers,
Hardware exibility
Two quantity structures are

available for binary inputs and outputs in the
1/3 base module, it is not possible to add
Housing width
1/319 inch
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
The distance protection relay SIPROTEC 7SA82 is part of the new

SIPROTEC 5 series of modular eld devices.
medium voltage and subtransmission application areas.
2.2

tool, the SIPROTEC 7SA82 ts perfectly for protection, control,
systems
2.3
Functions
2.4

device.
2.1
2.5
Fig. 2.5 / 3
Minimal tripping time 19 ms

6 independent measuring circuits (6 system distance protection)
Diverse distance protection methods available:Classic, reactance method (RMD), impedance protection for transformers
Distance protection device SIPROTEC 7SA82

chain topology
Whitepaper
Additional functions for simple tests and easy commis-
Directional backup protection and various additional functions
2.6
Recognition of static, intermittent and transient ground

faults (transient function) in resonant-grounded and iso-lated
networks
Table 2.5/3 shows all availalbe functions for SIPROTEC 7SA82.
2.7
Adaptive power swing blocking
2.8
Detection of CT saturation for fast tripping and high accuracy

at the same time
2.9
Arc protection
The distance protection relay SIPROTEC 7SA82 is a universal

lines.
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

protection
Chart)
Applications
Typical applications are:

Detection and selective 3-pole tripping of short circuits in
electric operational equipment of radial networks, lines which
are supplied from one or two sides, parallel lines and open or
closed looped networks of all voltage levels

Integrated electrical Ethernet port J for DIGSI and com-plete

IEC 61850 functionality (reporting and GOOSE)

types of lines, transformers, generators, motors, and busbars.

Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU).

two-wire connections and communication networks (IEEE

Applications
settings.

Basic distance protection
Distance protections for compensated/isolated systems with AR
1.1
Distance protection with reactance method for overhead line

for grounded systems, with AR.
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
Fig. 2.5 / 4
Application example: Distance protection for overhead line
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Functions
Abbr.
Available in
7SA82
DIS Basic
DIS, comp./isol.
neutral point,
with AR
DIS RMD overhead line, solid

grounded neutral
point
3-pole
1.5
21/21N
Distance protection
Z<, V/ (V,I)
21T
Z<
1.6
25
Sync
27
V<
27
V1<
1.8
27
Vx<
27Q
Q>/V<
1.9
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
46
I2>, (V2,I2)
47
V2>
2.2
49
, It
50/51 TD
I>
2.3
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns
Sensitive ground-current protection for systems with resonant or isolated

neutral
INs>
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.7
2
2.1
2.4
2.5
ANSI
Iie>
50BF
CBFP
50RS
CBRS
51V
t=f(I,V)
59
V>
59
59
59N

V1>
V1comp>
V0>
59
Vx>
67
I>, (V,I)
67N
Directional overcurrent protection for ground faults in grounded systems
IN>, (V,I)
2.7
67Ns

2.8
68
Z/t
74TC
TCS
78
Z/t
79
AR
81O
f>
81U
f<
81R
df/dt
85/21
85/27
85/67N
3.3
86
87N T
3.4
90V
90V
90V
2.6
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.5
Lockout
WI
IN
3.6
3.7

ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available in
7SA82
DIS Basic
DIS, comp./isol.
neutral point,
with AR

grounded neutral
point
FL
FL-one
PMU

currents)
PMU
Ix, It, 2P
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
2.4
Disconnector
Region France: Overload protection for lines and cables 'PSL-PSC'
125
225
2.5
Function points:
Table 2.5 / 3
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
SIPROTEC 7SA82 Functions and application templates
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Properties
1.1
Main function
Distance protection
Tripping
1.2
Inputs and outputs

4/4 or 8/8 current/voltage transformers,
Hardware exibility
Flexibly adjustable I/O quantity structure

within the scope of the SIPROTEC 5 modular
system
Housing width
1/3 19" to 2/1 19"
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
The distance protection SIPROTEC 7SA86 is part of the new

SIPROTEC 5 series of modular, exible and intelligent digital eld
devices.
DIGSI 5 engineering tool, the SIPROTEC 7SA86 ts perfectly for
Functions
device.
Diverse distance protection methods available: Classic, reactance method (RMD), impedance protection for transformers
2.5
2.6
Fig. 2.5 / 5

Whitepaper
Time synchronization IEEE 1588

networks
Additional functions for simple tests and easy commissioning
Adaptive power swing blocking, Out-of-Step protection
Table 2.5/4 shows all available functions for SIPROTEC 7SA86.

at the same time
Applications
Arc protection
Adjustable I/O quantity within the scope of the SIPROTEC 5

modular system.
2.7

protection
2.8
The distance protection device SIPROTEC 7SA86 is a universal

feeders and lines.

Chart)
Detection and selective 3-pole tripping of short circuits in

electric operational equipment of radial networks, lines which
are supplied from one or two sides, parallel lines and open or
closed looped networks of all voltage levels
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5

Integrated electrical Ethernet port J for DIGSI and complete
IEC 61850 functionality (reporting)
Up to four optional pluggable communication modules usable
for different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850, IEC 608705-103, IEC 60870-5-104, Modbus TCP, DNP3 (serial and TCP))
Serial protection data communication over ber-optic cable,
two-wire connections and communication networks
(IEEE C37.94 et al.) including automatic switch over between
ring and chain topology

Serial protection data communication over different distances
and physical media such as ber-optic cable, 2-wire connections and communication networks
types of lines, transformers, generators, motors, and bus-bars
3.6
3.7

Applications
Application templates are available in DIGSI for standard applications. They comprise all basic congurations and default
settings.
Distance protection with MHO distance zone characteristics for

overhead line for grounded systems, with AR
Distance protection for overhead line for grounded systems,

with AR for applications with breaker-and-a-half scheme
1.1
Distance protection with MHO distance zone characteristics for

overhead line for grounded systems, with AR for applications
with breaker-and-a-half schemes.

Distance protection for overhead line for grounded systems
with AR.
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
Busbar with line feeder
2.2
2.3
QA 52
6$
V4
MP
VT-1ph 1
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
CT-3ph 1
2.4
FG Line
FG Circuit breaker
I-3ph
21
85
CI
MP
VT-3ph 1
68
25
2.5
FL 50/51
59 81
27
V-3ph
V-1ph
V-3ph
I-3ph
50BF
79
Ctrl
PI
CB
Com.
Power line
Fig. 2.5 / 6
BI
BO
Teleprotection (85) can use

conventional signalling or serial
protection interface
FG
MP
PI
CI
CB
BI
BO
Function group
Measuring point
Communication interface
Circuit breaker
Binary input
Binary output
21
25
27
50/51
50HS
50BF
59
67N
68
79
81
85
Ctrl
FL
Distance protection
Undervoltage protection
Overcurrent protection, phases, ground
Overvoltage protection
Directional overcurrent protection for ground-faults
Automatic reclosing
Frequency protection
Teleprotection schemes
Control
Fault locator
Fig_3_Visio-Appl-Bsp_.pdf
V1
V2
V3
67N 50HS
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Applications
Busbar 1
1.1
1.2
Power line 1
1.3
1.4
7SA86
V1
V2
Com.
1.5
V3
1.6
I1
1.7
A-QA 52
1.8
I2
I3
I4
MP
VT-1ph 1
FG Line
MP
CT-3ph 1
I-3ph
FG Circuit breaker A-QA
87
21
STUB
85
V1
V2
1.9
V3
V4
MP
VT-3ph 1
67N
68
27
50HS
FL 50/51
59
V-1ph
V-3ph
25
I-3ph
50BF
81
79
V-3ph
Ctrl
B-QA 52
2.1
CI
CB
PI
BI
BO
I1
2.2
I2
I3
I4
2.3
2.4
V4
MP
CT-3ph 2
FG Circuit breaker B-QA
MP
VT-1ph 2
C-QA 52
V-1ph
V-3ph
25
I-3ph
50BF
79

Ctrl
CB
Power line 2
2.6
Busbar 2
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
FG
MP
PI
CI
CB
BI
BO
Function group
Measuring point
Circuit breaker
Summation of currents
Binary input
Binary output
21
25
27
50/51
50HS
50BF
59
67N
Distance protection
Directional overcurrent protection for ground
faults in grounded systems
68
79
Automatic reclosing
81
85
87STUB STUB Differential protection
Ctrl
Control
FL
Fault locator
3.1
3.2
Fig. 2.5 / 7
BI
BO
SIP5 G-0034.EN.ai
2.5
Application example: Distance protection for overhead line with breaker-and-a-half scheme
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

50N/ 51N TD
50Ns/ 51Ns
50BF
50RS
51V
59
59
59
59N
59
67
67N
67Ns
68
74TC
78
79
81O
81U
81R
85/21
85/27
85/67N
86
87N T
87 STUB
90V

grounded neutral
point
DIS RMD overhead

line, solid grounded neutral point

Dir. sensitive ground-fault detection for systems with resonant
or isolated neutral incl. a) V0>, b) Cos-/SinPhi, c) Transient
fct., d) Phi(V,I), e) Admittanz
Lockout
STUB Differential protection (for one-and-half circuit-breaker
applications)

grounded neutral
point
Abbr.
3-pole
I/O
Z<, V/ (V,I)
Z<
Sync
V<
V1<
Vx<
Q>/V<
P<>, Q<>
I<
DIS, comp./isol.
neutral point, with
AR
21/21N
21T
25
27
27
27
27Q
32, 37
37
38
46
47
49
50/51 TD
50N/ 51N TD
50HS
Functions
Distance protection
Undercurrent
Sensitive ground-current protection for systems with resonant
or isolated neutral
DIS Basic
ANSI
Available
in 7SA86
1.5
1.6
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.7
1.8
1.9
I2>, (V2,I2)
V2>
, It
I>
IN>
I>>>
SOTF
IN>
INs>
Iie>
CBFP
CBRS
t=f(I,V)
V>
V1>
V1comp>
V0>
Vx>
I>, (V,I)
IN>, (V,I)
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
Z/t
TCS
Z/t
AR
f>
f<
df/dt
WI
IN
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

DIS Basic
DIS, comp./isol.
neutral point, with
AR

grounded neutral
point

grounded neutral
point
DIS RMD overhead

line, solid grounded neutral point
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
ANSI
90V
90V
FL
PMU
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Functions
Synchrophasor measurement (1 PMU can be used for max. 8
voltages and 8 currents)
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
Region France: Overload protection for lines and cables 'PSLPSC'
Abbr.
Available
in 7SA86
1.1
FL-one
PMU
Ix, It, 2P
375
375
Function points:
Table 2.5 / 4
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
125
225

Properties
Main function
Distance protection
Tripping
1- and 3-pole, min. tripping time 9 ms
Inputs and outputs
12 predened standard variations with

1.2
Hardware exibility

system
1.4
Housing width
1/3 19" to 2/1 19"
1.1
1.3
1.5
1.6
The distance protection SIPROTEC 7SA87 is part of the new

SIPROTEC 5 series of modular, exible and intelligent digital eld
devices.
1.7
1.8

DIGSI 5 engineering tool, the SIPROTEC 7SA87 ts perfectly for
1.9
2
2.1
Functions
device.
Classic, reactance method (RMD), impedance protection for
transformers
networks
2.2
Fig. 2.5 / 8

Whitepaper
2.3
2.4

2.5

modular system.
Table 2.5/5 shows all available functions for SIPROTEC 7SA87.

at the same time
Applications
2.6
Arc protection
The distance protection device SIPROTEC 7SA87 is a universal

feeders and lines.
2.7

protection
2.8
2.9
2.10
Detection and selective 1- and 3-pole tripping of short circuits

in electric operational equipment of radial net-works, lines
which are supplied from one or two sides, parallel lines and
open or closed looped networks of all voltage levels
Integrated electrical Ethernet port J for DIGSI and com-plete

IEC 61850 functionality (reporting)

3.1



C37.94 et al.) including automatic switch over between ring
and chain topology


Chart)
3
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Applications
1
1.1

settings.
1.2

Distance protection reactance method (RMD) for overhead line
for grounded systems, with AR
Distance protection reactance method (RMD) for overhead line
in grounded systems, with AR for applications with breakerand-a-half schemes.
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
QA 52
7SA87
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
V4
MP
VT-1ph 1
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
CT-3ph 1
FG Line
FG Circuit breaker
I-3ph
21
85
2.3
V1
V2
V3
2.4
CI
MP
VT-3ph 1
67N 50HS
68
25
I-3ph
50BF
FL 50/51
59 81
27
V-3ph
V-1ph
V-3ph
79
Ctrl
PI
CB
2.5
Com.
Power line
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10

FG
MP
PI
CI
CB
BI
BO
Function group
Measuring point
Circuit breaker
Binary input
Binary output
21
25
27
50/51
50HS
50BF
59
67N
68
79
81
85
Ctrl
FL
Distance protection
Automatic reclosing
Control
Fault locator
3
3.1
Fig. 2.5 / 9
BI
BO
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
1.8

Applications
Busbar 1
1.1
1.2
7SA87
Power line 1
Com.
V3
A-QA
B-QA
1.3
V1
V2
I1
I2
I3
I4
52
1.5
FG Line
MP
CT-3ph 1
I-3ph
21
87
STUB
85
V1
V2
V3
V4
MP
VT-3ph 1
67N 50HS
68
27
FL 50/51
25
I-3ph
50BF
1.8
79
1.9
59 81
MP
CT-3ph 2
V4
MP
VT-1ph 2
1.7
V-3ph
Ctrl
CB
PI
I1
I2
I3
I4
1.6
V-1ph
V-3ph
52
CI
C-QA
1.4
MP
VT-1ph 1
BI
BO
2.1
2.2
2.3
52
V-1ph
V-3ph
25
I-3ph
50BF
2.4
Ctrl
CB
Power line 2
Busbar 2
Fig. 2.5 / 10
FG
MP
PI
CI
CB
BI
BO
Function group
Measuring point
Circuit breaker
Binary input
Binary output
21
25
27
50/51
50HS
50BF
59
67N
68
79
81
85
87STUB
Ctrl
FL
BI
BO
79
Distance protection
Automatic reclosing
STUB Differential protection
Control
Fault locator
Application example: Distance protection for overhead line with breaker-and-a-half scheme
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

1.4
ANSI
1.5
1.6
1.7
21/21N
1.8
21T
25
27
27
27
27Q
32, 37
37
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Functions
Distance protection

Undercurrent
38
46
47
49
50/51 TD
50HS
50Ns/ 51Ns Sensitive ground-current protection for systems with resonant or isolated neutral
50BF
51V
59
59
59
59N
59
67
67N
67Ns
Dir. sensitive ground-fault detection for systems with resonant or isolated neutral
incl. a) V0>, b) Cos-/SinPhi, c) Transient fct., d) Phi(V,I), e) Admittanz
68
74TC
78
79
81O
81U
81R
85/21
85/27
85/67N
86
Lockout
87N T
87 STUB
STUB Differential protection (for one-and-half circuit-breaker applications)
3.6
3.7
Abbr.
3-pole
1-pole
I/O
Z<, V/ (V,I)
Z<
Sync
V<
V1<
DIS RMD overhead line,

solid grounded neutral
point, 1.5 CB
1.3

point
1.2
DIS Basic
1.1
Available in 7SA87
Vx<
Q>/V<
P<>, Q<>
I<
I2>, (V2,I2)
V2>
, It
I>
IN>
I>>>
SOTF
IN>
INs>
Iie>
CBFP
t=f(I,V)
V>
V1>
V1comp>
V0>
Vx>
I>, (V,I)
IN>, (V,I)
Z/t
TCS
Z/t
AR
f>
f<
df/dt
WI
IN

PMU
Synchrophasor measurement (1 PMU can be used for max. 8 voltages and 8 currents)
PMU

Ix, It, 2P
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.7
1.8
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
Function points:
1.1
1.6
1.5

point, 1.5 CB
FL-one

point
Abbr.
FL
Functions
DIS Basic
ANSI
90V
90V
90V
Available in 7SA87
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
0
225
400
The conguration and function points for your application can be ascertained in the
SIPROTEC 5 order congurator under: www.siemens.com/siprotec
Table 2.5 / 5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Differential Protection SIPROTEC 7SD82

Properties
Properties SIPROTEC 7SD82
1.1
Main function
Line differential protection for medium voltage and subtransmission
1.2
Tripping
Inputs and outputs
Hardware exibility
Two quantity structures are

Housing width
1/3 19"
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
2.2
The line differential protection relay SIPROTEC 7SD82 is part of

the new SIPROTEC 5 series of modular eld devices.
With its exibility and its high-performance DIGSI 5
engineering tool, the SIPROTEC 7SD82 ts perfectly for
2.3
Functions
2.4

device.
1.9
2
2.1
2.5
Fig. 2.5 / 11
Differential protection device SIPROTEC 7SD82

Whitepaper
Main protection function is differential protection with

adaptive algorithm for maximum sensitivity and stability even
at different CT errors, CT saturation and capacitive charging
currents

Table 2.5/6 shows all available functions for SIPROTEC 7SD82.
2.6

networks
2.7
Detection of CT saturation
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Arc protection
protection
Applications
The line differential protection relay SIPROTEC 7SD82 is a universal protection, control and automation device on the basis of the
feeders and lines.
Line protection for all voltage levels with 3-pole tripping

chart)
Phase-selective protection of overhead lines and cables with

single- and multi-ended infeeds of all lengths with up to 6 line
ends
Transformers and compensating coils in the protection zone
Integrated electrical Ethernet port J for DIGSI and complete

IEC 61850 functionality (reporting and GOOSE)

Two optional pluggable communication modules usable for



and chain topology
3.7

Applications
settings.
Basic differential protection
1.1
Differential protection for overhead line.
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
QA 52
1.8
6'
V4
MP
VT-1ph 1
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
CT-3ph 1
1.9
FG Line
FG Circuit breaker
I-3ph
V-1ph
V-3ph
50/51
50HS
87L
V1
V2
V3
MP
VT-3ph 1
25
2.1
2.2
FL
27 59 81
I-3ph
V-3ph
50BF
2.3
79
2.4
Ctrl
CI
PI
CB
BI
BO
2.5
Com.
FG
MP
PI
CI
CB
BI
BO
Fig. 2.5 / 12
Function group
Measuring point
Circuit breaker
Binary input
Binary output
25
27
50/51
50HS
50BF
59
79
81
87L
Ctrl
FL

Automatic reclosing
Differential protection, line
Control
Fault locator
Application example: Line differential protection for overhead line
Power line
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Abbr.
Available in 7SD82
DIFF Basic
DIFF overhead line
3-pole
1.5
87L
87L
Line differential protection for 3 to 6 line ends (dependent on Signicant properties)
1.6
25
Sync
27
V<
27
V1<
1.8
27
Vx<
27Q
Q>/V<
1.9
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
46
I2>, (V2,I2)
47
V2>
2.2
49
, It
50/51 TD
I>
2.3
IN>
50HS
I>>>
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.7
2
2.1
2.4
ANSI
Functions
SOTF
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns
Sensitive ground-current protection for systems with resonant or isolated neutral
INs>
Iie>
CBFP
50RS
CBRS
51V
t=f(I,V)
59
V>
59
V1>
59
V1comp>
59N
V0>
59
Vx>
67
I>, (V,I)
67N
IN>, (V,I)
67Ns
Dir. sensitive ground-fault detection for systems with resonant or isolated neutral incl. a)
V0>, b) Cos-/SinPhi, c) Transient fct., d) Phi(V,I), e) Admittanz
2.8
74TC
TCS
79
AR
2.9
81O
f>
81U
f<
2.10
81R
df/dt
86
Lockout
87N T
IN
87L/ 87T
Option for line differential protection: including power transformer
Option for line differential protection:charging-current compensation
50BF
2.5
2.6
2.7
3
3.1
3.2
87 STUB
90V
3.4
90V
90V
3.5
FL
3.6
3.7
3.3
FL-one

Abbr.
PMU
PMU
Ix, It, 2P
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
Function points:
Table 2.5 / 6
DIFF overhead line
Functions
DIFF Basic
ANSI
Available in 7SD82
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
150
2.5
SIPROTEC 7SD82 Functions and application templates
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Properties
1
1.1
1.2

Main function
Inputs and outputs

Hardware exibility

system
Housing width
1/3 19" to 2/1 19"
1.3
1.4
1.5
Tripping
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
The line differential protection SIPROTEC 7SD86 is part of the

new SIPROTEC 5 series of modular, exible and intelligent digital
eld devices.
DIGSI 5 engineering tool, the SIPROTEC 7SD86 ts perfectly for
2.1
Functions
2.2

device.
2.3
2.4
2.5

currents
networks
2.6
2.7

protection
3-pole automatic reclosing function
2.9
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6

Whitepaper
modular system.
Arc protection
2.8
2.10
Fig. 2.5 / 13

Chart)
Applications
The combined line differential protection device SIPROTEC
7SD86 is a universal protection, control and automation device
on the basis of the SIPROTEC 5 system. It is especially designed
for the protection of feeders and lines.


ends

two-wire connections and communication networks
(IEEE C37.94 et al.) including automatic switch over between
ring and chain topology
Switchgears with breaker-and-a-half schemes

3.7

Applications
Application templates are available in DIGSI for standard applications. They comprise all basic congurations and default settings.
1.1
1.2

1.3
Differential protection for overhead line
1.4
Differential protection for overhead line with transformer in the

protection range
1.5
Differential protection for overhead line, for applications with

breaker-and-a-half schemes.
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
QA 52
2.1
7SD86
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
CT-3ph 1
2.2
FG Line
I-3ph
50/51
50HS
87L
V1
V2
V3
MP
VT-3ph 1
FG Circuit breaker
2.3
V-1ph
V-3ph
25
2.4
I-3ph
50BF
FL
27 59 81
V-3ph
79
Ctrl
CI
PI
FG
MP
PI
CI
CB
BI
BO
Function group
Measuring point
Circuit breaker
Binary input
Binary output
CB
BI
BO
V4
MP
VT-1ph 1
2.5
Com.
2.6
Power line
Fig. 2.5 / 14
25
27
50/51
50HS
50BF
59
79
81
87L
Ctrl
FL

Automatic reclosing
Control
Fault locator
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Applications
Busbar 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
7SD86
Power line 1
V1
V2
Com.
1.5
1.6
1.7
A-QA
52
1.8
B-QA
MP
VT-1ph 1
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
CT-3ph 1
V1
V2
V3
V4
1.9
2
V3
I-3ph
50/51 50HS
87
STUB
87L
MP
VT-3ph 1
FL
V-1ph
V-3ph
25
I-3ph
50BF
27 59 81
79
V-3ph
Ctrl
52
CI
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
C-QA
FG Line
CB
PI
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
CT-3ph 2
V4
MP
VT-1ph 2
BI
BO
52
V-1ph
V-3ph
25
I-3ph
50BF
Ctrl
2.5
CB
Power line 2
2.6
Busbar 2
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
Fig. 2.5 / 15
FG
MP
PI
CI
CB
BI
BO
Function group
Measuring point
Circuit breaker
Binary input
Binary output
25
27
50/51
50HS
50BF
59
79
81
87L
87STUB
Ctrl
FL
BI
BO
79

Automatic reclosing
Control
Fault locator
Application example: Line differential protection for overhead line with breaker-and-a-half scheme
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

DIFF Overhead line,

breaker-and-a-half
Sync
V<
V1<
Vx<
Q>/V<
P<>, Q<>
I<
DIFF Overhead line

with transformer
Abbr.
3-pole
I/O
I
I
DIFF Overhead line
Functions
87L
87L
Line differential protection for 3 to 6 line ends (dependent on Signicant
properties)
25
27
27
27
27Q
32, 37
37
Undercurrent
38
46
47
49
50/51 TD
50HS
50Ns/ 51Ns Sensitive ground-current protection for systems with resonant or isolated
neutral
50BF
50RS
51V
59
59
59
59N
59
67
67N
67Ns
74TC
79
81O
81U
81R
86
Lockout
87N T
87L/ 87T
87 STUB
90V
90V
90V
FL
DIFF Basic
ANSI
1.6
1.7
Iie>
CBFP
CBRS
t=f(I,V)
V>
V1>
V1comp>
V0>
Vx>
I>, (V,I)
IN>, (V,I)
1.4
1.5
1.8
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
FL-one
1.3
2.1
IN
I
I
1.2
1.1
1.9
I2>, (V2,I2)
V2>
, It
I>
IN>
I>>>
SOTF
IN>
INs>
TCS
AR
f>
f<
df/dt
Available
in 7SD86
3.5
3.6
3.7

DIFF Basic
DIFF Overhead line
DIFF Overhead line

with transformer
DIFF Overhead line,

breaker-and-a-half
1.2
1.3
1.4
ANSI
PMU
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Functions
currents)
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
Abbr.
PMU
Table 2.5 / 7
Ix, It, 2P
Function points:
2.5
Available
in 7SD86
1.1
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
150
250
325

Properties
Main function
Tripping
Inputs and outputs

1.2
Hardware exibility

system
1.4
Housing width
1/3 19" to 2/1 19"
1.1
1.3
1.5
1.6
The line differential protection SIPROTEC 7SD87 is part of the

eld devices.
1.7

DIGSI 5 engineering tool, the SIPROTEC 7SD87 ts perfectly for
1.9
1.8
2
2.1
Functions
device.
2.2
Fig. 2.5 / 16
2.3
2.4

Whitepaper

currents

Additional functions for simple tests and easy commis-sioning

networks

modular system

2.5
2.6
Arc protection
protection
Applications
The combined line differential protection device

SIPROTEC 7SD87 is a universal protection, control and
automation device on the basis of the SIPROTEC 5 system. It is
especially designed for the protection of feeders and lines.
1-/3-pole Automatic reclosing function

Chart)

Line protection for all voltage levels with 1- and 3-pole tripping
ends
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1

3.2

3.3

and chain topology

3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Applications
1
1.1
1.2

settings.

Differential protection for overhead line
Differential protection for overhead line, for applications with
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
QA 52
7SD87
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
V4
MP
VT-1ph 1
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
CT-3ph 1
FG Line
FG Circuit breaker
I-3ph
50/51
50HS
87L
2.4
V1
V2
V3
MP
VT-3ph 1
V-1ph
V-3ph
25
I-3ph
50BF
FL
27 59 81
V-3ph
79
2.5
CI
PI
FG
MP
PI
CI
CB
BI
BO
Function group
Measuring point
Circuit breaker
Binary input
Binary output
CB
Com.
Power line
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
25
27
50/51
50HS
50BF
59
79
81
87L
Ctrl
FL

Automatic reclosing
Control
Fault locator
2.10
3
Fig. 2.5 / 17
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
BI
BO
Ctrl

Applications
Busbar 1
1.1
1.2
7SD87
Power line 1
Com.
V3
A-QA
B-QA
1.3
V1
V2
52
I1
I2
I3
I4
V1
V2
V3
V4
1.5
FG Line
MP
CT-3ph 1
I-3ph
50/51 50HS
87
STUB
87L
MP
VT-3ph 1
FL
V-1ph
V-3ph
25
I-3ph
50BF
27 59 81
MP
CT-3ph 2
V4
MP
VT-1ph 2
1.8
79
1.9
V-3ph
Ctrl
CB
PI
I1
I2
I3
I4
1.6
1.7
52
CI
C-QA
1.4
MP
VT-1ph 1
BI
BO
2.1
2.2
52
2.3
V-1ph
V-3ph
25
2.4
I-3ph
50BF
Ctrl
CB
Power line 2
Busbar 2
FG
MP
PI
CI
CB
BI
BO
Function group
Measuring point
Circuit breaker
Binary input
Binary output
25
27
50/51
50HS
50BF
59
79
81
87L
87STUB
Ctrl
FL
BI
BO
79

Automatic reclosing
Control
Fault locator
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
Fig. 2.5 / 18
Application example: Line differential protection for overhead line with breaker-and-a-half scheme
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Available
in 7SD87
DIFF Basic
DIFF overhead line
DIFF overhead line,

1.5 CB
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
ANSI
87L
87L
25
27
27
Functions
Line differential protection for 3 to 6 line ends (dependent on Signicant properties)
Abbr.
3-pole
1-pole
I/O
I
I
Sync
V<
V1<
27
Vx<
27Q
Q>/V<
32, 37
37
38

Undercurrent
P<>, Q<>
I<
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
46
47
49
50/51 TD
50N/ 51N TD
50HS
50N/ 51N TD
50Ns/ 51Ns
2.5
50BF
51V
59
59
59
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
59N
59
67
67N
67Ns
74TC
79
81O
81U
81R
86
87N T
87L/ 87T
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
87 STUB
90V
90V
90V
FL

Dir. sensitive ground-fault detection for systems with resonant or isolated neutral incl.
a) V0>, b) Cos-/SinPhi, c) Transient fct., d) Phi(V,I), e) Admittanz
Lockout
3.6
3.7
I2>, (V2,I2)
V2>
, It
I>
IN>
I>>>
SOTF
IN>
INs>
Iie>
CBFP
t=f(I,V)
V>
V1>
V1comp>
V0>
Vx>
I>, (V,I)
IN>, (V,I)
TCS
AR
f>
f<
df/dt
IN
I
I
FL-one

DIFF overhead line,

1.5 CB
Ix, It, 2P
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
Function points:
Table 2.5 / 8
Abbr.
PMU
DIFF overhead line
Functions
DIFF Basic
ANSI
PMU
Available
in 7SD87
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
175
350
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Differential and Distance Protection SIPROTEC 7SL82

Properties
1
1.1
1.2
Properties SIPROTEC 7SL82

Main function
Differential and Distance Protection for

medium voltage and subtransmission
Tripping
Inputs and outputs
Hardware exibility
Various hardware quantity structures are

Housing width
1/3 19"
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
2.2
The combined line differential and distance protection relay

SIPROTEC 7SL82 is part of the new SIPROTEC 5 series modular
eld devices.
tool, the SIPROTEC 7SL82 ts perfectly for protection, control,
monitoring, and measuring applica-tions in electrical energy
systems.
2.3
Functions
1.9
2
2.1
2.4
2.5
2.6

device.
currents
Diverse distance protection methods as backup or main 2 protection available: Classic, reactance method (RMD), impedance
protection for transformers
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5

networks
Fig. 2.5 / 19
Differential and distance protection SIPROTEC 7SL82

and chain topology
Whitepaper
Table 2.5/9 shows all available functions for SIPROTEC 7SL82.
Applications
Adaptive power swing blocking

single- and multi-ended infeeds of all lengths up to 6 line ends
Arc protection


Chart)

Two optional pluggable communication modules usable for

3.6
3.7

Applications
settings.
1
1.1
1.2
Basic differential and distance protection
1.3
Differential and distance protection for overhead line in

grounded systems.
1.4
1.5
%XVEDUZLWKOLQHIHHGHU
1.6
1.7
4$
1.8
7SL82
9
,
,
,
,
1.9
03
9SK
)* /LQH
03
,SK
,SK
21
87L
9
9
9
85
9SK
9SK
25
50HS
FL 50/51
,SK
50BF
67N
68
27
03
9SK
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU
59 81
9SK
2.1
2.2
2.3
79
2.4
Ctrl
CI
CB
PI
%,
%2
7HOHSURWHFWLRQFDQXVH
FRQYHQWLRQDOVLJQDOOLQJRUVHULDO
SURWHFWLRQLQWHUIDFH
2.5
)*
03
3,
&,
&%
%,
%2
Fig. 2.5 / 20
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
3URWHFWLRQLQWHUIDFH
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
%LQDU\LQSXW
%LQDU\RXWSXW

+6
%)

1

/
&WUO
)/
'LVWDQFHSURWHFWLRQ
6\QFKURFKHFNV\QFKURQL]DWLRQIXQFWLRQ
8QGHUYROWDJHSURWHFWLRQ
2YHUFXUUHQWSURWHFWLRQSKDVHVJURXQG
,QVWDQWDQHRXVKLJKFXUUHQWWULSSLQJ
'LUHFWLRQDORYHUFXUUHQWSURWHFWLRQIRUJURXQGIDXOWV
3RZHUVZLQJEORFNLQJ
$XWRPDWLFUHFORVLQJ
)UHTXHQF\SURWHFWLRQ
7HOHSURWHFWLRQVFKHPHVIRUDQGRU1
'LIIHUHQWLDOSURWHFWLRQSRZHUOLQH
&RQWURO
)DXOWORFDWRU
Application example: Combined line differential and distance protection for overhead line
7SL82_Visio-Appl-Bsp.pdf
/LQH &RPPXQLFDWLRQ
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Available
in 7SL82
DIFF/DIS Basic
DIFF/DIS RMD
overhead line, solid
grounded neutral
point point
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
ANSI
Functions
Distance protection
Abbr.
3-pole
21/21N
Z<, V/ (V,I)
21T
Z<
87L
I
87L
Line differential protection for 3 to 6 line ends (dependent on Signicant properties) I
25
Sync
27
V<
27
V1<
27
Vx<
27Q
Q>/V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
46
I2>
46
I2>, (V2,I2)
47
V2>
49
, It
50/51 TD
I>
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
IN>
INs>
Iie>
CBFP
50BF
CBRS
50RS
t=f(I,V)
51V
V>
59
59
V1>
V1comp>
59
V0>
59N
Vx>
59
67
I>, (V,I)
67N
IN>, (V,I)
67Ns
68
Z/t
74TC
TCS
78
Z/t
79
AR
81O
f>
81U
f<
81R
df/dt
85/21
85/27
WI
85/67N
86
Lockout
87N T
IN
87L/ 87T
I
I
3.7

Table 2.5 / 9
Abbr.
DIFF/DIS RMD
grounded neutral
point point
Functions
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
DIFF/DIS Basic
ANSI
87 STUB
90V
90V
90V
FL
PMU
Available
in 7SL82
1.6
1.8
1.9
Ix, It, 2P
1.3
1.7
1.2
1.5
1.1
1.4
FL-one
PMU
2.1
225
2.2
2.3
2.4

Function points:
2.5
SIPROTEC 7SL82 Functions and application templates
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Properties
1
1.1
1.2

Main function
Tripping
Inputs and outputs
12 predened standard variants with 4/4 or

8/8 current/voltage transformers,
Hardware exibility

system
Housing width
1/3 19" to 2/1 19"
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Differential protection and distance

protection
The combined line differential and distance protection SIPROTEC

7SL86 is part of the new SIPROTEC 5 series of modular, exible
and intelligent digital eld devices.
DIGSI 5 engineering tool, the SIPROTEC 7SL86 ts perfectly for
Functions
device.
2.5

currents
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3

modular system
Table 2.5 / 10 shows all available functions for SIPROTEC 7SL86.
The combined line differential and distance protection device

SIPROTEC 7SL86 is a universal protection, control and automation device on the basis of the SIPROTEC 5 system. It is especially
designed for the protection of feeders and lines.
Arc protection
3-pole automatic reclosing function

Chart)

ends

3.6

Recognition of static and transient ground faults (transi-ent

function) in resonant-grounded and isolated networks
3.2
3.5

Whitepaper
Applications

3.4
3.1
3.3
Fig. 2.5 / 19

and chain topology

3.7

Applications
settings.

Differential and distance protection with RMD for overhead
line in grounded systems
line in grounded systems, with AR for applications with
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
QA 52
7SL86
MP
VT-1ph 1
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
CT-3ph 1
FG Line
FG Circuit breaker
I-3ph
21
85
87L
V1
V2
V3
CI
MP
VT-3ph 1
67N 50HS
68
V-3ph
25
I-3ph
50BF
2.5
FL 50/51
59 81
27
V-1ph
V-3ph
79
Ctrl
PI
CB
Com.
BI
BO

Function group
Measuring point
Circuit breaker
Binary input
Binary output
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
Power line
FG
MP
PI
CI
CB
BI
BO
V4
21
25
27
50/51
50HS
50BF
59
67N
68
79
81
85
Ctrl
FL
Distance protection
Automatic reclosing
Teleprotection schemes for 21 and/or 67 N
Control
Fault locator
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Fig. 2.5 / 20
3.7

Applications
Busbar 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
7SL86
Power line 1
V1
V2
Com.
1.5
1.6
1.7
A-QA
1.8
52
B-QA
MP
VT-1ph 1
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
CT-3ph 1
V1
V2
V3
V4
1.9
2
V3
I-3ph
85
87L
MP
VT-3ph 1
67N 50HS
21
87
STUB
68
27
FL 50/51
V-1ph
V-3ph
25
I-3ph
50BF
59 81
79
V-3ph
Ctrl
52
CI
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
C-QA
FG Line
CB
PI
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
CT-3ph 2
V4
MP
VT-1ph 2
BI
BO
52
V-1ph
V-3ph
25
I-3ph
50BF
2.5
Ctrl
CB
Power line 2
2.6
Busbar 2
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
FG
MP
PI
CI
CB
BI
BO
Function group
Measuring point
Circuit breaker
Binary input
Binary output
21
25
27
50/51
50HS
50BF
59
67N
68
79
81
85
87L
87STUB
Ctrl
FL
Distance protection
Automatic reclosing
Teleprotection schemes for 21 and/or 67N
Control
Fault locator
3.1
3.2
Fig. 2.5 / 21
BI
BO
79
with breaker-and-a-half scheme
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

DIFF/DIS RMD overhead line, 1.5 CB
Abbr.
3-pole
I/O
21/21N
Z<, V/ (V,I)
21T
Z<
87L
I
87L
Line differential protection for 3 to 6 line ends (dependent on Signicant properties) I
25
Sync
27
V<
27
V1<
27
Vx<
27Q
Q>/V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
46
I2>
46
I2>, (V2,I2)
47
V2>
49
, It
50/51 TD
I>
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
IN>
INs>
Iie>
CBFP
50BF
CBRS
50RS
t=f(I,V)
51V
V>
59
59
V1>
V1comp>
59
V0>
59N
Vx>
59
67
I>, (V,I)
67N
IN>, (V,I)
67Ns
68
Z/t
74TC
TCS
78
Z/t
79
AR
81O
f>
81U
f<
81R
df/dt
85/21
85/27
WI
85/67N
86
Lockout
87N T
IN
87L/ 87T
I
I
DIFF/DIS RMD
grounded neutral
point point
Functions
Distance protection
DIFF/DIS Basic
ANSI
Available
in 7SL86
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.10
2.9
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
ANSI
87 STUB
90V
90V
90V
FL
PMU
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Table 2.5 / 10
Functions
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
Abbr.
FL-one
PMU
Ix, It, 2P
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Function points:
2.6
DIFF/DIS RMD overhead line, 1.5 CB
1.3
DIFF/DIS RMD
grounded neutral
point point
1.2
Available
in 7SL86
1.1
DIFF/DIS Basic
225

Properties
Main function
Differential and Distance Protection
Tripping
Inputs and outputs

1.2
Hardware exibility

system
1.4
Housing width
1/3 19" to 2/1 19"
1.1
1.3
1.5
1.6
The combined line differential and distance protection SIPROTEC

7SL87 is part of the new SIPROTEC 5 series of modular, exible
and intelligent digital eld devices.
1.7
1.8

DIGSI 5 engineering tool, the SIPROTEC 7SL87 ts perfectly for
1.9
2
2.1
Function
device.


currents

Table 2.5 / 11 shows all available functions for SIPROTEC 7SL87.
2.2
Fig. 2.5 / 22

modular system.
Applications
The combined line differential and distance protection device

SIPROTEC 7SL87 is a universal protection, control and automation device on the basis of the SIPROTEC 5 system. It is especially
designed for the protection of feeders and lines.
Recognition of static and transient ground faults (transi-ent

function) in resonant-grounded and isolated networks
Arc protection
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
1-/3-pole Automatic reclosing function
Line protection for all voltage levels with 1- and 3-pole tripping
2.8

ends
2.9

Chart)
and chain topology
Cyber Security in accordance withNERC CIP and BDEW Whitepaper
2.10

3.1

3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5

settings.
line in grounded systems
line in grounded systems for applications with breaker-and-ahalf schemes.
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
QA 52
2.2
7SL87
2.3
V4
MP
VT-1ph 1
2.4
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
CT-3ph 1
FG Line
FG Circuit breaker
I-3ph
21
85
87L
V1
V2
V3
2.5
CI
MP
VT-3ph 1
67N 50HS
68
25
I-3ph
50BF
FL 50/51
59 81
27
V-3ph
V-1ph
V-3ph
2.1
79
Ctrl
PI
CB
2.6
Com.
2.7

Power line
FG
MP
PI
CI
CB
BI
BO
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
Function group
Measuring point
Circuit breaker
Binary input
Binary output
21
25
27
50/51
50HS
50BF
59
67N
68
79
81
85
Ctrl
FL
Distance protection
Automatic reclosing
Control
Fault locator
3.3
3.4
3.5
Fig. 2.5 / 23
BI
BO
3.6
3.7

Busbar 1
1.1
1.2
7SL87
Power line 1
Com.
V3
A-QA
B-QA
1.3
V1
V2
52
I1
I2
I3
I4
V1
V2
V3
V4
1.5
FG Line
MP
CT-3ph 1
I-3ph
MP
VT-3ph 1
67N 50HS
21
87
STUB
85
87L
68
27
FL 50/51
25
I-3ph
50BF
1.8
79
1.9
59 81
MP
CT-3ph 2
V4
MP
VT-1ph 2
1.7
V-3ph
Ctrl
CB
PI
I1
I2
I3
I4
1.6
V-1ph
V-3ph
52
CI
C-QA
1.4
MP
VT-1ph 1
BI
BO
2.1
2.2
2.3
52
V-1ph
V-3ph
25
I-3ph
50BF
2.4
Ctrl
CB
Power line 2
Busbar 2
FG
MP
PI
CI
CB
BI
BO
Function group
Measuring point
Circuit breaker
Binary input
Binary output
21
25
27
50/51
50HS
50BF
59
67N
68
79
81
85
87L
87STUB
Ctrl
FL
BI
BO
79
Distance protection
Automatic reclosing
Teleprotection schemes for 21 and/or 67N
Control
Fault locator
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
Fig. 2.5 / 24
with breaker-and-a-half scheme
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Available
in 7SL87
DIFF / DIS Basic
DIFF/DIS RMD
overhead line,
solid grounded
neutral point
DIFF/DIS RMD
overhead line,
1.5 CB
1.1
1.2
1.3
ANSI
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
21/21N
21T
87L
87L
25
27
27
27
27Q
32, 37
37
38
46
Functions
Distance protection
Line differential protection for 3 to 6 line ends (dependent on Signicant
properties)
Undercurrent
47
49
50/51 TD
50N/ 51N TD
50HS

50Ns/ 51Ns
neutral
50BF
51V
59
59
59
59N
59
67
67N
67Ns
Dir. sensitive ground-fault detection for systems with resonant or isolated neutral incl. a) V0>, b) Cos-/SinPhi, c) Transient fct., d) Phi(V,I), e) Admittanz
68
74TC
78
79
81O
81U
81R
85/21
85/27
85/67N
86
Lockout
87N T
87L/ 87T
Abbr.
3-pole
1-pole
I/O
Z<, V/ (V,I)
Z/V<
P<>, Q<>
I<
I2>,
(V2,I2)
V2>
, It
I>
IN>
I>>>
SOTF
IN>
INs>
Iie>
CBFP
t=f(I,V)
V>
V1>
V1comp>
V0>
Vx>
I>, (V,I)
IN>, (V,I)
Z/t
TCS
Z/t
AR
f>
f<
df/dt
WI
IN
I

87 STUB
90V
90V
90V
FL
PMU
Table 2.5 / 11
1
DIFF/DIS RMD
overhead line,
1.5 CB
DIFF/DIS RMD
overhead line,
solid grounded
neutral point
Functions
Abbr.
I
FL-one
PMU
currents)
Ix, It, 2P
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
Function points:
DIFF / DIS Basic
ANSI
Available
in 7SL87
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.8
1.9
1.7
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
225
400
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Circuit-Breaker Management SIPROTEC 7VK87

Properties
1
1.1
1.2
Properties SIPROTEC 7VK87

Main function
Automatic reclosing, synchrocheck, circuitbreaker failure protection
Tripping
1- and 3-pole or 3-pole
Inputs and outputs

Hardware exibility

system
Housing width
1/3 19" to 2/1 19"
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
The breaker management device SIPROTEC 7VK87 is part of the

eld devices.
DIGSI 5 engineering tool, the SIPROTEC 7VK87 ts perfectly for
Functions
Alll functions can be congured freely with DIGSI 5. For the
device.
Automatic reclosing function and synchrocheck for line protection applications with 1- and 3-pole tripping
2.5

Voltage controller for transformers
Arc protection
Voltage protection
Chart)
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4

and chain topology
Fig. 2.5 / 25
Circuit-breaker management SIPROTEC 7VK87
Table 2.5 / 12 shows all available functions for SIPROTEC 7VK87.

Applications
The breaker management device SIPROTEC 7VK87 is a universal
SIPROTEC 5 system. It is especially designed for the management
of breakers after tripping.
Automatic reclosing after 1- or 3-pole tripping
Synchronization check before closing
Circuit breaker protection
Backup overcurrent and voltage protection
Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)Application templates.
The device supports all SIPROTEC 5 system characteristics. It
enables future-oriented system solutions with high investment
security and low operating costs.

Whitepaper
3.5
3.6

modular system.
3.7

settings.
1
1.1
The following application template is available:
1.2
Basic circuit-breaker management device
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
QA 52
7VK87
V4
MP
VT-1ph 1
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
CT-3ph 1
V1
V2
V3
MP
VT-3ph 1
1.8
FG Circuit breaker
V-1ph
V-3ph
25
I-3ph
50BF
1.9
2
2.1
79
2.2
Protection device
Ctrl
CB
2.3
BI
BO
CI
2.4
CI
Optionally the information between protection

device and breaker management device can be
exchanged via binary inputs/outputs or via serial
communication according to IEC61850/GOOSE
2.5
FG
MP
CI
CB
BI
BO
Fig. 2.5 / 26
Function group
Measuring point
Circuit breaker
Binary input
Binary output
25
50BF
79
Ctrl
Application example: Circuit-breaker management device

Breaker failure protection
Automatic reclosing
Control
Power line
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
ANSI
Functions

25
27
27
27
32, 37
37
Undercurrent
38
46
47
50/51 TD
50HS
50BF
59
59
59
59N
67
67N
74TC
79
81O
81U
81R
86
Lockout
87N T
90V
90V
90V
FL
PMU
currents)
CFC arithmetic
Control
Abbr.
3-pole
1-pole
I/O
Sync
V<
V1<
Vx<
P<>, Q<>
I<
I2>, (V2,I2)
V2>
I>
IN>
I>>>
SOTF
IN>
CBFP
V>
V1>
V1comp>
V0>
I>, (V,I)
IN>, (V,I)
TCS
AR
f>
f<
df/dt
IN
FL-one
PMU
Ix, It, 2P
3.6
3.7
Basic (79 AR, 25

Sync., 50BF Breaker
fail. prot.)
1.1
Available in 7SVK87

Functions
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
Abbr.
Function points:
Table 2.5 / 12
Basic (79 AR, 25

Sync., 50BF Breaker
fail. prot.)
ANSI
Available in 7SVK87
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
SIPROTEC 7VK87 Functions and application templates
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Overcurrent Protection for Line SIPROTEC 7SJ86

Properties
1
1.1
1.2

Main protection function Overcurrent protection (U/AMZ)
Tripping
3-pole
Inputs and outputs

4/4 current/voltage transformers,
Hardware exibility
Flexibly adjustable and expandable I/O

quantity structure within the scope of the
SIPROTEC 5 modular system
Housing width
1/3 19" to 2/1 19"
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
The feeder and overcurrent protection SIPROTEC 7SJ86 is part of

the new SIPROTEC 5 series of modular, exible and intelligent
digital eld devices.
DIGSI 5 engineering tool, the SIPROTEC 7SJ86 ts perfectly for
electrical energy systems and for reserve or emergency protection for the line protection devices.
Functions
device.
Overcurrent protection with 3-pole tripping
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3

networks
Fig. 2.5 / 27
Overcurrent protection SIPROTEC 7SJ86

chain topology
Whitepaper
Arc protection


protection
Table 2.5 / 13 shows all available functions for SIPROTEC 7SJ86.

Application

feeders and lines.
Reserve or emergency protection for the line protection
3.1

Chart)
3.2
Detection of short circuits in electric operational equipment

of radial networks, lines which are supplied from one or two
sides, parallel lines and open or closed looped networks of all
voltage levels
3.3


3.4
4 optional pluggable communication modules, usable for different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103,
IEC 60870-5-104, Modbus TCP, DNP3 (serial and TCP))

3.5
3.6
3.7

Reverse power protection.

Fig. 2.5 / 28 shows an application example for directional
protection for overhead line. The functional scope is based on
the application template directional overcurrent protection. In
addition the functions fault locator and automatic reclosing
were loaded from the DIGSI 5 library.
settings.
1
1.1
1.2
7SJ86 non-directional overcurrent protection
1.3
7SJ86 directional overcurrent protection.
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
QA 52
7SJ86
V4
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
I-3ph 1
I-3ph
CI
50HS
67N
85
V1
V2
V3
FL
50/51
67
MP
V-3ph 1
2.1
FG Circuit breaker
FG line
2.2
V-1ph
V-3ph
2.3
I-3ph
2.4
79
U-3ph
Ctrl
CB
PI
BI
BO
2.5
Com.

FG
MP
PI
CI
CB
BI
BO
Fig. 2.5 / 28
Function group
Measuring point
Circuit breaker
Binary input
Binary output
50/51
50HS
67
67N
79
85
Ctrl
FL

Directional overcurrent protection, Phase
Automatic reclosing
Control
Fault locator
Application example: directional overcurrent protection for overhead line
Fig_27_7SJ86_Visio-Appl-Bsp_.pdf
Power line
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Abbr.
Available in 7SJ86
Non-directional OC
(4*I, 4*V)
3-pole
I/O
1.6
25
Sync
27
V<
1.7
27
V1<
27
Vx<
27Q
Q>/V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
46
I2>, (V2,I2)
2.1
47
V2>
49
, It
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
ANSI
1.5
1.8
1.9
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Functions
I>>>
SOTF
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns

neutral
INs>
50HS
Iie>
50BF
CBFP
50RS
CBRS
51V
t=f(I,V)
59
V>
59
V1>
59
V1comp>
59N
V0>
59
Vx>
67N
67Ns
IN>, (V,I)
74TC
TCS
79
AR
81O
f>
81U
f<
81R
df/dt
85/67N
86
Lockout
87N T
IN
90V

FL
FL-one
PMU

currents)
PMU
3.6
3.7
90V
90V
Dir. sensitive ground-fault detection for systems with resonant or isolated neutral incl. a) V0>, b) Cos-/SinPhi, c) Transient fct., d) Phi(V,I), e) Admittanz

Abbr.
Ix, It, 2P
Functions
Non-directional OC
(4*I, 4*V)
ANSI
Available in 7SJ86
CFC arithmetic
Control
1.3
1.4
1.6
1.7
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
Function points:
1.2
1.5
1.1
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
35
Table 2.5 / 13
SIPROTEC 7SJ86 Functions and application templates
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Line Protection
Standard variants
1
1.1
Standard variant for SIPROTEC 7SA82, 7SD82, 7SL82

U1
1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I. 4V

s
Run
1.2
1.3
SIPROTEC
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
1.4
1.5
Error

11 binary inputs,
4 current transformer inputs, 4 voltage transformers
U2
1/3, 23 BI, 16 BO, 4 I, 4V

s
Run
1.7

23 binary inputs,
4 current transformer inputs, 4 voltage transformers
1.8
1.6
Error
SIPROTEC
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
1.9
2
2.1
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7SA86, 7SD86, 7SL86, 7SA87, 7SD87, 7SL87, 7VK87
Type 1
Run
Error
Housing width 1/3 19",

7 binary inputs, 14 binary outputs (1 lifecontact, 5 standard, 8 fast),
16 LEDs, 4 current transformers, 4 voltage transformers
2.2
2.3
2.4
1/3, 7BI, 14BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
SIPROTEC
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
Contains the modules: Base module with PS201 and IO208.
Type 2
1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
Run
Error

SIPROTEC
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
2.5
Type 3
1/2, 13 BI, 21 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
Run
Error

SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[

expansion module IO206.
2.6
Type 4
1/2, 19 BI, 30 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
2.7

2.8

2.9
Type 5
3.4
SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
Run
Error
SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[

3.1
3.3
Error

21 binary inputs, 17 binary outputs (1 lifecontact, 6 standard, 6 fast,
4 power), 16 LEDs, 4 current transformers, 4 voltage transformers
2.10
3.2
1/2, 21 BI, 17 BO (4P), 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
Run
Type 6
1/2, 15 BI, 18 BO (4HS), 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V

4 high-speed), 16 LEDs, 4 current transformers, 4 voltage transformers
3.5
3.6
3.7
Run
Error
SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
Line Protection
Standard variants
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7SA86, 7SD86, 7SL86, 7SA87, 7SD87, 7SL87, 7VK87
Type 7
1/2, 15 BI, 20 BO, 16 LED, 8 I, 8 V
1
s
Run
Error

/LQH
1.1
SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
1.2
1.3

Type 8
2/3, 31 BI, 46 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
1.4
s
Run
Error

SIPROTEC
/LQH
SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC
1.5

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
1.6
1.7

expansion modules IO205, IO205.
Type 9
2/3, 29 BI, 23 BO (4P), 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
1.8
s
Run
Error

8 power), 16 LEDs, 4 current transformers, 4 voltage transformers
SIPROTEC
/LQH
SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC
1.9

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[

Type 10
2/3, 27 BI, 34 BO (4HS), 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
2.1
s
Run
Error

SIPROTEC
/LQH
SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC
2.2

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
2.3
2.4

Type 11
2/3, 27 BI, 36 BO, 16 LED, 8 I, 8 V
Run
Error

SIPROTEC
/LQH
SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
2.5

Type 12
5/6, 27 BI, 33 BO (8HS), 16 LED, 8 I, 8 V
Run
Error

SIPROTEC
/LQH
SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
2.6

expansion modules IO208, IO209, IO209.
2.7
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7SJ86

Type 1
1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
2.8
Run
Error

SIPROTEC
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
2.9
2.10

Type 2
1/2, 17 BI, 16 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
Run
Error

SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC
/LQH
[[[
[[[
[[[
3.1
3.2

expansion modules IO206.
Type 3
1/2, 23 BI, 25 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V

expansion modules IO205.
The technical data for the line protection devices can be found in the line protection device manuals.

[[[
Run
Error
SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC
/LQH
3.3

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Line Protection
Notes
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Transformer Differential Protection

Transformer Differential Protection SIPROTEC 7UT8

Overview
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
SIPROTEC 7UT8 transformer differential protection
Denition of device types based on designation
SIPROTEC 5 transformer differential protection is part of the

modular system of SIPROTEC 5. It supports all SIPROTEC 5 system
features, and can be used individually as well as universally in
the framework of system solutions. In the following, the specic
properties of the SIPROTEC 5 transformer differential protection
is described.

7 XX
SIPROTEC 5 transformer protection devices are multifunctional

devices whose main protection functions are based on the
differential protection principle. They protect different types
of transformers, such as two-winding, three-winding and
multi-winding transformers with different numbers of
measuring points and, besides standard power transformers,
also autotransformers. The devices can be used in all voltage
levels. The great number of protection and automatic functions
permits use in all elds of electric power supply.
Fig. 2.6 / 1
YY
The devices also contain important additional functions that

functions for protection, control, measurement and monitoring.
The large number of communication interfaces and
communication protocols satises the requirements of
communication-based selective protection, as well as an
automated operation.
UT
82
Two winding transformer (2 sides and max. 2

measuring points))
UT
85
Two winding transformer differential protection

(2 sides and max. 4 measuring points)
UT
86
Three winding transformer differential protection

(3 sides and max. 5 measuring points)
UT
87
Multiple winding transformer differential protection (5 sides and max. 7 measuring points)
Table 2.6 / 1

The extensive SIPROTEC function library is also available in the
transformer differential protection devices. Thus, numerous
protection functions such as overcurrent protection, overvoltage
protection or frequency protection are available. These
functions are truly the same for all devices. Once established,
congurations can be transferred from device to device. This
results in substantially reduced engineering effort.

functions. Because of a modular structure design, the
SIPROTEC 5 transformer differential protection can always be
exibly adapted to specic requirements.
For devices with exible congurability of the hardware quantity
structure, you can select various standard variants when
ordering. The device can be adapted by additional expansion
modules individually to your specic applications.
In this catalog you will nd predened templates for standard

applications. These templates are adapted to the basic transformer types and the typical scope of protection functions.
They already contain basic congurations, required functions
and default settings for standard applications.
2.6
2.7
2.8
*HQHUDWLRQ
2.9
6-
87
2.10
6.
7UDQVPLVVLRQ
'LVWULEXWLRQ
.(
0'
6/
6$
66
6$
6/
0'
6$
6'
6-
6$
6$
6-
6-
.(
6'
.(
6-
66
6-
6'
6-
6'
6.
3.1
0'
6-
9.
87
.(
6-
6/
87
6'
6.
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Fig. 2.6 / 2
Anwendungsbereiche_7UT8

Properties
Properties SIPROTEC 7UT82
Main function
1 differential protection (standard- or autotransformer) with add-on stabilizations; Up

to 2 differential ground-fault protection
Measuring points
2 three-pole current measuring points 2

one-pole current measuring points
Inputs and outputs
1 predened standard variant with 8 current

transformers, 7 binary inputs, 7 binary
outputs
Hardware exibility
Housing width
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
The 1/3 base module is available with

IO103, it is not possible to add 1/6 expansion modules, available with large and small
dis-play
1.6
1.7
1/3 19
1.8
The transformer differential protection SIPROTEC 7UT82 is a
universal protection, control and automation device on the
basis of the SIPROTEC 5 system. It is especially designed for the
protection of two winding transformers. It is the main protection
for the transformer and contains many other protection and
monitoring functions. The additional protection functions can
also be used as backup protection for protected downstream
objects (e.g. cables, line).
enables future oriented system solutions with high investment
Functions
device.
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
Fig. 2.6 / 3
Transformer differential protection SIPROTEC 7UT82

(1/3 device = standard variant W1)
2.4
chain topology
Transformer protection for two-winding transformers with

versatile additional protection functions
Transformer differential protection for single-core phase-shift

transformers

Whitepaper
Universal usability of the admissible measuring points
Usable from medium up to extra-high voltage
Protection of standard power transformers and autotransformers
neutral through a separate ground-fault differential protection
Applications
Flexible adaptation to the transformer vector group

applications. They comprise all basic congurations and
default settings. You can use them directly or as a template
for application-specic adaptations. Versatile applications are
possible due to the available measuring points.
Please, congure the application with DIGSI rst before you
order a device. Table 2.6 / 2 shows the functional scope of the
device. You ascertain the function point requirement about the
congurator.
Safe behavior in the case of current transformer saturation

with different degrees of saturation
Adaptive adjustment of the trip characteristic to the transformer tapping
Arc protection
Chart)
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
Increased sensitivity in the case of ground faults close to
Consideration of inrush and over excitation processes
2.3
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Applications
1
1.1
1.2
Two winding basic (Fig. 2.6 / 4)
Fig. 2.6 / 4 shows the typical structure of an application

template, the used measuring points, the used function groups,
the internal circuiting and the predened functions. The twowinding transformer with differential ground-fault protection
was selected as an example.
Differential protection (default setting for Yd),

Overload protection, backup protection for the
downstreamed power system
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
$4$
03
,SK
2.1
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
,SK
,SK
Ctrl
49
2.2
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
2.3
&%
2.4
03
,SK
2.5
2.6
)* 7UDQVIRUPHU
,SK
,SK
50
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
%LQDU\LQSXW
%LQDU\RXWSXW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
&RQWURO
&%

2YHUORDGSURWHFWLRQ
2.7
2.8
Fig. 2.6 / 4
Ctrl
87
51
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
%4$
)*
03
%,
%2
4$ &%
&WUO
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
%,
%2
Application example: Protection of a two-winding transformer
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
%,
%2
Visio-Two_Wind_temp-01-us.pdf

Applications
Two winding basic with REF (restricted earth fault) (Fig. 2.6 / 5)
1.1
Differential ground-fault protection on the star side

1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
$4$
,SK
,SK
49
87N
50BF
2.1
Ctrl
2.2
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
03
,SK
&%
%,
%2
)* 7UDQVIRUPHU
,SK
50N
51N
,SK
)*
03
%,
%2
4$ &%
&WUO
,SK
51
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
%LQDU\LQSXW
%LQDU\RXWSXW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
&RQWURO
50BF
Ctrl
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
%4$
2.4
2.5
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
50
2.3
87
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
03
,SK
03
,SK
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
&%

%)

11

1
2YHUORDGSURWHFWLRQ
%,
%2
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
Fig. 2.6 / 5
Application example: Two-winding transformer basic with REF
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Two winding transformer (87T, 50BF,
87N)
Two winding transformer 1,5CB (87T,

50BF, 87N)
Two winding transformer basic (87T)
1.1
ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available
1.2
37
38
46
46
49
49H
50/51 TD
50N/ 51N TD
50HS
Undercurrent
Lockout
Transformer differential protection for phase angle regulating transformer
(single core)
Differential protection (Node protection for Autotransformer)
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
Function points
I<
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
50N/ 51N TD
50Ns/ 51Ns
50BF
50RS
74TC
86
87T
87T
87T Node
87N T
87M
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
I2>
I2 t>
, It
h, It
I>
IN>
I>>>
SOTF
IN>
INs>
CBFP
CBRS
TCS
I
I
I Node
IN
I
30
Ix, It, 2P
Table 2.6 / 2
SIPROTEC 7UT85 Functions and application templates
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Properties
Main function
1 differential protection (standard- or

autotransformer) with add-on stabilizations;
Up to 2 differential ground-fault protection
Useful measuring point
4 three-pole current measuring points

3 one-pole current measuring points
2 three-pole voltage measuring points
Inputs and outputs
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4

Hardware exibility
Flexible adaptable and expandable I/Oquantity structure within the scope of the
modular SIPROTEC 5 building blocks
Housing width
1/3 19 to 2/1 19
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9

universal protection, control and automation device on the
basis of the SIPROTEC 5 system. It is especially designed for the
protection of two-winding transformers.
2
2.1
It is the main protection for the transformer and contains many

other protection and monitoring functions. The additional
protection functions can also be used as backup protection for
protected downstream objects (e.g. cables, line). The modular
expansion capabilities of the hardware support you here.
Fig. 2.6 / 3

enables future-oriented system solutions with high investment

Functions
device.
Transformer protection for two-winding transformers with
versatile additional protection functions; expandable to 3
windings
2.2
(1/3 device = standard variant O1)
2.3
2.4
Further current and voltage inputs can be added for standard

protection functions such as overcurrent, voltage, frequency,
etc.
Up to 4 pluggable communication modules usable for different
and redundant protocols (IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103,
IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3 (serial+TCP), Modbus TCP)
2.5
Ethernet redundancy protocols PRP and HSR

whitepaper
Powerful automation with CFC (Continous Function Chart)
2.6

transformers and special transformers
Secure serial protection data communication, also over great

distances and all available physical media (ber-optic cable,
2-wire connections and communication networks)
Measurement of operational values
2.8
Protection of standard power transformers, autotransformers,

and motors
Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) for synchrophasor-measured

2.9
Protection of standard power transformers and

autotransformers
2.10
Additonal functions for simple tests and commissioning.
Typical properties of a transformer differential protection

such as exible adaptation to the transformer vector group,
consideration of inrush and overexcitation processes, safe
behavior in the case of current transformer saturation with
different degrees of saturation
Applications
Adaptive adjustment of the trip characteristic to the

transformer tapping
Arc protection
ANSI 90 V voltage control function for two-winding transformers, three-winding transformers and system coupling
transformers

default settings. You can use them directly or as a template
for application-specic adaptations. Versatile applications are
possible due to the available measuring points.
Please, congure the application with DIGSI rst before you
order a device. Table 2.6 / 3 shows the functional scope of the
device. You ascertain the function point requirement about the
congurator.
2.7
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Applications
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Two winding basic (Fig. 2.6 / 4)
Two winding in breaker-and-a-half application (Fig. 2.6 / 6)


Two winding basic with REF (restricted earth fault) (Fig. 2.6 / 5)
Fig. 2.6 / 4 shows the typical structure of an application

template, the used measuring points, the used function groups,
the internal circuiting and the predened functions. The twowinding transformer with differential ground-fault protection
was selected as an example.

1.7
1.8
1.9
$4$
03
,SK
2.1
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
,SK
,SK
Ctrl
49
2.2
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
2.3
&%
2.4
03
,SK
2.5
2.6
)* 7UDQVIRUPHU
,SK
,SK
50
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
%LQDU\LQSXW
%LQDU\RXWSXW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
&RQWURO
&%

2YHUORDGSURWHFWLRQ
2.7
2.8
Fig. 2.6 / 4
Ctrl
87
51
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
%4$
)*
03
%,
%2
4$ &%
&WUO
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
%,
%2
Application example: Protection of a two-winding transformer
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
%,
%2

Applications
1
1.1
$4$
1.2
03
,SK
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
,SK
,SK
49
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
03
,SK
1.4
Ctrl
87N
&%
1.3
50BF
1.5
%,
%2
1.6
1.7
)* 7UDQVIRUPHU
1.8
,SK
50N
51N
1.9
87
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
2
2.1
,SK
,SK
50
Fig. 2.6 / 5
51
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
%LQDU\LQSXW
%LQDU\RXWSXW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
&RQWURO
50BF
Ctrl
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
%4$
)*
03
%,
%2
4$ &%
&WUO
&%

%)

11

1
2YHUORDGSURWHFWLRQ
%,
%2
03
,SK
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Application example: Two-winding transformer basic with REF
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Applications
1
1.1
1.2

%4$
$4$
1.3
03
,SK
03
,SK
1.4
1.5
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
,SK
,SK
49
50BF
Ctrl
87N
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
&%
%,
%2
1.6
)* 7UDQVIRUPHU
,SK
03
,SK
1.8
1.9
,SK
50N
87
51N
50BF
Ctrl
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
&%
2
2.1
03
,SK
2.2
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
&4$
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU&4$
,SK
,SK
50
2.3
51
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
2.5
Fig. 2.6 / 6
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
%LQDU\LQSXW
%LQDU\RXWSXW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
&RQWURO
50BF
Ctrl
&%
2.4
)*
03
%,
%2
4$ &%
&WUO

%)

11

1
%,
%2
2YHUORDGSURWHFWLRQ
Application example: Two-winding transformer in breaker-and-a-half layout
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
%,
%2
1.7

21/21N
24
25
27
27
27
32, 37
37
38
46
46
47
49
49H
50/51 TD
50N/ 51N TD
50HS
50N/ 51N TD
50Ns/ 51Ns
50BF
50RS
51V
59
59
59N
67
67N
67Ns
68
74TC
79
81O
81U
81R
86
87T
87T
87T
87T Node
87N T
87M
90V
90V
90V
FL
PMU
Undercurrent
Sensitive ground-current protection for systems with resonant
or isolated neutral
Dir. sensitive ground-fault detection for systems with resonant or isolated neutral incl. a) V0>, b) Cos-/SinPhi,
c) Transient fct., d) Phi(V,I), e) Admittanz
Lockout
Transformer differential protection for phase angle regulating
transformer (single core)
Transformer differential protection for special transformers
Differential protection (Node protection for Autotransformer)
Synchrophasor measurement (1 PMU can be used for max.
8 voltages and 8 currents)
Two winding
transformer (87T,
50BF, 87N, 90V)
Motor DIFF (87M,

50BF, 27, 81, 46,
49)
Two winding
transformer
basic (87T)
Abbr.
I/O
Z<, V/ (V,I)
V/f
Sync
V<
V1<
Vx<
P<>, Q<>
I<
Two winding
transformer
1,5CB (87T, 50BF,
87N)
Functions
Distance protection
Two winding
transformer (87T,
50BF, 87N)
ANSI
Available
1.7
1.8
1.9
CBFP
CBRS
t=f(I,V)
V>
V1>
V0>
I>, (V,I)
IN>, (V,I)
1.3
1.6
1.2
1.5
1.1
1.4
I2>
I2 t>
V2>
, It
h, It
I>
IN>
I>>>
SOTF
IN>
INs>
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Z/t
TCS
AR
f>
f<
df/dt
2.6
2.8
I
I
I
I Node
IN
I
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
FL-one
PMU
2.7
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
Abbr.
Table 2.6 / 3
Ix, It, 2P
30
30
2.4
Two winding
transformer (87T,
50BF, 87N, 90V)
Functions
CFC arithmetic
Control
Disconnector
Circuit Breaker
Function points
Motor DIFF (87M,

50BF, 27, 81, 46,
49)
ANSI
Two winding
transformer
basic (87T)
1.3
Two winding
transformer
1,5CB (87T, 50BF,
87N)
1.2
Available
1.1
Two winding
transformer (87T,
50BF, 87N)
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
50
175

Properties
Main protection function 1 differential protection (standard) with

add-on stabilizations;
up to 3 differential ground-fault protection
for autotransformer applications
2 differential protection functions in a function group autotransformer can be used

Inputs and outputs

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Hardware exibility
modular SIPROTEC 5 building blocks
1.8
Housing width
1/2 19 bis 2/1 19
1.9

universal protection, control and automation device on the basis
of the SIPROTEC 5 system. It is especially designed for the protection of three-winding transformers. It is the main protection
for the transformer and contains numerous other protection
and monitoring functions. In addition the protection functions
can also be used as backup protection for following protected
objects (for example cable, line). At this it supports also modular
availablility of the hardware. The device supports all
SIPROTEC 5 system characteristics. It enables future-oriented
system solutions with high investment security and low
operating costs.
Functions
device.
Transformer protection for three-winding transformers with
versatile additional protection functions; expandable to threewinding transformer
and motors
autotransformers
2
2.1
2.2
Fig. 2.6 / 7

(1/2 device = standard variant P1)

transformer tapping
2.3
2.4

etc.
2.5

whitepaper
2.6

Safe serial protection data communication also across large
distances and all available physical media (ber optic,
two-wire connections and communication networks)
2.7
Measurement of operating variables
2.9

Help functions for simple tests and easy commissioning.
2.8
2.10
3
3.1
Arc protection
transformers
3.2

default settings. You can use them directly or as a template for
application-specic adaptations. Versatile applications are
possible due to the available measuring points. Please, congure
the application with DIGSI rst before you order a device. Table
2.6 / 4 shows the functional scope of the device. You ascertain
the function point requirement about the congurator.
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Applications
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
The application templates for 7UT85 are also available in 7UT86.
Three winding in breaker-and-a-half application (Fig. 2.6/8)
In addition, the following templates are available:
Differential protection (default setting for YNdxdy)

Differential ground-fault protection on the neutral side
Three winding basic
Ground current-protection on the neutral side as backup

protection for power systems
Differential protection (default setting for Ydxdy)
Overload protection
Autotransformer with delta winding
1.5
Differential protection for complete transformer

(auto transformer + delta winding)
1.6
Differential ground-fault protection (neutral point +

max. side current)
1.7

1.8
Frequency and voltage protection on the star winding side

The application example (Fig. 2.6 / 8) is the template for the
protection of a three-winding transformer in a breaker-and-a-half
layout. You can see the necessary three function groups for the
transformer side, the integration of the ground-fault differential
protection and the internal wiring and selected functions.
A voltage transformer is installed on the high voltage in
addition. For example, voltage and frequency limits can be
monitored here. The necessary protection settings have to be
made specically for the system.
1.9
2
2.1
2.2

%4$
2.3

$4$
03
,SK
2.4
03
,SK
03
9SK
2.5
03
,SK
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
,SK
49
87NT
,SK
9SK 59 81
50BF
Ctrl
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
&%
,SK
,SK
50N
51N
50BF
Ctrl
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
2.6
03
,SK
2.7
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
&%
)* 7UDQVIRUPHU
,SK
%,
%2
,SK
50BF
Ctrl
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
87T
&%
2.9
2.10
03
,SK
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
,SK
%,
%2
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU'4$
,SK
50BF
Ctrl

'4$
3.1

&4$
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
3.2
)*
03
%,
%2
4$ &%
&WUO
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Fig. 2.6 / 8
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
%LQDU\LQSXW
%LQDU\RXWSXW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
&RQWURO

%)
1

7
17
2YHUORDGSURWHFWLRQ
)UHTXHQF\SURWHFWLRQ
7UDQVIRUPHUGLIIHUHQWLDOSURWHFWLRQ
*URXQGIDXOWGLIIHUHQWLDOSURWHFWLRQWUDQVIRUPHU
Application example: Protection of a three-winding transformer in breaker-and-a-half layout
&%
%,
%2
Visio-Kat-three-wind-us.pdf
2.8
3.7
%,
%2

21/21N
24
25
27
27
Undervoltage protection, positive-sequence
system
27
32, 37
37
Undercurrent
38
46
47
Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence
system
49
49H
50/51 TD
50HS
50BF
50RS
51V
Vx<
P<>, Q<>
I<
Autotransformer 1,5CB
(two 87T, 50BF, 59, 27, 81)
Three winding transformer (87T, 50BF, 87N, 21)
Motor DIFF (87M, 50BF,

27, 81, 46, 49)
Two winding transformer

1,5CB (87T, 50BF, 87N)

(87T, 50BF, 87N)
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.1
2.2
I>
IN>
I>>>
SOTF
IN>
INs>
CBFP
CBRS
t=f(I,V)

Overvoltage protection, positive-sequence
system
Dir. sensitive ground-fault detection for
systems with resonant or isolated neutral incl.
a) V0>, b) Cos-/SinPhi, c) Transient fct., d)
Phi(V,I), e) Admittanz
V>
V1>
V0>
I>, (V,I)
IN>, (V,I)
Z/t
TCS
AR
81O
f>
81U
81R
86
87T
87T
Lockout
Transformer differential protection for phase
angle regulating transformer (single core)
transformers
f<
df/dt
87T
1.1
1.6
, It
h, It
68
74TC
79

basic (87T)
59N
67
67N
67Ns
I2 t>
V2>
59
59
Autotransformer (87T,
87N, 50BF)
Three winding transformer 1,5CB (87T, 50BF,

87N)
Abbr.
I/O
Z<, V/ (V,I)
V/f
Sync
V<
V1<
Three winding transformer basic (87T)
Functions
Distance protection

(87T, 50BF, 87N, 90V)
ANSI
Available
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2
3.1
3.2
I
I
3.4
3.5
3.3
3.6
3.7

1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
87N T
87M
90V
90V
90V
FL
PMU
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
IN
I
Table 2.6 / 4
Autotransformer 1,5CB
(two 87T, 50BF, 59, 27, 81)
Three winding transformer (87T, 50BF, 87N, 21)
Motor DIFF (87M, 50BF,

27, 81, 46, 49)

1,5CB (87T, 50BF, 87N)
Abbr.
I Node
FL-one
PMU
Ix, It, 2P
30
30
30
150
75
170
Function points
0
50
2.7
2.8
Functions
Autotransformer)
Automatic voltage control for 2 winding
transformer
Automatic voltage control for 3 winding
transformer
Automatic voltage control for grid coupling
transformer
Synchrophasor measurement (1 PMU can be
used for max. 8 voltages and 8 currents)
Arc-protection (only with plug-in module
ARC-CD-3FO)
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector

(87T, 50BF, 87N)
ANSI
87T Node

basic (87T)
1.5
Three winding transformer 1,5CB (87T, 50BF,

87N)
1.4
Available
1.3
Three winding transformer basic (87T)
1.2

(87T, 50BF, 87N, 90V)
1.1
Autotransformer (87T,
87N, 50BF)
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
50

Properties
Main function
Inputs and outputs
Hardware exibility
Housing width
Up to 2 differential protection with add-on

stabilizations (in different function group
transformer);
Up to 5 differential ground-fault protection
functions
For autotransformer applications two
differential protection functions in a function group autotransformer can be used.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4

1.5
1.6

1.7
1.8
modular SIPROTEC 5-building blocks
1.9
2/3 19 bis 2/1 19
The transformer protection device SIPROTEC 7UT87 is an

universal protection, control and automation device on the basis
of the SIPROTEC 5 system. It is especially designed for protection
of multiple winding transformers (up to 5 sides). Furthermore, it
is to be used where numerous measuring points (up to 7 3-pole
current measuring points) are required. Another application is
simultaneous protection of two parallel transformers (additional
fast backup protection).
The SIPROTEC 7UT87 is the main protection for the transformer
and includes numerous other protection and monitoring functions. In addition to the protection functions it can also be used
as backup protection for the following protected objects (for
example cable, line). It also supports modular availability of the
hardware and all SIPROTEC 5 system characteristics. It enables
future-oriented system solutions with high investment security
and low operating costs.
Functions
Two transformer function groups can be used in SIPROTEC
7UT87. All functions can be congured freely with DIGSI 5.
For the application of some of the functions, you require the
appropriate number of free function points within the device.
The function point calculator in the online congurator provides
support in determining the required number of function points
for your device.
Transformer protection for multiple winding transformers
with multifunctional, additional protection functions
(Multiple winding transfomer are typical with power
converter applications (e.g. HVDC))
2
2.1
2.2
Fig. 2.6 / 9

(2/3 device = standard variant Q1)

autotransformers
2.3
2.4
2.5
Arc protection
transformers
transformer tapping
etc.
IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3 (serial+TCP), Modbus RTU Slave)
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10


whitepaper
3.1
Transformer protection applications with up to 7

3-pole current measuring points
3.2
Concurrent differential protection for two parallel

transformers (e.g. two two-winding transformers)
Safe serial protection data communication also across large

distances and all available physical media (ber optic,
Measurement of operating variables


and motors
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Help functions for simple tests and easy commissioning.
3.7

Applications
1.1
All application templates which are described for the devices

SIPROTEC 7UT85 and 7UT86 can be used in SIPROTEC 7UT87.
1.2
In addition, the following template is available:
1.3
Autotransformer with delta winding

in breaker-and-a-half application (Fig. 2.6 / 10)
1.4
Differential protection for complete transformer

(autotransformer + delta winding)
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
The application example (Fig. 2.6 / 10) is the template for the
protection of an autotransformer which is connected to a
breaker-and-a-half layout. The special feature of this application
is that the neutral-end currents can be detected directly per
phase. A separate node point differential protection over the
autotransformer winding detects safely ground faults and interturn faults. The classical differential protection is arranged over
the entire transformer (autotransformer and delta winding).
Both functions run in the function group autotransformer.
This design provides a redundant differential protection which
is supplementary with regard to sensitivity. A separate groundfault differential protection is not required.
Node protection for autotransformer winding to the capture

of ground faults (three-phase capture of the neutral-point
current)
A voltage transformer is installed on the high voltage in

addition. For example, voltage and frequency limits can be
monitored here. The necessary protection settings have to be
made specically for the system.
Overload protection, backup protection for the downstreamed

power system
Frequency and voltage protection on the upper voltage side.
2
2.1

%4$
2.2

$4$
2.3
03
,SK
2.4
03
,SK
03
9SK
,SK
,SK
49
9SK
Ctrl
59 81
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
&%
)* 7UDQVIRUPHU
2.5
03
,SK
50BF
,SK
87T
%,
%2
,SK
50BF
Ctrl
87TNode
50
&%
51
%,
%2
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
,SK
2.6
03
,SK
2.7
$XWRWUDQVIRUPHU
)* FRPSHQVDWLRQVLGH
Ctrl
,SK
50
2.8
&%
51
%,
%2
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV

'4$
,SK
2.10
03
,SK
$XWRWUDQVIRUPHUJURXQG
)* VLGH
3.1
)*
03
%,
%2
4$ &%
&WUO
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Fig. 2.6 / 10
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
%LQDU\LQSXW
%LQDU\RXWSXW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
&RQWURO
Ctrl
,SK
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
3.2
50BF

%)

7
71RGH
&WUO
&%
%,
%2
Visio-Autotrans-us.pdf

&4$
2.9
3.7
50BF
2YHUORDGSURWHFWLRQ
)UHTXHQF\SURWHFWLRQ
'LIIHUHQWLDOSURWHFWLRQDXWRWUDQVIRUPHU
&RQWURO
Application example: Protection of an autotransformer with delta winding (compensation side) in breaker-and-a-half layout

Applications
Example 1:
Since SIPROTEC 7UT87 is designed for special applications, you

have to create your own application template for your specic
application. Save it together with your device. To make your
work easier, you can use an existing template and modify it.
This example requires numerous three-phase current measuring

points for a complex use in the eld of power plant.
Fig. 2.6 / 11 shows a possible conguration.
The following examples shall help you:
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5

$4$
03
,SK
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
03
,SK
03
9SK
1.6
,SK
9SK
27
49
32
59
50
59N
51
87N
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
81
1.7
)* 7UDQVIRUPHU
,SK
Ctrl
1.9
87T
&%
03
,SK
,SK
51N
03
,SK
03
,SK
03
,SK
03
,SK
,SK
,SK

&4$
'4$

%,
%2
2.5
51
50BF
Ctrl
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
&%
%,
%2
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU(4$
,SK
,SK
51
2.6
50BF
Ctrl
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
(4$
2.4
Ctrl
,SK
)* 9,VWDQGDUG
&%

&%
Fig. 2.6 / 11
2.8
2.9
50BF
Ctrl
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
%LQDU\LQSXW
%LQDU\RXWSXW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
&RQWURO
2.7
%,
%2
)* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU)4$
,SK
)*
03
%,
%2
4$ &%
&WUO
2.3
50BF
&%
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
50
)4$
51
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
50
2.2
%,
%2
,SK
50
2.1
Ctrl
&%
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
50BF
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
03
,SK
%,
%2
,SK
50N
1.8
50BF

%)

11

1

7
1
3RZHUSURWHFWLRQ
2YHUORDGSURWHFWLRQ
2YHUYROWDJHSURWHFWLRQZLWK]HURVHTXHQFHYROWDJHUHVLGXDOYROWDJH
)UHTXHQF\SURWHFWLRQ
Possible SIPROTEC 7UT87 application in a power station (up to seven 3-pole current measuring point)
%,
%2
Visio-7Messstellen-us.pdf

%4$
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Applications
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
Example 2:
Another example (Fig. 2.6 / 12) is a powerful functional redundancy with parallel transformers. This doubles the differential
protection function. One protection device is provided per
transformer. Two differential protection functions run in every
protection device. The 2nd differential protection function is the
backup protection for the parallel transformer.
For example, start here with an application template of the twowinding transformer and duplicate it.
An alternative cost-optimized variant is the use of one device to
protect both transformers.
1.4
1.5
$4$
1.6
03
,SK
1.7
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
)* 7UDQVIRUPHU
,SK
,SK
50BF
Ctrl
1.8
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
87T
&%
1.9
2
03
,SK
2.1
2.2
%,
%2
,SK
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
7UDQVIRUPHU
2.3
2.4
03
,SK
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
,SK
,SK
50BF
Ctrl
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
%4$
2.5
&%
%,
%2
&4$
03
,SK
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
)* 7UDQVIRUPHU
,SK
,SK
50BF
Ctrl
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
87T
&%
2.6
2.7
03
,SK
2.8
%,
%2
,SK
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
2.9
7UDQVIRUPHU
2.10
03
,SK
3.1
,SK
,SK
50BF
Ctrl
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
3.2
'4$
3.3
)*
03
%,
%2
4$ &%
&WUO
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
Fig. 2.6 / 12
&%
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
%LQDU\LQSXW
%LQDU\RXWSXW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
&RQWURO
%)
7
Protection of two parallel transformers with one SIPROTEC 7UT87
%,
%2
Visio-2-transformer-us.pdf

Applications
Example 3:
The last example (Fig. 2.6 / 13) shows the protection of a

converter transformer. Four sides and six measuring points are
required here.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
,QIHHG
6

$4$
1.7
'&&219(57(5
6
)LOWHU
1.6
6
1.8
6
1.9

03
,SK
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
,SK
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
2.1

03
,SK
2.2
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
,SK
2.3
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
2.4
03
,SK
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
)* 7UDQVIRUPHU
,SK
,SK
50BF
Ctrl
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
87T

&%
%,
%2
)LOWHU
03
,SK
03
,SK
)*
03
%,
%2
4$ &%
&WUO
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
%LQDU\LQSXW
%LQDU\RXWSXW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
&RQWURO
2.5
)* 7UDQVIRUPHUVLGH
,SK
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
%)
7
Visio-Umrichter-trans-us.pdf
03
,SK
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
Fig. 2.6 / 13
Protection of a converter transformer
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

I2>
I2 t>
V2>
49
49H

Undervoltage protection, positive-sequence
system
Undercurrent
Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence
system
, It
h, It
50/51 TD
I>
IN>
I>>>
SOTF
IN>
INs>
CBFP
CBRS
t=f(I,V)

Overvoltage protection, positive-sequence
system
Dir. sensitive ground-fault detection for systems
with resonant or isolated neutral incl. a) V0>,
b) Cos-/SinPhi, c) Transient fct., d) Phi(V,I), e)
Admittanz
V>
V1>
V0>
I>, (V,I)
IN>, (V,I)
Z/t
TCS

Lockout
angle regulating transformer (single core)
AR
f>
f<
df/dt
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
27
32, 37
37
38
46
46
47

50HS
50Ns/ 51Ns Sensitive ground-current protection for systems
with resonant or isolated neutral
50BF
50RS
51V
59
59
59N
67
67N
67Ns
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
68
74TC
79
81O
81U
81R
86
87T
87T
V<
V1<
Vx<
P<>, Q<>
I/ (V,I)
V/f
Sync

1,5CB (87T, 50BF, 87N)
1.8
1.7
ANSI

(87T, 50BF, 87N)
21/21N
Functions
Distance protection
1.6

basic (87T)
1.5
Autotransformer (87T, 87N,

50BF)
1.4
Available
1.3

1,5CB (87T, 50BF, 87N)
1.2

basic (87T)
1.1
Autotransformer 1,5CB (two

87T, 50BF, 59, 27, 81)

87T
87T Node
87N T
87M
90V
90V
90V
FL
PMU
Table 2.6 / 5

(87T, 50BF, 87N, 21)

(87T, 50BF, 87N, 90V)
Motor DIFF (87M, 50BF, 27,

81, 46, 49)

1,5CB (87T, 50BF, 87N)

(87T, 50BF, 87N)

basic (87T)
Functions
Abbr.

I
angle regulating transformer (two core)

I
transformers

I Node
Autotransformer)

IN

I
Automatic voltage control for grid coupling

transformer
FL-one
PMU
Synchrophasor measurement (1 PMU can be
used for max. 8 voltages and 8 currents)
Arc-protection (only with plug-in module ARCCD-3FO)
Ix, It, 2P
CFC arithmetic

2
Control

3
4
3
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
0
50
30
Function points
Autotransformer 1,5CB (two

87T, 50BF, 59, 27, 81)
Autotransformer (87T, 87N,

50BF)

1,5CB (87T, 50BF, 87N)

basic (87T)
ANSI
87T
Available
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
75
30
30
175
150
2.8
50
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Standard variants
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7UT82

W1
1.1
O1
1/3, 7BI, 7BO, 8I

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
Run
Error
SIPROTEC

7 binary inputs, 7 binary outputs (1 life contact, 2 standard, 4 fast),
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
1.7
O2
1/2, 19 BI, 23 BO, 8I
Run
Error
SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC

1.9
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[

2.1
2.2
SIPROTEC
/LQH
1.6
1.8
Error
1.3
1.5
Run

7 binary inputs, 7 binary outputs (1 life contact, 7 standard),
1.2
1.4
1/3, 7BE, 7BA, 8I

P1
2.3
1/2, 11 BI, 18 BO, 12I, 4U
Run
Error

12 current transformer inputs, 4 voltage transformer inputs
2.4
SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[

P2
2/3, 23 BI, 34 BO, 12I, 4U
Run
Error

2.5
SIPROTEC
/LQH
SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[


Q1
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
2/3, 15 BI, 22 BO, 20I, 4U
Error
SIPROTEC
/LQH
SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[

expansion modules IO208 und IO203.
Q2
5/6, 27 BI, 38 BO, 20I, 4 U

expansion modules IO208, IO203 und IO205.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Run

The technical data for the transformer differential protection devices can be found in the device manual
3.7
Run
Error
SIPROTEC
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC
Motor Protection
SIPROTEC 7SK82, 7SK85

Description
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
Motor protection devices SIPROTEC 7SK82, 7SK85
Features
SIPROTEC 5 motor protection devices are part of the modular

system of SIPROTEC 5. They support all SIPROTEC 5 system
features and can be used individually as well as universally in the
framework of system solutions. This catalog describes specic
features of the SIPROTEC 5 motor protection devices.
The two device types SIPROTEC 7SK82 and SIPROTEC 7SK85 offer
different hardware conguration options.
SIPROTEC 5 motor protection devices are multifunctional devices

and their main protection functions are based on specic motor
protection functions and overcurrent protection functions. They
protect low to medium power asynchronous motors.
The devices also contain all important additional functions that
functions for protection, control, measurement and monitoring.
A large number of communication interfaces and communication protocols meet the requirements of the communicationbased selective protection, as well as automated operation.
functions. Due to a modular design, the SIPROTEC 5 devices can
always be exibly adapted to specic requirements.

7SK82
Various hardware congurations are available for binary

inputs and outputs within the 1/3 base module.
7SK85
Hardware conguration can be exibly expanded and congured for analog inputs, binary inputs and outputs, measuring transducers and communication using 1/6 expansion
modules.
Table 2.7/ 1
Overview of the different distinguishing features

The tables on the following pages list the available functions
from the library for every device type. Predened templates are
available in DIGSI for the standard applications. These templates
already contain basic congurations, required functions and
default settings.
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
6-
6/
6$
66
.(
6'
.(
0'
6-
9.
87
2.6
6.
2.7
2.8
.(
0'
6$
6$
6-
0'
6$
6'
6-
6-
66
6-
6'
6-
6'
6.
87
.(
6-
6/
87
6'
6.
6$
6-
2.9
3.1
3.2
*
3.3
3.4
Fig. 2.7 / 1
Application areas of the SIPROTEC 5 devices
3.5
3.6
3.7
Visio-Anwendungsbereiche_SIP5-us
2.10
Motor Protection SIPROTEC 7SK82

Properties
Properties SIPROTEC 7SK82
Inputs and outputs
9 or 16 binary outputs.
Hardware exibility
Various hardware congurations are available

for binary inputs and outputs in the
1/6 expansion modules, available with large and
small display
Housing width
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1/3 19 inch
The motor protection device SIPROTEC 7SK82 is part of the new

protection of low to medium power motor application areas.
tool, the SIPROTEC 7SK82 ts perfectly for protection, control,
systems.
7SK82_Rueckansicht_de_en.psd
Motor protection for small to

medium size motors (100 kW to 2 MW)
7SK82KDW3EN.psd
Main function
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
Functions
device.
Fig. 2.7 / 2
Motor protection SIPROTEC 7SK82 Front and rear view

Stator and bearing temperature monitoring via a temperature

sensors with an external RTD-box
Directional and non-directional time-overcurrent protection

(short circuit protection) with additional functions
Detection of ground faults in systems with isolated or resonant
neutral
protection
Powerful automation with graphical CFC

(Continuous Function Chart)
Integrated electrical Ethernet port J for DIGSI
Single line presentation on a small or large display
Complete IEC 61850 (reporting and GOOSE) via
integrated port J
Two optional pluggable communication modules usable
for different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850,
IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3 (serial+TCP),
Modbus TCP)
whitepaper
2.5
Table 2.7 / 2 shows all available functions for SIPROTEC 7SK82.

Applications
The motor protection device 7SK82 is a universal protection,
control and automation device based on the SIPROTEC 5 system.
It is specically designed for the protection of low to medium
power motors.
Typical motor protection applications include:
Protection against thermal overload of the stator due to
overcurrent, cooling problems or dirt
Protection against thermal overload of the rotor during starting
due to frequent start-ups, prolonged start-ups or a locked
rotor.
Arc protection
2.4
Motor protection functions: starting-time supervision, thermal

overload protection for stator and rotor, restart inhibit, unbalanced load protection, load-jump protection
Ground-fault protection (directional, non-directional) for the

detection of stator ground-faults
2.3
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
Monitoring voltage unbalance or phase failure
Monitoring the thermal state and bearing temperatures by

temperature measuring
3.1
Detection of overstressing of drives running idle for, e.g.,

pumps and compressors
3.2
Detection of motor ground faults
3.3
Motor protection against short circuits
3.4
Protection against instability due to undervoltage.
3.5
3.6
3.7

Applications
1
1.1
1.2
1.3

settings.
Restart inhibit
Load-jam protection
Current measurement

ground
Thermal overload protection for stator and rotor

Temperature supervision
Transformer inrush-current detection
1.4
Starting-time supervision
1.5
Restart inhibit
1.6
Sensitive directional ground-fault detection for systems with

isolated or resonant neutral and for detecting stator ground
faults
Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence system U0
1.7
Load-jam protection
Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence system U1
1.8

ground
Fuse-failure monitor.
1.9
Transformer inrush-current detection.
2
2.1
Current and voltage measurement

2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Applications
Application example SIPROTEC 7SK82
protection of a medium-power motor
are acquired and monitored via an external RTD-box. The RTD-box

is connected to the device via Ethernet or serial communication.
An asynchronous medium-power motor (up to approx. 2 MW)

is protected against thermal and mechanical overloads and
short circuits with the motor protection functions and the timeovercurrent protection of the SIPROTEC 7SK82. The directional
sensitive ground-fault detection and overvoltage protection
with zero-sequence voltage U0 detect stator ground faults in the
motor. The thermal state of the motor and bearing temperatures
of a 7SK82 for this application. The basis is the application template "current and voltage measurement". Additionally, the device
has to be equipped with a plug-in module for communication
with the RTD-box.
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
$4$
1.8
)* 0RWRU
03
9SK
1.9
9SK
67Ns
59N
27
03
9SK
03
,SK
,SK
46
48 49R
49S
50
51 51N
SOTF
66
2.1
2.2
,SK
2.3
Ctrl
38
)* $QDORJ8QLWV
RTD
)*
03
%,
%2
4$ &%
57'
&,
&WUO
&,
RTD
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
%LQDU\LQSXW
%LQDU\RXWSXW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
57'8QLW
&RQWURO

5
6

1
1

1V
627)
&%
2.4
%,
%2
Visio-7SK82-us.pdf
03
,SK
7HPSHUDWXUHPRQLWRULQJ
8QEDODQFHGORDGSURWHFWLRQ
0RWRUVWDUWLQJWLPHVXSHUYLVLRQ
5RWRURYHUORDGSURWHFWLRQ
6WDWRURYHUORDGSURWHFWLRQ
5HVWDUWLQKLELW
'LUHFWLRQDOVHQVLWLYHJURXQGIDXOWGHWHFWLRQ
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
Fig. 2.7 / 3
Application example: Protection of a medium-power motor
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
Available
in 7SK82
Current
measurement
1.1
3-pole
14
I> + n<
24
V/f
1.6
25
Sync
27
V<
1.7
27
V1<
27
Vx<
27Q
>/V<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
46
I2>
2.1
46
I2 t>
46
I2>, (V2,I2)
47
V2>
2.3
48
Istart
49
, It
2.4
49R
50/51 TD
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8
1.9
2.2
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50HS
I>>>
SOTF
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns
INs>
Iie>
50BF
CBFP
50RS
CBRS
50L
Load-jam protection
I>L
51V
t=f(I,V)
59

V>
59
V1>
59N
V0>
66
It
67
I>, (V,I)
67N
IN>, (V,I)
67Ns
Dir. sensitive ground-fault detection for systems with resonant or isolated neutral incl.
a) V0>, b) Cos-/SinPhi, c) Transient fct., d) Phi(V,I), e) Admittanz
Iie dir>
74TC
TCS
79
AR
81O
f>
81U
f<
86
Lockout
FL
FL-one
PMU
PMU
3.4
3.5
3.7
3.6
Current and
voltage meas.

Ix, It, 2P

Current and
voltage meas.
1.6
1.7
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
40
Functions
Abbr.
CFC arithmetic
Control
Function points:
Table 2.7/ 2
1.1
Current
measurement
ANSI
Available
in 7SK82
SIPROTEC 7SK82 Functions and application templates
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Properties
1
1.1
Properties SIPROTEC 7SK85

Main function
Motor protection for all motor sizes
Inputs and outputs

4 current transformers, 4 voltage transformers,
9 to 17 binary outputs.
Hardware exibility
Flexibly adaptable and expandable I/O quantity

structure within the scope of the modular
SIPROTEC 5 building block,
1/6 expansion modules can be added
Available with large or small display or without
display
Housing width
1/3 19 inch to 2/1 19 inch
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
The motor protection device SIPROTEC 7SK85 is part of the new

This device is designed for the protection of all motor sizes. With
its exibility and its high-performance DIGSI 5 engineering tool,
the SIPROTEC 7SK85 ts perfectly for protection, control, monitoring, and measuring applications in electrical energy systems.
2.1
Functions
2.2

device.
2.3
2.4
Motor protection functions: starting-time supervision,

thermal overload protection for stator and rotor, restart inhibit,
unbalanced load protection, load-jump protection
2.5
Stator and bearing temperature monitoring via a temperature

sensors with an external RTD-box
Motor differential protection as fast short-circuit protection for
large-power motors
Ground-fault protection (directional, non-directional) for the
detection of stator ground-faults
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3

Synchrophasor measured values and IEEE C37.118 protocol
integrated (PMU)
Table 2.7 / 3 shows all available functions for SIPROTEC 7SK85.
Detection of ground faults in systems with isolated or resonant

neutral
The motor protection device 7SK85 is a universal protection,

control and automation device on the basis of the SIPROTEC 5
system. It is designed for the protection of all motor sizes.
Overvoltage and undervoltage protection in all required

versions
Typical motor protection applications include:

protection
Protection against thermal overload of the stator due to

overcurrent, cooling problems or dirt
Protection against thermal overload of the rotor during starting

due to frequent start-ups, prolonged start-ups or a locked rotor
Arc protection
Powerful automation with graphical CFC
(Continuous Function Chart)
3.2
IEC 61850 (reporting) via integrated port J
3.3

3.6

Applications
3.5
Motor protection device SIPROTEC 7SK85 (1/3 device with

large graphical display and 1/6 expansion module with key
switch front panel)
Directional and non-directional time-overcurrent protection

(short-circuit protection) with additional functions
3.1
3.4
Fig. 2.7 / 4
Monitoring voltage unbalance or phase failure

Monitoring the thermal state and bearing temperatures by
temperature measuring
Detection of overstressing of drives running idle for e.g.,
pumps and compressors
Detection of motor ground faults
Motor protection against short circuits
Protection against instability due to undervoltage.

whitepaper
3.7

Applications
settings.
Motor differential protection,

1.1
Thermal overload protection for stators and rotors

1.2
Current measurement
Restart inhibit
1.3
1.4
Restart inhibit
Load-jam protection
1.5

ground
1.6
1.7
1.8
Transformer inrush-current detection.

isolated or resonant neutral and for detecting of stator ground
faults
Overvoltage protection with phase-sequence system U0

Load-jam protection
ground
Thermal overload protection for stators and rotors

Restart inhibit
1.9
Undervoltage protection with positive sequence system U1
Measuring voltage failure supervision.
2.1
2.2

2.3
Load-jam protection
2.4

ground
isolated or resonant neutral and for detecting stator ground
faults
Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence system U0
2.5
Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence system U1

Fuse-failure monitor.
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Applications
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Application example SIPROTEC 7SK85

protecting a medium power motor
acquired and monitored via an external RTD-box. The RTD-box is

connected to the device via Ethernet or serial communication.
An asynchronous medium-power motor (up to approx. 2 MW)

is protected against thermal and mechanical overloads as well
as short circuits with the motor protection functions and timeovercurrent protection of the 7SK85. The directional sensitive
ground-fault detection and overvoltage protection with zerosequence voltage U0 detect stator ground faults in the motor.
The thermal state of the motor and bearing temperatures are
of a SIPROTEC 7SK82 for this application. The application
template "current and voltage measurement" is used as a basis.
Additionally, the device has to be equipped with a plug-in
module for communication with the RTD-box.
1.5
1.6
1.7
$4$
1.8
03
9SK
1.9
)* 0RWRU
9SK
67Ns
59N
27
03
9SK
2
2.1
03
,SK
2.2
,SK
46
48 49R
49S
50
51 51N
SOTF
66
,SK
Ctrl
03
,SK
2.4
38
)* $QDORJ8QLWV
2.5
RTD
)*
03
%,
%2
4$ &%
57'
&,
&WUO
2.6
2.7
2.8
&,
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
%LQDU\LQSXW
%LQDU\RXWSXW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
57'8QLW
&RQWURO
RTD

5
6

1
1

1V
627)
%,
%2
7HPSHUDWXUHPRQLWRULQJ
8QEDODQFHGORDGSURWHFWLRQ
0RWRUVWDUWLQJWLPHVXSHUYLVLRQ
5RWRU2YHUORDGSURWHFWLRQ
6WDWRURYHUORDGSURWHFWLRQ
5HVWDUWLQKLELW
'LUHFWLRQDOVHQVLWLYHJURXQGIDXOWGHWHFWLRQ
2.9
Fig. 2.7 / 5
&%
Visio-7SK85-us.pdf
2.3
2.10
Application example: Protection of a medium-power motor
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Abbr.
Current and
voltage measurement
Differential prot. +
cur. & volt. meas.
Functions
Current and
voltage meas.
ANSI
Available in 7SK85
3-pole
I/O
14
I> + n<
24
V/f
25
Sync
27
V<
27
V1<
27
Vx<
27Q
Q>/V<
32, 37
P<>, <>
37
Undercurrent
I<
38
46
I2>
46
I2 t>
46
I2>, (V2,I2)
47
V2>
48
Istart
49
, It
49R
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50HS
I>>>
50N/ 51N TD

IN>
50Ns/ 51Ns
INs>
Iie>
50BF

CBFP
50RS
CBRS
50L
Load-jam protection
I>L
51V
t=f(I,V)
59
V>
59

V1>
59N
V0>
66
It
67
I>, (V,I)
67N
IN>, (V,I)
67Ns
Iie dir>
74TC
TCS
79
AR
81O
f>
81U
f<
86
Lockout
87M
90V
90V
FL
FL-one
PMU
PMU
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
1.1
1.7
SOTF
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

1.4
ANSI
1.5
Functions
Abbr.

1.6
Differential prot. +
cur. & volt. meas.
1.3
Current and
voltage measurement
1.2
Current and
voltage meas.
1.1
Available in 7SK85
Ix, It, 2P
1.7

1.8
CFC arithmetic
Control
2.1
2.2
Circuit Breaker
2.3
Disconnector
2.4
Function points:
40
100
1.9
2
SIPROTEC 5 order con gurator under: www.siemens.com/siprotec
Table 2.7/ 3
SIPROTEC 7SK85 Functions and application templates
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Standard variants
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7SK82
T1
1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I
1.1
Run
Error

11 binary inputs,
SIPROTEC
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
1.2
1.3

T2
1/3, 23 BI, 16 BO, 4 I
1.4
Run
Error

23 binary inputs,
SIPROTEC
/LQH
1.5

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
1.6
1.7
T3
(in preparation)
T4
1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V
1.8
1.9

11 binary inputs,
Run
Error
SIPROTEC
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
2
2.1

T5
2.2
1/3, 23 BI, 16 BO, 4 I, 4 V

s
Run
Error

23 binary inputs,
SIPROTEC
/LQH
2.3

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
2.4
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7SK85

R1
2.5
1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V

s
Run
Error

11 binary inputs,
SIPROTEC
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[

R2
2.6
1/2, 17 BI, 16 BO, 4 I, 4 V

s

17 binary inputs,
Run
Error
SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC
/LQH
2.7

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
2.8
2.9

R3
2.10
1/2, 27 BI, 17 BO, 4 I, 4 V

27 binary inputs,
Run
Error
SIPROTEC
SIPROTEC
/LQH

[[[
[[[
[[[
[[[
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
The technical data can be found in the device manual under

3.6
3.7

Notes
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Busbar Protection
SIPROTEC 7SS85

Description
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Busbar protection SIPROTEC 7SS85

Busbar protection devices SIPROTEC 7SS85 are part of the
modular SIPROTEC 5 series and are based in their main function
on the principle of differential protection. They protect busbars
of the most various types and all voltage levels with the highest
selectivity.
Additional protection and control functions extend the scope of
application to a comprehensive station protection.
Double busbars with/without transfer busbar
1 bus zone
2 bus zones
2 bus zones, disconnector image
4 bus zones
4 bus zones, disconnector image
E2)
Table 2.8 / 1
1.9
Double circuit-breaker arrangement and 1 or 2 current

transformers per feeder
2.2
Functional scope1)

for 4 bus zones, disconnector image
Maximum functional scope of signicant features
Triple busbars
Breaker-and-a-half layout
2.1
Short form
The SIPROTEC 7SS85 is suited for the following system congurations

Single busbars with/without transfer busbar
1.8
You set the maximum functional scopes of your device through

Signicant Features. Each signicant feature is xed by a short
form.
Applications
The busbar protection SIPROTEC 7SS85 encompasses the
following maximum quantity structure
Truck-type switchgear
15 3-phase measuring points (current transformer)
Systems with combined busbars (optionally main/transfer

busbar)
2 3-phase measuring points (voltage transformer)
T circuit arrangements (stub-fault protection)
22 bays (feeders, couplers, bus-section disconnections)
H circuit arrangement with coupler or disconnection
4 bus zones (busbar sections with measuring function)
2.3
Ring busbars
4 couplers (with 1 or 2 current transformers)
2.4
Meshed corners.
2 auxiliary busbars (busbar sections without measuring

function).
1) Up to 15 measuring points and 22 bays

2) In preparation
2.5
7UDQVPLVVLRQ
*HQHUDWLRQ
2.6
'LVWULEXWLRQ
6-
2.7
87
.(
0'
6/
6$
66
6$
6/
0'
6$
6'
6-
6$
6-
6-
2.8
6.
2.9
.(
6'
.(
6-
66
6-
6'
6-
6'
6.
2.10
0'
6-
9.
87
.(
6-
6/
87
6'
6.
6$
3
0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
*
3.5
3.6
3.7
Fig. 2.8 / 1

Properties
Properties
The busbar protection SIPROTEC 7SS85 is a selective, safe, and

fast protection against busbar short circuits in medium-voltage,
high-voltage and very high voltage systems with the most
various busbar congurations.
1.1
1.2
1.3
Selection of the device basis functionalities (signicant features) and the modular hardware structure allow an optimum
adaptation of the SIPROTEC 7SS85 to the most various system
congurations and functional requirements.
1.4
1.5
Characteristics of the SIPROTEC 7SS85
1.6
Phase-selective measurement and display

Selective tripping of faulty busbar sections
1.7
Connector-independent check zone as additional tripping

criterion
1.8
Shortest tripping times (<7ms) for ensuring network

stability and minimization of damage to the system
1.9
Highest stability in case of external faults, also in case of

transformer saturation through stabilization with owing
currents
Operate curve with freely adjustable characteristic-curve

sections
Additional operate curve with increased sensitivity for lowcurrent faults, for example in resistance-grounded networks
Only 2 ms saturation-free time of the current transformer
required through fast recognition of internal and external
faults
Use of closed iron core or linearized current transformer
transformers within one substation possible
Adaptation of different current transformer
ratio per parameterization
Uncomplicated dimensioning of the current transformers
and the stabilization factor
3 interdependent methods of measurement make possible
the shortest tripping times in case of busbar faults and
ensure maximum stability in case of large owing shortcircuit currents
The integrated circuit-breaker failure protection recognizes
circuit-breaker faults in case of busbar short-circuits and
generates a tripping signal for the circuit breaker at the
remote line end. In case of a failure of a coupler circuit
breaker, the adjacent busbar is tripped
Comprehensive monitoring of the current circuits, the
measured-value processing and trip circuits prevent
over-functions and under-functions of the protection
and reduce the effort for routine checks
Various control possibilities, such as bay out of service,
acquisition blocking for disconnectors and circuit
breakers, blocking of protection zones or of the entire
circuit-breaker failure protection, make the adaptation to
operationally-caused special states of your system easier
Optional 1/3- or 3-pole circuit-breaker failure protection with
use of the integrated disconnector image to trip of all
circuit breakers of the concerned busbar section
Optional end-fault protection for the protection of the
area between circuit breaker and current transformer for
feeders and couplers
Direct tripping of protection zones through external signals
2.1
Fig. 2.8 / 2
Busbar protection SIPROTEC 7SS85
2.2
2.3
Release of tripping of a protection zone through additional

external signals
2.4
Release of tripping through additional, external phaseselective signals

Optional voltage- and frequency protection for up to two
3 phase voltage transformers. This can be used to realize
an integrated under voltage release of tripping
Optional time-overcurrent protection phase / earth per
bay (V6)
2.5
Functions
Table 2.8 / 3 shows all functions that are available in
SIPROTEC 7SS85. All functions can be congured freely with
DIGSI 5. To use some of the functions, you require the appropriate number of free function points within the device. The
function-point calculator in the online congurator provides
support in determining the required number of function points
for your device.
During the project engineering with DIGSI 5 you get also the
required function points.
A common function library makes all protection, automation,
monitoring, and auxiliary functions available for the SIPROTEC 5
devices. Thus, the same functions are truly the same for all
devices. Once established, congurations can be transferred
from device to device. This results in substantially reduced
engineering effort. For busbar protection SIPROTEC 7SS85,
additional, specic library elements are provided.
The exibility of the SIPROTEC 7SS85 allows the protection of a
number of possible system constellations. In place of application templates, DIGSI 5 provides a comfortable, fully graphical
interface for complete engineering of your busbar protection.
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Properties
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Signicant features
You select the basic device functionalities with the signicant
features. These are oriented to typical system constellations or
applications.
For the devices SIPROTEC 7SS85, a standard variant (V1, V2, V3)
is associated with each signicant feature. The device can be
adapted to your special application through additional extension modules (see Overview of the standard variants,
page 2.8 / 11).
Table 2.8 / 2 contains the respective basic scope of bays and the
hardware degree of expansion in accordance with the associated standard variant. You need additional function points for
further bays.
The signicant feature E (circuit-breaker failure protection) is
special. The main protection function here is circuit-breaker
failure protection. The device allows the realization of an
independent, complete backup protection in case of the failure
of circuit-breaker failure in the station.
1.6
1.7
Signicant features
Short form
1.8
Main protection function
1.9
Bus zones
Disconnector image
E
Circuit-breaker
failure protection
for busbars
Busbar protection
1
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Measuring points 3-ph (maximum)
15
15
15
15
15
15
2.1
Bays (maximum)
22
22
22
22
22
22
2.2
Associated standard variant
V1
V2
V2
V3
V3
V3
incl. measuring points 3-ph
2.3
Bays (incl.in the basic)
Table 2.8 / 2
Signicant features and standard variants
2.4
System engineering and parameterization
2.5
The single line diagram describes the primary topology of your

system. Add a device SIPROTEC 7SS85 from the DIGSI 5 library
as well as the required function blocks. Connect the primary
elements of the single line diagram (busbars, current transformers, disconnectors, circuit breakers) with the inputs and
outputs of the device. Thus a topological reference is created.
In DIGSI 5 online mode, all important information on commissioning, operation, and analysis are shown in a single line
diagram. In addition to the measured values of the feeders and
of the protection zones, the switch positions are shown.

Additionally, you receive information about special operational
states, for example in Bay out of service or reduced protection
selectivity, for example with direct coupling of busbars via
disconnectors (busbar shunt by disconnectors).
Flexible adaptation to the most various busbar congurations
and simple extensibility is guaranteed by the use of standardized SIPROTEC 5 hardware.
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Properties
Characteristic curves with increased sensitivity
In resistance-grounded networks, single-phase short-circuits
lie in the range of the rated currents. In order to also provide a
busbar protection with appropriate sensitivity in these cases,
an independent characteristic curve is available. This characteristic curve provides separated parameters for the threshold, as
well as for a restriction of the range of effectiveness. For this
case the integrated circuit-breaker failure protection has a
corresponding characteristic curve.
The activation of the characteristic curve takes place via a

binary input. A common criterion is the recognition of a high
residual voltage as an indication of a single-pole fault.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
)DXOWFKDUDFWHULVWLF
1.8
'LIIHUHQWLDOFXUUHQW
,GLII
)DXOWFKDUDFWHULVWLF
'LIIHUHQWLDOFXUUHQW
,GLII
1.9
7ULSSLQJUDQJH
7ULSSLQJUDQJH
2
2.1
2.2
B
6WDELOL]DWLRQUDQJH
6WDELOL]DWLRQUDQJH
$UHDRIKLJKHU
VHQVLWLYLW\
B

Fig. 2.8 / 3
B
r
2SHUDWLQJFXUYH
3

5HVWUDLQWFXUUHQW
,UHVWPRG
Standard characteristic curve
2.4
2SHUDWLQJFXUYH
B
3
Fig. 2.8 / 4
2.3
5HVWUDLQWFXUUHQW
,UHVWPRG
Sensitive characteristic curve
2.5
Disconnector image
In case of multiple busbars, bays are switched to various busbar
sections (protection zones) with disconnectors. For correct
assignment of the bay currents to the appropriate protection
zones, the position of the disconnector is needed in the busbar
as well as circuit-breaker failure protection. Dynamic administration of the switching states occurs via the disconnector
image integrated into the device. In case of a busbar fault, the
necessary trip commands for the individual circuit breakers are
also formed via the disconnector image.
The following properties distinguish this function:

Processing of up to 22 bays and 4 busbar sections
Supervision of disconnector runtime and position
Through the assignment Disconnector NOT off =
Disconnector on by software, there is no need
for adjusted disconnector auxiliary contacts
2.6
2.7
2.8
Storage of the disconnector position in case of an

auxiliary-voltage failure
2.9
Comfortable graphical engineering with the operating

program DIGSI 5
2.10
Dynamic graphical visualization of the switchgear with

DIGSI 5 in online mode.
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Applications
1
1.1
1.2
Project engineering of a double busbar

The following Fig. 2.8 / 5 shows a typical structure of engineering with DIGSI 5, the measuring points used, the function
groups used, and their interconnections.
1.3
1.4
1.5
%D\
1.6
%XV
FRXSOHU
ED\
1.7
%D\
%%
%%
7SS85
1.8
1.9

4%
4%
03
,SK

2.1
)* &XUWUDQVIRUPHU%( )* &LUFXLWEUHDNHU4$
,SK
,SK
50BF
50EF
)* 'LVFRQQHFWRU4%
)* 'LVFRQQHFWRU4%
2.2
Ctrl
CB
%,
%2
2.3
2.4
4$

87B
50BF inh.
&KHFN]RQH
2.5
%XV]RQH
%XV]RQH
6XSHUYLVLRQ
2.6
50BF
50EF
87B
Ctrl
2.7
Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

End-Fault Protection
Busbar Differential Protection
Control
2.8
2.9
Fig. 2.8 / 5
Application example: Project engineering of a double busbar
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Visio-Verbindungen_Feld_Koppl-enUS-01.pdf
)* %XVEDU
%(

Applications
Stub protection
The differential protection for so-called stubs requires a

protection zone and inputs for 3 current measuring points. With
the signicant feature 9 (differential protection for a protection
zone, 3 measuring points and 3 bays), a tailored solution is
available for you. With 2 such devices, a so-called H circuit can
also be protected, if a circuit breaker and a current transformer
exist in the connection.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
Fig. 2.8 / 6
Application example: Stub
1.9
2
2.1
Protection of a single busbar

Single busbars can be segmented into several sections using
bus-section couplers (circuit breakers and current transformers)
or busbar disconnectors.
With the variant with bus-section coupler, every zone is
selectively protectable.
According to the number of the busbar sections, the signi cant

feature 9 (differential protection for 1 protection zone),
signicant feature A (differential protection for 2 protection
zones) and signicant feature C (differential protection for 4
protection zones) are used.
2.2
2.3
2.4
For more than 4 zones and bus-section couplers, two

SIPROTEC 7SS85 devices are used.
With the variant with bus-section disconnectors, selective

protection is possible only with open disconnectors. For this,
the disconnector position must be recorded in the device.
2.5
%(
4$
%(
4$
4$
4$
4$
4$
4$
4$
%(
%(
%(
%(
%(
%(
%(
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
Fig. 2.8 / 7
Application example: Single busbar with 7 feeders and bus-section coupler
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Applications
1
1.1
1.2
H circuits can be looked at as two single busbars, each with

2 feeders on both sides of the coupling or disconnection.
Accordingly, the signicant feature A (differential protection for
2 protection zones, 15 measuring points and 19 bays) is used.
The SIPROTEC 7SS85 must be congured for 5 bays.

1.3

1.4
1.5
1.6

1.7
+FLUFXLWZLWKFRXSOHU
+FLUFXLWZLWKGLVFRQQHFWRU
1.8
Fig. 2.8 / 8
1.9
H circuit with coupler or disconnector
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Protection of a breaker-and-a-half arrangement

Busbars according to breaker-and-a-half layout allow the
uninterrupted operation of infeeds and outgoing feeders, also
in the case of a failure of a busbar. They are therefore commonly operated while interconnected.
In case of more than 14 feeders (7 diameters), one SIPROTEC

7SS85 device with the signicant feature 9 (differential protection for 1 protection zone) is used per busbar.
The middle circuit breakers and current transformers are not
relevant to the busbar-differential protection. In the 7SS85,
however, a system-encompassing circuit-breaker failure
protection can be realized.
Breaker-and-a-half arrangements are protected like 2 single

busbars. For a system in accordance with Fig. 2.8 / 9, a
SIPROTEC 7SS85 device of the signicant feature A (differential
protection for 2 protection zones is needed. The SIPROTEC
7SS85 must be set up for 10 bays (in correspondence with 5
cross branches, so-called Diameters).
2.6
2.7
2.8
4$
2.9
%(

4$

%(
4$

4$

%(
%(
4$

%(
2.10
4$
3
3.1
3.2

4$

4$

4$

4$
%(
%(
%(
%(
%(
%(
%(
%(
%(
%(

3.3
3.4
4$

4$

4$

4$

4$
3.5
3.6
Fig. 2.8 / 9
Breaker-and-a-half arrangement
3.7


Applications
Protection of a double busbar
Double-busbar systems allow the distribution of overall output

and a exible operations management. Each busbar or each
switchable-busbar section can be selectively protected.
In the integrated disconnector image, the dynamic updating of

the switching state of the system occurs in accordance with the
switch positions and the congured topology.
1.1
Since bays can be connected to various busbars (protection

zones), the disconnector positions must be determined in the
busbar protection.
For a system in accordance with Fig. 2.8 / 10, a SIPROTEC 7SS85

device of the signicant feature D (differential protection for
4 protection zones is needed.
1.3
1.2
1.4
1.5
1.6
4$

%(
1.7
1.8
4%
4% 4%
4$
%(

4% 4%
4$

4% 4%
4$
%(

4% 4%
%(
%(
4$

4$
%(

4$

%(
4% 4%
4$

4% 4%
4$
%(
%(

4% 4%
4$

%(
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Fig. 2.8 / 10
Double busbar with bus coupler and bus-section disconnection
Systems with transfer busbars or combined busbars

Transfer busbars are provided in order to continue to operate
feeders in cases of circuit-breaker revision or defect. In this
circuit-breaker substitution mode, the circuit breaker in the
affected coupler assumes the function of the circuit breaker of
the feeder. Mostly a transfer busbar of ones own is available
for this operation state.
If one of the main busbars, on the basis of the disconnector

topology, can also be used as transfer busbar, this is called a
combined busbar.
2.5
For a system in accordance with Fig. 2.8 / 11, a SIPROTEC 7SS85

device of the signicant feature B (differential protection for
2 protection zones is needed.
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
4% 4% 4%
4$

4% 4% 4%
4$
4%
%(
%(
4%

4%
4$
%(

4%
4% 4% 4%
4%
2.10
3
%(
4$
4% 4% 4%
4$

4%
%(

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Fig. 2.8 / 11
Double busbar with combined busbar
3.6
3.7

Functions
Abbr.
Available
in 7SS85
3-pole
1-pole
I/O
27
V<
1.5
27
V1<
27
Vx<
1.6
38
47
V2>
50/51 TD
I>
1.8
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50BF
CBFP
1.9
50BF
CBFP
50EF
End fault protection
59
V>
59
V1>
59N
V0>
2.2
59
Vx>
74TC
TCS
2.3
81O
f>
81U
f<
81R
df/dt
86
Lockout
87B
Busbar differential protection
1.1
1.2
ANSI
1.3
1.4
1.7
2
2.1
2.4
Bay
CFC arithmetic
Control
2.8
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
2.9
87 STUB
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.10
Table 2.8 / 3
SIPROTEC 7SS85 functions
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Standard variants
Overview of the standard variants for SIPROTEC 7SS85
V1
1/2, 15 BI, 13 BO, 12 I

Housing 1/2 x 19"
15 binary inputs,
13 binary outputs (1 life, 2 standard, 10 fast),
12 current transformer
Contains the modules: Base module wit PS201 and IO203,
V2
1/2, 11 BI, 11 BO, 16 I

Housing 1/2 x 19"
11 binary inputs,
V3
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7

1.8
2/3 15 BI, 15 BO, 24 I
1.9
Housing 2/3 x 19"

15 binary inputs

2 expansion modules IO203
2.2
The technical data of the devices can be found in the device manual
2.1
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Bay Controllers
SIPROTEC 6MD85, 6MD86
Bay Controllers SIPROTEC 6MD85, 6MD86

Description
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
SIPROTEC 6MD85, 6MD86 bay controllers

SIPROTEC 5 bay controllers are a part of the modular system of
SIPROTEC 5. They support all SIPROTEC 5 system features, and
can be used individually as well as universally in the framework
of system solutions.
SIPROTEC 5 bay controllers control and monitor systems of all
voltage levels. The large number of automatic functions allows
use in all elds of power supply.
The devices also contain important auxiliary functions that are
necessary for safe network operation today. This includes functions for protection, control, measurement and monitoring. The
large number of communication interfaces and communication
protocols satises the requirements of communication-based
selective protection, as well as automated operation.
test functions. Because of a modular structure design, the
SIPROTEC 5 bay controller can always be exibly adapted to
specic requirements.
Overview of the devices 6MD85 and 6MD86
SIPROTEC 5 bay controller is based on the exible and powerful
SIPROTEC 5 modular system. When ordering, you can choose
between various standard variants. Expandability by expansion
modules allows for individual adjustment to specic applications.
In this catalog you will nd predened templates for standard
applications. These templates already contain basic congurations, required functions and default settings for standard
applications.
Device groups
The bay controller is distinguished by the product groups
6MD85 and 6MD86. 6MD85 devices are tailored to applications
in distribution systems but are also suitable for transmission
applications. 6MD86 devices are designed for applications in
transmission systems and can be operated with a maximum
variety of additional functions. The hardware design of both
device types can be congured exibly.
Type
6MD85
6MD86
Optional
Automatic reclosing
Optional
Switching sequences
Optional
CFC arithmetic
Optional
Measured-value processing
Optional
Number of switching
devices greater than 4
Optional
Synchrocheck
Optional
Table 2.9 / 1
Overview of different distinguishing features
2.5
The extensive SIPROTEC function library is also available in the

bay controller type 6MD8. Thus, numerous protection functions
such as overcurrent protection, overvoltage protection or
frequency protection are available.
Common features:
Numerous protection functions congurable
Modularly expandable quantity structure
Optionally usable as Phasor Measurement Unit
Powerful automation with CFC.
2.6
2.7
*HQHUDWLRQ
2.8
6-
6/
6$
66
.(
6'
.(
0'
6-
9.
87
2.10
6.
'LVWULEXWLRQ
.(
0'
2.9
7UDQVPLVVLRQ
6$
6/
0'
6$
6'
6-
6-
66
6-
6'
6-
6'
6.
87
.(
6-
6/
87
6'
6.
6$
6$
6-
6-
3.1
0
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Fig. 2.9 / 1
Applications of SIPROTEC 5 devices in a transmission system
Bay Controller SIPROTEC 6MD85

Properties
Properties SIPROTEC 6MD85
Main function
Inputs and outputs
Hardware exibility
Housing width
Bay controller for medium-voltage and

high- to extra-high-voltage switchgear with
integrated operation and extensive protection functions. Powerful automation, simple
conguration with DIGSI 5.
1.1
1.2

4 current transformers and
1.3
1.4
1.5
Flexibly adjusted and expandable I/O

SIPROTEC 5 modular system. The device can
be expanded into the second tier if a large
number of inputs and outputs are needed.
For example, 240 (and more) binary inputs
are possible with the IO230 (see Section
Hardware)
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1/3 19" to 2/1 19"
The SIPROTEC5 Bay Controller is a universal control and automation device with optional protection function. It is designed for
use in all voltage levels from distribution to transmission. As a
full member of the SIPROTEC 5 family, it allows the use of a large
number of protection functions from the SIPROTEC library with
identical parameters like in the protection devices. The modular
hardware enables the user to integrate as many IO's as needed.
Functions
device.
Integrated bay controller with versatile protection functions
for applications from medium to extra high voltage
Control of up to 20 switching devices
2
2.1
Fig. 2.9 / 2
Bay controller SIPROTEC 6MD85 (1/3 device with

1/6 expansion module and operation panel for key-operated
switch)
2.4

integrated (PMU)
Auxiliary functions for simple tests and commissioning.
Table 2.9 / 2 shows all available functions for SIPROTEC 6MD85.
Applications
The bay controller 6MD85 is a universal, control and automation
device with protection functions on the basis of the
SIPROTEC 5 system. It is especially designed for the protection
of lines and therefore it is optimally suitable for reserve or
emergency protection for the line protection devices. Due to its
high exibility in using of protection data communication it is
suitable as selective protection equipment for overheadlines and
cables with single- and multi-ended infeeds. The device supports
all SIPROTEC 5 system characteristics. It enables future-oriented
system solutions with high investment security and low operating costs.

whitepaper
Arc protection
Powerful automation with CFC (Continuous Function Chart)
2.5

2.3
Secure serial protection data communication, also over

great distances and all available physical media (ber-optic
cable, 2-wire connections and communication networks)
Synchrocheck and switchgear interlocking system

IEC 61850 (Reporting) via integrated port J
2.2
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
Optional overcurrent protection for all voltage levels with

3-pole tripping
3.1
Also used in switchgear with breaker-and-a-half scheme
3.2
Selective protection of overhead lines and cables with

single- and multi-ended infeeds for use with protection data
communication
3.3
Overcurrent protection also congurable as backup

function
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Application example
1
1.1
1.2
1.3

settings.
SIPROTEC 6MD85 standard
1.4
Double-busbar feeder with switchgear interlocking.
1.5
SIPROTEC 6MD85 extended control
1.6
1.7
1.8
Additionally to 6MD85 standard, this includes the CFC blocks

for switching sequences and arithmetic
Switching sequence for automatic busbar transfer precongured (started by function key).
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
QB1
QB2
2.5

QB9
2.6
2.7
2.8
V4
MP
V-1ph 1
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
I-3ph 1
V1
V2
V3
MP
V-3ph 1
I-3ph
V-3ph
2SHUDWLRQDOYDOXHV
(QHUJ\PHWHUHG
YDOXHV
CB
/LQH
Ctrl
Dc
o
3.1
)*
03
(QA) &%
(QB) 'FR
%,
%2
3.2
3.3
3.4
Fig. 2.9 / 3
BI
BO
6ZLWFKLQJVHTXHQFH
IRUEXVEDUFKDQJHV
3.5
Ctrl
Display,
Communication,
CFC
2.9
2.10

V-1ph
V-3ph
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
'LVFRQQHFWRU
%LQDU\LQSXW
%LQDU\RXWSXW

&WUO
&)&
BI
BO
6\QFKURFKHFN
&RQWURO
Application example: Bay controller SIPROTEC 6MD85 for double busbar with switching sequence for busbar transfer
3.6
3.7
Fig_3_6_Visio_Bsp-Application-1-us.pdf
QA1

Functions
Abbr.
Standard
Not Congured
Externded Control
ANSI
Available in 6MD85
3-pole
I/O
25
Sync
27
27
V<
Vx<
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
38
I2>
49
, It
50/51 TD
I>
IN>
I>>>
SOTF

51V
IN>
t=f(I,V)
59
V>
59
V1>
59
Vx>
74TC
TCS
81O
f>
81U
f<
81R
df/dt
86
Lockout
90V
90V
PMU

50HS
Table 2.9 / 2
Ix, It, 2P
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
CFC arithmetic
Control
Circuit Breaker
Disconnector
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3
SIPROTEC 6MD85 Functions and application templates
1.5
1.7
1.4
Function points:
1.3
PMU
1.2
1.6
46
1.1
75
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Properties
1
1.1
Properties SIPROTEC 6MD86

Main function
Bay controller for medium-voltage and

high- to extra-high-voltage switchgear with
integrated operation and extensive protection functions. Powerful automation, simple
conguration with DIGSI 5.
Inputs and outputs
6 predened standard variants with up to

8 current transformers and
Hardware exibility
Flexibly adjusted and expandable I/O

SIPROTEC 5 modular system. The device can
be expanded into the second tier if a large
number of inputs and outputs are needed.
For example, 240 (and more) binary inputs
are possible with the IO230 (see Section
Hardware).
Housing width
1/3 19" to 2/1 19"
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
The SIPROTEC5 Bay Controller is a universal control and automation device with optional protection function. It is designed for
use in all voltage levels from distribution to transmission. As a
full member of the SIPROTEC 5 family, it allows the use of a large
number of protection functions from the SIPROTEC library with
identical parameters like in the protection devices. The exible
hardware concept enables the exact tting to all amount of
process data.
Functions
2.5

device.
Integrated bay controller with versatile protection functions
for applications from medium to extra high voltage
Fig. 2.9 / 4
Bay controller SIPROTEC 6MD86 (1/3 device with 1/6

expansion module and operation panel for key-operated
switch)

2-wire connections and communication networks)
integrated (PMU)
Auxiliary functions for simple tests and commissioning.
Table 2.9 / 3 shows all available functions for SIPROTEC 6MD86.
Control of up to 20 switching devices
2.6
2.7
Synchrocheck, switchgear interlocking system and protection

functions related to the switching device, such as circuitbreaker tripping signal and automatic reclosing
2.8
2.9

IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3 (serial+TCP), Modbus RTU Slave)
2.10
3
3.1

whitepaper
Applications
The bay controller 6MD86 is a universal, control and automation
device with protection functions on the basis of the SIPROTEC
5 system. It is especially designed for the protection of lines
and therefore it is optimally suitable for reserve or emergency
protection for the line protection devices. Due to its high exibility in using of protection data communication it is suitable
as selective protection equipment for overheadlines and cables
with single- and multi-ended infeeds. The device supports all
SIPROTEC 5 system characteristics. It enables future-oriented
system solutions with high investment security and low operating costs.
Arc protection
3.2
Powerful automation with CFC (Continuous Function Chart)
3.3
Optional overcurrent protection for all voltage levels with

3-pole tripping
3.4
Also used in switchgear with breaker-and-a-half scheme
3.5
Overcurrent protection also congurable as backup

function
3.6
3.7

Applications
SIPROTEC 6MD86 breaker-and-a-half type 1
SIPROTEC 6MD86 standard double busbar
Control of a breaker-and-a-half diameter (3 circuit-breakers,

14 disconnectors)
Double-busbar feeder with switchgear interlocking system
1
1.1
Synchrocheck for circuit-breaker
Synchrocheck for the three circuit-breakers with dynamic

measuring point changeover.
1.2
Switching sequence for automatic busbar transfer precongured (tripped by function key).
SIPROTEC 6MD86 breaker-and-a-half type 2
1.3
Control of a part of breaker-and-a-half diameter
1.4
Supports concepts with several bay controllers per bay

Circuit-breaker failure protection and automatic reclosing.
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
QB2
QA1
V4
I1
I2
I3
I4
QB9
V1
V2
V3
MP
V-1ph 1
MP
I-3ph 1
I-3ph

V-3ph

V-1ph
V-3ph

I-3ph
50BF

2SHUDWLRQDOYDOXHV
(QHUJ\PHWHUHG
YDOXHV
Display,
Communication,
CFC
Ctrl
CB
BI
BO
Fig_5_7_Visio-Bsp-Application-2-us.pdf
QB1
2.3
2.4
2.5
MP
V-3ph 1
6ZLWFKLQJVHTXHQFH
IRUEXVEDUFKDQJHV
/LQH
Ctrl
Dco
BI
BO
2.6
2.7
)*
03
4$ &%
4% 'FR
%,
%2
&WUO
&)&
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
'LVFRQQHFWRU
%LQDU\LQSXW
%LQDU\RXWSXW
&RQWURO

%)

6\QFKURFKHFN
$XWRPDWLFUHFORVLQJ
)UHTXHQF\SURWHFWLRQ
3RZHUSURWHFWLRQ
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
Fig. 2.9 / 5
Application example: Bay controller 6MD86 for double busbar with protection functions
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Functions
Abbr.
Available in 6MD86
Not Congured
1.5 CB type1
Standard Double
Busbar
1.5 CB type 2
1.1
3-pole
I/O
25
Sync
1.7
27
V<
27
Vx<
1.8
32, 37
P<>, Q<>
38
46
I2>
49
, It
50/51 TD
I>
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
1.2
1.3
1.4
ANSI
1.5
1.6
1.9
2
2.1
2.4
2.5
I>>>
SOTF
50N/ 51N TD
IN>
50BF
CBFP
51V
t=f(I,V)
59
V>
59
V1>
59
Vx>
74TC
TCS
79
AR
81O
f>
81U
f<
81R
df/dt
86
Lockout
90V
90V
PMU

currents)
50HS
2.2
2.3
2.6
2.7
PMU
2.8
2.9
CFC arithmetic
3.1
Control
3.2
Circuit Breaker
3.4
Disconnector
18
18
75
3.5
2.10
3
3.3
3.6
Ix, It, 2P
Function points:
Table 2.9 / 3
SIPROTEC 6MD86 Functions and application templates
3.7

Applications
Application example with switching sequence
SIPROTEC 6MD85
Fig. 2.9 / 6 shows a simple application example with a 6MD85 on
a double busbar. The circuit-breaker function group contains
the synchrocheck. The disconnectors are also controlled by
one function group each. Operational measured values and
energy measured values are calculated in the function group

VI_3-phase, and are available for output on the display, transmission to the station automation system and processing in the CFC.
A switching sequence stored in the CFC which is triggered via a
function key causes an automatic busbar transfer.
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
QB1
QB2
1.7
1.8

V4
QB9
MP
V-1ph 1
I-3ph
V-3ph
1.9

V-1ph
V-3ph
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
I-3ph 1
V1
V2
V3
MP
V-3ph 1
2SHUDWLRQDOYDOXHV
(QHUJ\PHWHUHG
YDOXHV
2.1
Ctrl
Display,
Communication,
CFC
CB
6ZLWFKLQJVHTXHQFH
IRUEXVEDUFKDQJHV
/LQH
Ctrl
Dc
o
)*
03
(QA) &%
(QB) 'FR
%,
%2
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
'LVFRQQHFWRU
%LQDU\LQSXW
%LQDU\RXWSXW

&WUO
&)&
6\QFKURFKHFN
&RQWURO
2.2
BI
BO
BI
BO
2.3
Fig_3_6_Visio_Bsp-Application-1-us.pdf
QA1
2.4
2.5
2.6
Fig. 2.9 / 6
Application example: Bay controller 6MD85 for double busbar with switching sequence for busbar transfer
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Applications
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Application example with protection functions

In Fig. 2.9 / 8, the double-busbar feeder is controlled by a
SIPROTEC 6MD85 and additionally protected. For this purpose,
the circuit-breaker failure protection and automatic reclosing are
activated in the circuit-breaker function group. Function group
VI_3-phase contains the protection functions overvoltage protection, frequency protection and power protection. Different to
Fig. 2.9 / 6 it is therefore connected to the circuit-breaker in order
to provide a destination for the resulting tripping signals.
Such connections can be congured easily and exibly in the
DIGSI editor Function group connections (Fig. 2.9 / 7).
1.6
Fig. 2.9 / 7
Assignment of the function group with protection functions

to the circuit-breaker (protection object)
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
QB1
QB2
2.1
QA1
V4
2.3
I1
I2
I3
I4
QB9
2.4
V1
V2
V3
2.5
MP
V-1ph 1
MP
I-3ph 1
I-3ph

V-3ph

V-1ph
V-3ph

I-3ph
50BF

2SHUDWLRQDOYDOXHV
(QHUJ\PHWHUHG
YDOXHV
Display,
Communication,
CFC
Ctrl
CB
MP
V-3ph 1
6ZLWFKLQJVHTXHQFH
IRUEXVEDUFKDQJHV
/LQH
Ctrl
Dco
)*
03
4$ &%
4% 'FR
%,
%2
&WUO
&)&
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
'LVFRQQHFWRU
%LQDU\LQSXW
%LQDU\RXWSXW
&RQWURO

%)

6\QFKURFKHFN
$XWRPDWLFUHFORVLQJ
)UHTXHQF\SURWHFWLRQ
3RZHUSURWHFWLRQ
2.10
3
Fig. 2.9 / 8
BI
BO
Application example: Bay controller 6MD86 for double busbar with protection functions
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
BI
BO
Fig_5_7_Visio-Bsp-Application-2-us.pdf
2.2

Applications
%XVEDU$
4&

%(
4%
4&
9
4%
4$
4&
4%
4&
4%
'LVWDQFHGLIIHUHQWLDO
SURWHFWLRQFLUFXLWEUHDNHU
IDLOXUHSURWHFWLRQDQG
DXWRPDWLFUHFORVLQJIRU
4$DQG4$
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
4&
1.8
%(
1.9
0'
%D\FRQWUROOHU
9
6\QFKURFKHFNDQG&RQWURO
IRUDOO&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
&RQWUROIRUDOO6ZLWFKHV
PHDVXUHPHQWV
4&
,
2.1
2.2
4%
2.3
/LQH
%(
6/
3URWHFWLRQGHYLFH
,
4&
9
4&
9
'LVWDQFHGLIIHUHQWLDO
SURWHFWLRQFLUFXLWEUHDNHU
IDLOXUHSURWHFWLRQDQG
DXWRPDWLFUHFORVLQJIRU
4$DQG4$
4&
4%
2.4
%DFNXSSURWHFWLRQ
&
4$
1.3
/LQH
4&
%(
6/
3URWHFWLRQGHYLFH
,
%(
4%
1.2
%DFNXSSURWHFWLRQ
%(
%XVEDU%
%(
4$
4%
4&
Fig_9_Visio-1-5_CB-us.pdf
4$
1.1
%(
4%
,QVWUXPHQWWUDQVIRUPHU
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
'LVFRQQHFWRU
*URXQGLQJVZLWFK
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
Fig. 2.9 / 9
Application example: Breaker-and-a-half layout with one bay controller and two line protection devices (overview)
3
3.1
Breaker-and-a-half diameter with protection and

control systems
Fig. 2.9 / 9 shows a breaker-and-a-half diameter with protection
and control system. Protection is ensured by two line protection
devices SIPROTEC 7SL87 which also include circuit-breaker
failure protection and automatic reclosing of the three circuit-
breakers. All switching devices and the synchrocheck of the

circuit-breakers are controlled by the bay controller SIPROTEC
6MD86. Fig. 2.9 / 10 shows the functions of SIPROTEC 6MD86.
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Applications
1
1.1
1.2
1.4
1.5
V4
MP
V-1ph 1
I1
I2
I3
MP
I-3ph 1
Vsync 1
Vsync 2
Ctrl
1.6
QA1
1.7
1.8
1.9
V1
V2
V3
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
QA3
2.5
BI
BO
CB
BI
BO
MP
V-3ph 1
Vsync 1
QA2
CB
Vsync 2
I1
I2
I3
MP
I-3ph 2
V1
V2
V3
MP
V-3ph 2
I4
I4
MP
I-1ph 1
MP
I-1ph 2
V4
MP
V-1ph 2
Ctrl
Vsync 1
Ctrl
Vsync 2
Dco
BI
BO
Ctrl
CB
BI
BO
Fig_10_Visio-Bsp-Application-3-us.pdf
1.3
2.6
2.7
Fig. 2.9 / 10
Application example: Breaker-and-a-half layout with one bay controller and two line protection devices (detail for bay controller)
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
Breaker-and-a-half diameter with protection and control

Fig. 2.9 / 10 shows the principle of dynamic changeover of
measured voltage values for the synchrocheck functions of
the three circuit-breakers in the bay controller SIPROTEC 6MD86.
Every synchrocheck function (ANSI number 25) requires the
two voltages Vsync1 and Vsync2 (feeder voltage and reference
voltage). For the central circuit-breaker QA2 there are two
possibilities each for both voltages, depending on the position
of the disconnectors and the circuit-breakers. For the two

exterior circuit-breakers QA1 and QA3, there is only one possibility
for one voltage (that is, the adjacent busbar), whereas the other
voltage is connected with one of three possibilities (also depending on the position of the switching device).
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Applications
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
Fig. 2.9 / 11
Mapping of the possible voltage channels to the three circuit-breaker function groups
Fig. 2.9 / 11 shows the mapping in the editor Function Group

Connections. All voltages that are possible as feeder or reference voltage for the synchrocheck are assigned to the inputs
Vsync1 or Vsync2.
2.4
The ID number of the measured values is used to select the

presently applied operational voltages in a CFC (Fig. 2.9 / 12).
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
Fig. 2.9 / 12
CFC for selection of the synchrocheck reference voltages
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Applications
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Application as Phasor Measurement Unit
V1
Since the release of the bay controller SIPROTEC 6MD85 and

SIPROTEC 6MD86, the function Phasor Measurement Unit
(PMU) is made available in the SIPROTEC devices for the rst
time.
1
Station 1
V2
Fig. 2.9 / 13 shows the principle. A measurement of current and

voltage with regard to amplitude and phase is performed with
PMUs on selected substations of the transmission system. Due
to the high-precision time stamps assigned to these phasor
quantities by the PMU, these measured values can be displayed
together at a central analysis point. This provides a good
overview of the condition of the system stability, and enables
the display of dynamic processes, e.g., power swings.
Station 4
Station 2
1.8
Station 3
1.9
V3
3
2
2.1
Fig. 2.9 / 13
2.2
2.3
2.4
Region 1
Region 2
PDC 2
2.5
PDC 1
IEEE C37.118
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
Fig. 2.9 / 14
Connection of 3 Phasor Measurement Units with two Phasor Data Concentrators (PDCs) SIGUARD PDP
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
If the option Phasor Measurement Unit is selected, the devices

determine current and voltage phasors, mark them with
high-precision time stamps, and send them to a phasor data
concentrator together with other measured values (frequency,
rate of frequency change) via the communication protocol
IEEE C37.118, see Fig. 2.9 / 14.
By means of the synchrophasors and a suitable analysis program

(e.g., SIGUARD PDP) it is possible to determine power swings
automatically and to trigger alarms, which are sent, for example,
to the network control center.
3.6
3.7

Applications
1
1.1
QB1
1.2
QB2
1.3
QA1

V4
I1
I2
I3
I4
QB9
V1
V2
V3
MP
V-1ph 1
V-1ph
V-3ph
V-3ph
I-3ph
2SHUDWLRQDOYDOXHV
(QHUJ\PHWHUHG
YDOXHV
1.6
Ctrl
'LVSOD\
FRPPXQL
FDWLRQ
&)&
1.7
CB
BI
BO
1.8
1.9
MP
V-3ph 1
/LQH
2
Ctrl
I-3ph
Dco
3KDVRUFDOFXODWLRQIRU
9DQG,
Fig. 2.9 / 15
1.5
I-3ph
MP
I-3ph 1
V-1ph
V-3ph
)*
03
4$ &%
4% 'FR
%,
%2
1.4

)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
'LVFRQQHFWRU
%LQDU\LQSXW
%LQDU\RXWSXW

&WUO
&)&
308
BI
BO
&RPP
,(((&
6\QFKURFKHFN
&RQWURO
3KDVRU0HDVXUHPHQW8QLW
Application example: Double busbar with 6MD86, used as bay controller and Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
When the PMU function is used, a PMU function is created in

the device, see Fig. 2.9 / 15. This function group calculates the
phasors and analog values, sets the time stamps and sends the
data to the selected Ethernet interface with the protocol
IEEE C37.118.
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
There they can be received, stored and processed by one or

more clients. Up to three client IP addresses can be allocated in
the device.
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Standard variants
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 6MD85 and SIPROTEC 6MD86

Type 1
1.1
Housing width 1/3 x 19

1 electrical Ethernet module ETH-L1-2EL
1.2
1.3
1.4
1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V

Type 2
1/2, 27 BI, 17 BO, 4 I, 4 V

Housing width 1/2 x 19",
1.5
1.6

1.7
1.8
Type 3
In preparation
1.9
Type 4
2/3, 43 BI, 25 BO, 4 I, 4 V

2
2.1

expansion modules 2x IO207.
2.2
2.3
Type 5
In preparation
2.4
Type 6
5/6, 59 BI, 33 BO, 4 I, 4 V

2.5
Type 7
1/1, 75 BI, 41 BO, 4 I, 4 V

2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
The images show the 6MD86 operation panel: Large display, key switch, 32 LEDs.
6MD85 standard variants: Small display, max. 16 LEDs.
Standard variant additionally for SIPROTEC 6MD86
Type 8
1/1, 75 BI, 39 BO, 8 I, 8 V

expansion modules IO202, 2x IO207.
The technical data for the bay control devices can be found in the device manuals.
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Fault Recorder
SIPROTEC 7KE85

Description
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
Features
Fault recorders are part of the modular system of SIPROTEC 5.

They support all SIPROTEC 5 system features and can be used
individually as well as universally in the framework of system
solutions.
The Fault Recorder SIPROTEC 5 7KE85 can be congured with

different basic features.
The SIPROTEC 7KE85 fault recorder is designed to suit present

and future requirements in a changing energy sector. Powerful
and reliable monitoring combined with exible engineering and
communication features provide the basis for maximum supply
reliability.
test functions. Due to a modular design, the SIPROTEC 5 fault
recorder can always be exibly adapted to specic requirements.
Basic features
Digital
fault recording
Comprehensive exible event-triggered and

continuous recording options
PMU
Synchrophasor measurement (PMU) according

to C37.118 (2011)
Power Quality
Recorder
Continuous measurement of events and disturbances in electricity supply systems according

to IEC 61000-4-30 (class S)
Table 2.10 / 1
Overview of different basic features

The Fault Recorder SIPROTEC 7KE85 has the following additional
functionality compared to SIPROTEC 5 protection devices and
bay controllers:
Sampling congurable from 1 to 16 kHz
16-gigabyte ring buffer
2.2
All recorders can run simultaneously
2.3
Recorders triggered individually
2.4
Separate activation of the recorders

The table on page 2.10 / 4 lists the available functions from
the library. Predened templates are available in DIGSI for the
standard applications. These templates already contain basic
congurations, required functions and default settings.
Continuous recorders
Freely congurable storage allocation
Additional quality information complements the records.
2.5
7UDQVPLVVLRQ
*HQHUDWLRQ
'LVWULEXWLRQ
6-
6/
6$
66
.(
6'
.(
0'
6-
9.
87
2.6
6.
2.7
2.8
2.9
.(
0'
6$
6/
0'
6$
6'
6-
6-
66
6-
6'
6-
6'
6.
87
.(
6-
6/
87
6'
6.
2.10
6$
6-
6-
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
6$
Fig. 2.10 / 1
3.6
3.7

Properties
Properties SIPROTEC 7KE85
Main function
Fault recorder
Inputs and outputs
Predened standard variants** with up to

16 current and 16 voltage transformers,
35 binary inputs, 27 binary outputs
Hardware exibility
Flexibly adjusted and expandable I/O quantity

structure within the scope of the SIPROTEC 5
modular system
Housing width
1/3 19" to 2/1 x 19"
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Powerful fault recorder with integrated detection of synchrophasors (PMU) according to IEEE C37.118 and power quality
measurement* according to IEC 61000 (class S). Due to the
high exibility of trigger functions, the 7KE85 is ideally suited
to monitor the entire energy value chain from generation to
distribution. The powerful automation and exible conguration
with DIGSI 5 complements the range of functions.
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
Functions
device.
Digital fault recorder for medium-voltage systems, highvoltage systems and extra-high voltage systems and power
plants
Fast scan recorder
2
2.1
Fig. 2.10 / 2
Fault Recorder 7KE85 (1/3 device with 1/6 expansion

module and LED operation panel)
Creating trigger functions using the graphic automation editor

CFC (Continuous Function Chart)
Trigger functions by combining single-point/double-point
indications, analog values, binary signals, Boolean signals and
GOOSE messages
2.2
2.3
2.4
Consistent monitoring concept
Up to 2 slow scan recorders
Auxiliary functions for simple tests and commissioning
Up to 5 continuous recorders
Power quality recorder* according to IEC 61000 (class S)
Sequence of event recorder for continuous recording of binary
status changes

2.5
Applicable as Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) according to

IEEE C37.118 standard

whitepaper
Transmission of records and triggering via IEC 61850
Special test mode for commissioning
Variable sampling frequencies parameterizable from 1 kHz to

16 kHz
Up to 4 pluggable communication modules can be used for

different and redundant protocols.
2.6
The user can allocate the 16-gigabyte internal ring buffer to

the various recorders.
Intelligent terminal technology enables pre-wiring and easy

device exchange.
2.7
Intelligent monitoring routines of the storage medium ensure

a high security of the archived data.
Applications
2.8
Loss-free data compression

Time synchronization via IRIG-B, DCF77 and SNTP
Free routing of measured values to the individual recorders
Free combination of the measuring groups for power calculation
Quality bits for representing the current channel quality
Fault recorder for medium voltage, high voltage and extra-high

voltage systems and power plants with comprehensive trigger
and recording functions. The SIPROTEC 7KE85 fault recorder
provides a clearly structured and event-related evaluation and
documentation of your power system processes. It enables you
to analyze disturbances and to optimize your power system.
The following processes usually have to be monitored and
documented:
The trigger functions of a function block are the value of the

fundamental component, RMS value, zero-sequence/positivesequence/negative-sequence system, frequency, active
power/ reactive power / apparent power
Power system incidents such as critical load cases or shortcircuits
Level trigger and gradient trigger for each trigger function
Dynamic behavior of generators
Flexible cross and network trigger
Starting and switch-off processes of transformers (saturationbehavior)
* in preparation
** extensions in preparation
Disturbances of the supply quality
Power quality* according to EN 50160 such as harmonics,

voltage dips, voltage peaks or ickers
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Functions and application templates
Power uctuations and power swing processes

Test runs during commissioning.
1.1
1.2
1.3

settings.

Fault Recorder 4 V/4 I/11BI
Application template referring to the monitoring of a total of
8 current or voltage transformers.
Fault Recoder 8 V/8 I/19 BI
Application template referring to the monitoring of a total of
16 current or voltage transformers.
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
Fault Recorder
8V/8C/19BI
2.2
Fault Recorder
4V/4C/11BI
2.1
Available in
7KE85
2.3
ANSI
Functions
Abbr.
I/O
2.4
PMU

currents)
PMU
2.5
CFC arithmetic
SSR
Slow-scan recorder
SSR
CR
Continuous recorder
CR
FSR
Fast-scan recorder
FSR
ExTrFct
Extended trigger functions
ExTrFct
Function-points class:
The conguration and function points for your application can be ascertained in the SIPROTEC 5 order congurator:
2.6
2.7
Table 2.10 / 2
SIPROTEC 7KE85 Functions and application templates
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Functions and application templates
Fast scan recorder
The fast scan recorder allows analyzing transient processes,
short-circuits or ground faults and also the behavior of protection devices. Transient processes, for example can be caused
by switching operations. The fast scan recorder is capable of
recording the development of the sampled values of all analog
inputs, of internally calculated measured values and binary signals during a fault for a period of 90 seconds with a pre-trigger
time of 3 seconds. The sampling rate can be set between 20 and
320 sampled values per period. This corresponds to a sampling
frequency of 1 kHz to up to 16 kHz.
Binary changes are detected with a resolution of 1 ms. The
input signals are analyzed according to the specied trigger
conditions and recorded if the limit values are violated. This
fault record contains the pre-trigger time, the trigger instant
and the fault recording. Additionally, the trigger cause is stored.
The trigger limit values and recording times can be determined
easily using DIGSI 5.
Slow scan recorder
The functioning is similar to the fast scan recorder. However,
the difference is that the values are calculated every 10 ms
and are averaged over a congurable interval. The averaging
interval can be congured from 1 to up to 3000 rated periods.
The slow scan recorder stores the averaged values as recording
in the mass storage. Analogous to the fast scan recorder, binary
changes are detected with a resolution of 1 ms.
Slow scan recorders are therefore ideally suited to detect, for
example, the load conditions before, during and after a disturbance and along with that the power swing processes.
The slow scan recorder is capable of recording the development
of the sampled values of all analog inputs, of internally
calculated measured values and binary signals during a fault for
a period of 90 minutes with a pre-trigger time of 90 seconds.
Here, too, the input signals are analyzed according to the
specied trigger conditions and recorded if the limit values are
violated. These recorded fault records contain the pre-trigger
time, the trigger instant and the fault recording. Additionally,
the trigger cause is stored. For this purpose, the user species
trigger limit values and recording times in DIGSI 5. Additionally,
it is possible to create up to 2 independent instances of the slow
scan recorder.
An average is formed and stored in the storage for each quantity

recorded by the continuous recorder over a settable period of
time. Each continuous recorder can be activated separately and
is organized as ring buffer with parameterizable quantities.
1
1.1
1.2
Trigger functions
The event-triggered recorders (fast scan recorder and slow scan
recorder) contain a variety of analog and binary triggers which
enable the user to determine the specic power system problem
and avoid unnecessary recordings. The input signals are sampled
according to the trigger conditions and start the fault recording.
In the SIPROTEC 7KE85 all triggers can also be assigned multiple
times to the different recorders.
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Analog triggers
The analog triggers can basically be divided into level triggers
and gradient triggers. Level triggers monitor whether measured
values stay inside the parameterized limit values (min/max).
The trigger is initiated once the measured value violates the
corresponding limit value. Gradient triggers respond to the level
change per time.
Each analog trigger can be parameterized as primary, secondary
or percentage value. There are frequency triggers, voltage triggers, current triggers, and power triggers. If the trigger quantity
is current and voltage, the fundamental component, RMS and
symmetrical components are available for selection.
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Binary triggers
A binary trigger starts a recording due to the logical status
change of a binary signal.
Besides manual triggers initiated via the device keypad, DIGSI 5
or any IEC 61850 client (for example SICAM PAS/PQS), triggering
is also possible via binary input (external trigger) or IEC 61850
GOOSE messages via communication network. The logical
triggers are implemented via the powerful graphical logic editor
(CFC). All available analog values (absolute values or phases),
binary signals, boolean signals, GOOSE messages, single-point
indications and double-point indications can be freely combined
here using boolean or arithmetic operations.
You as the user can thus dene the trigger conditions suitable
for your problem and start recording.
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
Continuous recorder
2.9
The 7KE85 features up to 5 continuous recorders used for data

acquisition of the analog quantities and internally calculated
measured values over longer periods of time. This enables
performing an accurate long-term analysis of the power system
behavior.
2.10
3
3.1
Fast scan recorder

Slow scan recorder
Continuous recorder
Common Data Class

(IEC 61850)
Pre-trigger time
(max.)
Seal-in time
(max.)
Sampling /
resolution
Averaging time
SMV/MV
3s
90 s
1 kHz to 16 kHz
SPS
3s
90 s
1 ms
MV
90 s
5400 s
MVs all 10 ms
1 - 3000 periods
SPS
90 s
5400 s
1 ms
MV
MVs all 10 ms
1 s to 900 s
SMV = Sample Measured Values / SPS= Single Point Status / MV = Measured Values
Table 2.10 / 3
Recorder
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Applications
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Fault Recorder SIPROTEC 7KE85 for feeder monitoring

Fig. 2.10 / 3 and Fig. 2.10 / 4 show simple application examples
with one SIPROTEC 7KE85 connected to monitor feeders.
The different triggers are provided via the function group
FG UI_3phases and are available to the function group
FG Recorder and thus also to the event-triggered recorders.
At the same time, CFC enables user-dened trigger functions
(combination of GOOSE messages, single-point/double-point
indications, binary signals...) to start a recorder and thereby
generate a fault record.
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
QB1
QB2
2.1
QA1

2.3
2.4
QB9
)* 9,BSK
MP
V-1ph 1
MP
I-3ph 1
V-3ph
I-3ph
)* 5HFRUGHU
&XUUHQWWULJJHU
)DVWVFDQUHFRUGHU
9ROWDJHWULJJHU
6ORZVFDQUHFRUGHU
3RZHUWULJJHU
&RQWLQXRXVUHFRUGHU
)UHTXHQF\WULJJHU

3RZHUTXDOLW\UHFRUGHU
6HTXHQFHRIHYHQWV
UHFRUGHU
2.5
)*
03
4$ &%
4% 'FR
&)&
2.6
2.7
5HFRUGLQJ
7ULJJHUIXQFWLRQV
/LQH
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
'LVFRQQHFWRU
,QIRUPDWLRQURXWLQJ
7ULJJHUURXWLQJ
LQSUHSDUDWLRQ
2.8
2.9
Fig. 2.10 / 3
Application example: Fault Recorder SIPROTEC 7KE85 for feeder monitoring
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Visio-Bsp-Application-1_us.pdf
2.2

Applications
1
1.1
%XVEDUZLWKOLQHIHHGHUV
1.2
QA1

QA2

1.3
)* 9,BSK
MP
V-1ph 1
QB9
V-3ph
QB9
MP
I-3ph 1
I-3ph
)* 5HFRUGHU
)DVWVFDQUHFRUGHU
9ROWDJHWULJJHU
6ORZVFDQUHFRUGHU
3RZHUWULJJHU
&RQWLQXRXVUHFRUGHU
)UHTXHQF\WULJJHU
I-3ph
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
)* 9,BSK
MP
I-3ph 2
1.5
6HTXHQFHRIHYHQWV
UHFRUGHU
V-3ph
1.4
&XUUHQWWULJJHU
5HFRUGLQJ
2.1
&XUUHQWWULJJHU
2.2
9ROWDJHWULJJHU
2.3
)UHTXHQF\WULJJHU
/LQH
/LQH
Visio-Bsp-Application-2_us.pdf
3RZHUWULJJHU

)*
03
4$ &%
4% 'FR
&)&
Fig. 2.10 / 4
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
'LVFRQQHFWRU
2.5
,QIRUPDWLRQURXWLQJ
7ULJJHUURXWLQJ
Application example: Fault Recorder SIPROTEC 7KE85 for monitoring of two feeders
2.4
LQSUHSDUDWLRQ
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Applications
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Phasor Measurement Unit

The Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) function can be operated
simultaneously in the SIPROTEC 7KE85 Fault Recorder.
Fig. 2.10 / 5 shows the principle. PMUs measure current and
voltage by amount and phase at selected stations of the
transmission system. The high-precision time synchronization
(via GPS) allows comparing measured values from different substations far apart and drawing conclusions as to the system state
and dynamic events such as power swing conditions.
1.6
When selecting the option Phasor Measurement Unit, the

devices determine current and voltage phasors, provide them
with highly accurate time stamps and transmit them for analysis
together with other measured values (frequency, speed of
frequency change) using the IEEE C37.118 communication
protocol, see Fig. 2.10 / 6.
Using synchrophasors and a suitable analysis program (for
example SIGUARD PDP) it is possible to automatically detect
power swings and trigger alarms, which are sent to the control
center, for example.
1.7
V1
1.8
1.9
Station 1
V2
2.1
2.2
Station 4
2.3
2.4
Station 2
Station 3
V3
3
2.5
Fig. 2.10 / 5
Region 1
2.6
Region 2
2.7
PDC 2
2.8
2.9
2.10
PDC 1
IEEE C37.118
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Fig. 2.10 / 6
Connection of 3 Phasor Mesurement Units with two Phasor Data Concentrators (PDCs) SIGUARD PDP

Applications
Fault recorder with PMU
When using the PMU function, a function group FG PMU

is created in the device, see Fig. 2.10 / 7. This function group
calculates the phasors and analog values, conducts the time
stamping and sends the data to the selected Ethernet interface
using the IEEE C37.118 protocol. There, the data can be
received, stored and processed by one or more clients.
Up to three client IP addresses can be assigned in the device.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
QB1
1.9
QB2
7KE85
QB9
)* 9,BSK
MP
V-1ph 1
MP
I-3ph 1
V-3ph
I-3ph
)* 5HFRUGHU
&XUUHQWWULJJHU
)DVWVFDQUHFRUGHU
2.2
9ROWDJHWULJJHU
6ORZVFDQUHFRUGHU

2.3
3RZHUWULJJHU
&RQWLQXRXVUHFRUGHU

2.4
)UHTXHQF\WULJJHU

6HTXHQFHRIHYHQWV
UHFRUGHU
)* 308
/LQH
2.1
5HFRUGLQJ
V-3ph
I-3ph
3KDVRUFDOFXODWLRQIRU
9DQG,
)*
03
4$ &%
4% 'FR
&)&
308
)XQFWLRQJURXS
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU
'LVFRQQHFWRU
3KDVRU0HDVXUHPHQW8QLW
&RPP
,(((&
,QIRUPDWLRQURXWLQJ
7ULJJHUURXWLQJ
Visio-Bsp-PMU-Application-1-us.pdf
QA1

2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
LQSUHSDUDWLRQ
2.9
2.10
Fig. 2.10 / 7
Application example: Double busbar with SIPROTEC 7KE85 used as fault recorder and Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7

Standard variants
Standard variants for SIPROTEC 7KE85

N1
1.1

11 binary inputs,
9 binary outputs(1 life contact, 2 standard, 6 fast),
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
N2
1.7
Contains the modules: Base modules with PS201 and IO211

N3*
1.9
1/3, 7 BI, 7 BO, 8 I,

7 binary inputs,
2
2.1
2.2
1/3, 11 BI, 3 BO, 8 V

11 binary inputs,
1.6
1.8
1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V

N5
1/2, 19 BI, 15 BO, 8 I, 8 V

19 binary inputs,
2.3
2.4

The technical data can be found in the manual

2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
* in preparation
SIPROTEC 5 Appendix
SIPROTEC 5 Appendix
1
Chapter
1.1
1.2
DIGSI 5 Variants and system requirements
3.1
1.3
Connection diagrams
3.2
1.4
Dimension drawings
3.3
1.5
Grouping of measured values
3.4
1.6
Technical data
3.5
1.7
Spare parts / Accessories
3.6
1.8
Legal notice
3.7
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3 / 2 SIPROTEC 5 Devices Protection, Automation and Monitoring Siemens SIPROTEC 5.01 Edition 3
Appendix
Description
Overview of functions
DIGSI 5 is the versatile engineering tool for parameterization,

commissioning and operating all SIPROTEC 5 devices. Its
innovative user interface includes context-sensitive user
instructions. Simple connection to the device via USB enables
you to work with a device easily and efciently. The full
capabilities of DIGSI 5 are revealed when you connect it to a
network of protection devices: Then you can work with all of
the devices in a substation in one project.
DIGSI 5 is tailored to specic requirements. The free software

variant DIGSI 5 Compact provides everything that is required for
a single device. For complex scenarios with multiple devices,
the DIGSI 5 Standard version is suitable. DIGSI 5 Premium
contains the full functionality you need to raise your productivity to a new level. The functionalities of the various DIGSI 5
variants are listed in Table 3.1/ 2 Overview of functions of the
various DIGSI 5 variants.
DIGSI 5 offers superior usability and is optimized for your

work processes. Only the information you actually need to
carry out your tasks is shown. These can be reduced further
using expanded lter mechanisms. The consistent use of
sophisticated, uniform mechanisms in the user interfaces
requires less training.
The available DVD contains all components in English, German,

Portuguese, Spanish and Russian. More languages will be added
in the future. The delivered package includes USB cables for
connecting directly to the PC, memory sticks with the licenses
for installing the program, and a protection unit.
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
DIGSI 5
2.3
2.4
Device Engineering &

System Engineering
System Specication
2.5
Device Specication
Device Conguration
2.6
2.7
System Conguration
2.8
2.9
SIP5-0019.EN.ai
Device Parameterization
Fig. 3.1 / 1
Structure of the engineering process
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Appendix
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Hardware requirements
Software requirements
Intel Celeron Dual Core 2,2 GHz (Ivy/Sandy Bridge)
The following operating systems are supported:
5 GB available hard disk space (Solid State Disk (SSD)

recommended)
Windows XP
2 GB RAM (8 GB recommended)
Grak Display HD ready with resolution of
1280x1024 or 1376x768 Pixels
DVD-ROM drive
Keyboard and mouse
USB port.
MS Windows 7
MS Windows 8.1
VM Ware Support for virtual machines running under one of
the operating systems listed above.
A complete list of supported operating systems is included in
the product information for DIGSI 5. The delivered equipment
contains device templates and an online manual, including
service (download of updates via the internet, hotline).
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
Ordering data for DIGSI 5 variants
Description
2.3
2.4
DIGSI 5 Compact
DIGSI 5 Standard
DIGSI 5 Premium with SIGRA
Software for conguration and use of

individual SIPROTEC 5 protection devices
manufactured by Siemens and reading
out process data from SIPROTEC 5
devices (projects are limited to a single
device).
As for DIGSI 5 Compact, but without

constraint as to the number of
SIPROTEC 5 devices supported per
project, including system congurator
for IEC 61850.
As for DIGSI 5 Standard, but with

integrated test and startup functionality,
including the option to create test
sequences and run them in the
protection device without external test
equipment.
The editors for function charts

(CFC), graphic single line and device
conguration are also included.
IEC 61850 also supports exible

engineering and functional naming.
SIGRA for professional fault record

analysis is available as an option.
2.5
2.6
Features
All features are listed in table 3.1 / 2

Overview of functions of DIGSI 5
variants.

variants.

variants.
Authorization
No license key necessary
Authorization required using the license

key on the USB stick; can be used on one
computer per license.
Authorization required using the license

key on the USB stick; can be used on one
computer per license.
Available operating English, German, Portuguese, Spanish,

languages
Russian, French and Turkish (selectable)
English, German, Portuguese, Spanish,

English, German, Portuguese, Spanish,

Included in the
scope of delivery
Program, device driver and online

documentation on DVD-ROM
Product information (paper)
Includes a test license valid for 30 days,
for free testing of DIGSI 5 Premium
USB cable for connecting a PC / laptop
computer and all SIPROTEC 5 device
types

USB stick with the ordered number of
licenses. The program can be used on
one computer per license.
Includes a test license valid for 30 days
for free testing of DIGSI 5 Premium
types

USB stick with the ordered number of
licenses. The program can be used on
one computer per license.
types
Order No.
PV178
without SIGRA
P1V24
P1V48
P1V376
PV123 (1 license)
PV185 (5 licenses)
PV130 (10 licenses)
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
For additional order numbers,

for example for updates and upgrades,
please refer to the order congurator.
3.2
3.3
with SIGRA
P1V246
(1 license)
P1V31
(5 licenses)
P1V253
(10 licenses)
Table 3.1 / 1
Ordering data for DIGSI 5 variants
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
For additional order numbers,

for example for updates and upgrades,
please refer to the order congurator.
Appendix
Overview of functions for DIGSI 5 variants
Premium
unlimited
unlimited
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
{
predefined only
1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
Display fault records
Loading settings for the selected device

Commissioning and testing
Creating and running multistage test sequences, no external operating tools necessary
Test views for testing the device conguration
Ofine function chart (CFC) analysis (debugging)
Export and import
SCL formats (IEC 61850 formats)
Devices (full and partial)
Topology, settings, information allocations and communication assignments
Single lines/Topology
COMTRADE Viewer
COMTRADE Viewer
(SIGRA available as
optional package)
SIGRA
z
z
z
z
z
Secure connection to the device

Conguration data protected from alteration
Conrmation codes for safeguarding critical activities (e.g. switching)
Legend:
z
z
z
z
WMF export only
2.4
2.5
2.6
z
z
z
2.7
2.9
2.10
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Displays
Test object denition (XRIO)
Documentation
Printing and exporting project documentation
Creation of user-dened print formats
Safeguarding and security
Authorization of access to devices with NERC CIP-compatible password
Overview of functions for DIGSI 5 variants
Standard
1.1
Project processing
Maximum number of devices per project
Copy and paste
Multilingualism is supported
Single lines and device displays
Single line editor with ANSI and IEC standard symbols available
Device display editor enables creation of user-dened displays and symbols
Setting parameters and routing
Information allocations including ltering and sorting
Graphical visualization of protection parameters
Comparison of devices ((ofine/ofine - ofine/online)
Continuous function charts (CFC)
Graphical function chart (CFC) editor included
Communication
Assignment of communications to system interface
Assignment of communications to various protocols
Graphical network view of devices
Inter-device communication
IEC 61850
IEC 61850 Edition 2 will be fully supported
IEC 61850 Flexible engineering
Access and communication
Via USB and Ethernet
Access to communication partners via system interface
Online
Measured values (current values, minimum, maximum, average values)
and storage in the project as snapshots
Messages (and storage in the project as snapshots)
Logs and records
Table 3.1 / 2
Compact
2.8
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
z Feature available
3.5
Feature not available
3.6
{ Feature available but conditional, the constraint is described
3.7
Appendix
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Fig 3.1 / 2
One IEC 61850 System congurator for all devices in the station
IEC 61850 System Congurator

For vendor independent sytem conguration using IEC 61850
devices (SIPROTEC, Reyrolle and third-party devices).
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Appendix
Connection diagrams
1
1.1
1.2
B1
B2
=
(~)
+
3RZHUVXSSO\
3OXJLQPRGXOH
SRVLWLRQ
%,
%,
%,
%
%
%
%
1.3
3OXJLQPRGXOH
SRVLWLRQ
(~)
$
$
1.4
1.5
1.6
'VXE
5-
5-
3OXJLQPRGXOHSRVLWLRQ
1.7
%2
%2
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
/LIHFRQWDFW
PS101
1.8
1.9
CB202
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Fig. 3.2 / 1
Connection diagram for the PS101
Fig. 3.2 / 3
Connection diagram for the CB202
2.5
3OXJLQPRGXOH
SRVLWLRQ
%
%
%
%
3OXJLQPRGXOH
SRVLWLRQ
%,
%,
%,
2.6
'VXE
2.7
2.8
'VXE
5-
5-
%2

%2
/LIHFRQWDFW
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
3RZHUVXSSO\
( ~)
$
$
2.9
2.10
PS203
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
PS201
7HFKQLFDOGDWDOLNHW\SH)EXWVZLWFKLQJWLPHPV
=
(~)
+
B1
B2
3.6
Fig. 3.2 / 2
Fig. 3.2 / 4
3.7
Appendix
Connection diagrams
1
1.1
1.2
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
,
%2[
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
,
%2[
,
,
%2[
%,[
%2[
%2[
%2[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
'
'
'
'
%,[
%,[
1&
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%2[
%2[
%2[
%2[
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1&
%2[
%2[
%2[
IO110
IO101
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Fig. 3.2 / 5
Connection diagram for the IO101
Fig. 3.2 / 7
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
,
,
%2[
%
%
%
%
%
%
9
9
9
%2[
%2[
%2[
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
,
%2[
,
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
'
'
'
'
&
'
&
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
9
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
,
%2[
,
%2[
,
%2[
,
%2[
1)
%,[
%2[
1)
%,[
%2[
1)
%
%
%
%
%
%
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
)
)
)
%,[
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
IO201
IO102
1)
3.4
%2[
3.5
3.6
3.7
8VHWKHVHWHUPLQDOVWRURRWWKHELQDU\LQSXWV
2.5
Fig. 3.2 / 6
Fig. 3.2 / 8
Connection diagram for the IO201 (F: Fast relay)
Appendix
Connection diagrams
1
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%2[
%2[
%2[
%2[
9
%2[
1.1
%
%
%
%
%
%
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
)
)
)
9
1.2
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
9
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
IO202
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
%,[
%2[
%,[
%2[
%,[
%2[
%,[
%2[
6
6
6
6
%,[
%,[
%2[
%,[
%2[
%,[
%2[
%,[
%2[
1.3
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
$
$
&
&
9DX[
9DX[
0
0
&
&
0
0
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
%,[
IO204
2.2
2.3
2.4
&
'
&
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
9
%2[
Fig. 3.2 / 9
Fig. 3.2 / 11
Connection diagram for the IO204 (S: Standard relay)
2.5
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
'
'
'
'
'
'
,
,
,
,
%2[
%2[
%2[
%2[
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
)
)
)
,
,
,
,
%,[
%,[
1)
%,[
%2[
1)
%,[
%2[
%,[
%2[
%,[
%2[
1)
1)
1)
%,[
%2[
1)
%,[
%2[
%,[
%2[
1)
1)
%,[
%2[
1)
%,[
%2[
1)
%,[
%2[
%,[
%2[
1)
1)
%,[
%2[
%2[
%,[
%,[
%2[
IO203
%2[
%2[
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
%
%
%
%
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
IO205
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
%
$
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Fig. 3.2 / 10
Fig. 3.2 / 12
3.7
Appendix
Connection diagrams
1
1.2
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
1.3
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
1)
%,[
%2[
1)
%,[
%2[
%,[
%2[
%,[
%2[
1)
%,[
%2[
1)
%,[
%2[
1)
1)
%2[
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
6
6
6
6
6
6
IO206
2.1
8VHWKHVHWHUPLQDOVWRURRWWKHELQDU\
LQSXWV
1.4
2.2
2.3
,
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
%2[
,
%2[
,
%2[
,
%2[
9
9
9
9
%2[
%2[
%2[
%2[
%2[
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
%
%
%
%
%
%
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
'
&
'
'
'
)
)
)
)
)
6
6
6
%2[
%2[
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
IO208
1.1
2.4
Fig. 3.2 / 13
Fig. 3.2 / 15
Connection diagram for the IO208 (F: Fast relay, S: Standard relay)
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
1)
%,[
%2[
%,[
%2[
%,[
%2[
%,[
%2[
%,[
%2[
1)
1)
1)
1)
%,[
%2[
1)
%,[
%2[
%,[
%2[
1)
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
%
%
%
%
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
1)
1)
%,[
%2[
%,[
%2[
%,[
%2[
%,[
%2[
1)
1)
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
HS
HS
HS
HS
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
IO209
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
IO207
&
&
&
&
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
2.6
1)
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
%
$
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
LQSXWV
2.5
3.6
3.7
Fig. 3.2 / 14
Fig. 3.2 / 16
Connection diagram for the IO209 (HS: High-speed relay)
Appendix
Connection diagrams
1
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
9
9
9
9
,
,
,
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
9
9
9
9
%,[
%,[
&
'
&
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
IO211
Fig. 3.2 / 19
9
%2[
%2[
%2[
%2[
)
)
%2[
%2[
9
1.1
%
%
%
%
%
%
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
9
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
9
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
1.8
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
IO215
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Fig. 3.2 / 17
,
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
&
&
&
&
&

'
&

'

'
'

'
'
'

'
'

'

'
'

'
'
2.5
,
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
,
%2[
,
%2[
,
%2[
9
%2[
%
%
%
%
%
%
&
&
&
&
&
)
)
)
9
9
9
1)
%,[
1)
%,[
IO214
2.6
2.7
2.8
&
'
&
'
%2[
LQSXWV
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Fig. 3.2 / 18
3.7
Appendix
Connection diagrams
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
(
((
(
((
(
((
(
((
(
((
(
((
(
((
(
((
*
**
*
**
*
**
*
**
*
**
*
**
*
**
*
**
+
++
+
++
+
++
+
++
+
++
+
++
+
++
+
++
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
%,[
2.6
2.7
$
$$
$
$$
$
$$
$
$$
$
$$
$
$$
$
$$
$
$$
&
&&
&
&&
&
&&
&
&&
&
&&
&
&&
&
&&
&
&&
'
''
'
''
'
''
'
''
'
''
'
''
'
''
'
''
IO230
Fig. 3.2 / 20
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Appendix
Dimension drawings
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
DwEinBoh-060812-enUS-01.tif
1.9
Fig. 3.3 / 1
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Cut-Out Widths and Drilling Pattern
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
DwBOSOP1-070211-enUS-01.tif
3.2
Fig. 3.3 / 2
Cut-Out Widths and Drilling Pattern for the 2nd Device Row
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Appendix
Dimension drawings
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Fig. 3.3 / 3
Device Drilling Pattern
Fig. 3.3 / 4
Devices with detached on-site operation panel, dimensions of the side and front views
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Appendix
Dimension drawings
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Fig. 3.3 / 5
Devices with integrated on-site operation panel, dimensions of the side and front views
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Appendix
1
1.1
Grouping of base measured values

Measured values
Description
Operational measured values
Calculation of RMS and output according to denition

Phase current IL1, IL2, IL3
Ground current IN, INS (sensitive)
Phase-to-ground voltages VL1, VL2, VL3
Phase-to-phase voltages V12, V23, V31
Residual voltage VNE
Frequency f
P, Q, S (three-phase, phase-specic)
Power factor
Fundamental and symmetrical

components
Calculation of phasor variables with Fourier lter or according to transformation rule

Phase currents IL1, IL2, IL3
Ground current IN, INS (sensitive)
Phase-to-ground voltages VL1, VL2, VL3
Phase-to-phase voltages V12, V23, V31
Residual voltage VNE
Symmetrical components I0, I1, I2, V0, V1, V2
Protection-specic measured
values
Measured values that are especially calculated for individual protection functions such as
Distance protection (reactances and resistances of phase loops)
Differential protection (differential and restraint current, charge currents per phase)
Energy values
Metered values are determined for active and reactive energy. Restore time, restore interval and counting mode
are adjustable. Restoring can also be initiated via a binary input.
The following metered values are available:
Active energy Wp+ (release), Wp (uptake)
Reactive energy Wq+ (release), Wq (uptake)
Statistical values
The following statistical values are formed:

Total number of times the circuit breaker was triggered
Number of times the circuit breaker was tripped, broken down by circuit breaker pole
Total sum of primary breaking currents
Sum of primary breaking currents, separately for each breaker pole
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Mean values
Mean values can be calculated on the basis of the operational measured values and the symmetrical components.
The time slot for mean value generation and the output interval are parameterizable.
Minimum values and

maximum values
The minimum/maximum values can be generated on the basis of operational measured values, symmetrical
components and selected measured values (e.g., from average values). The display of minimum and maximum
values contains the time of their occurrence.
The calculation is stabilized against smaller value uctuations in currents and voltages.
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Appendix
Technical data
Analog inputs
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Appendix
Technical data
Analog inputs (cont.)
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Appendix
Technical data
Supply Voltage
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Appendix
Technical data
Supply Voltage (cont.)
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Binary Inputs
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Appendix
Technical data
Relay Outputs
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Appendix
Technical data
Relay Outputs (cont.)
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Appendix
Technical data
Light-Emitting Diodes in the On-Site Operation Panel
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Appendix
Technical data
Time-Synchronization Interface
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Appendix
Technical data
Electrical tests
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Appendix
Technical data
Electrical tests (cont.)
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Appendix
Technical data
Electrical tests (cont.)
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Appendix
Technical data
Mechanical Tests
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Appendix
Technical data
Environmental Conditions
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Appendix
Technical data
Reference Conditions and Inuencing Variables
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Appendix
Technical data
Design Data
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Appendix
Technical data
Design data (cont.)
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Appendix
Overview of spare parts
1
1.1
The following spare parts can be ordered for the

SIPROTEC 5 module. Selection is made in plain text
in the SIPROTEC congurator.
1.2
Items
per package unit
Ordering No.
(Short Product Code)
1.3
Voltage terminal, 14-pole

Voltage terminal, 2-pole, for auxiliary voltage
connection
Type A*- Current terminal, 4x protection
Type A* - Current terminal, 3x protection,
1x sensitive
Type A* - Current terminal, 4x measurement
Type B**- Current terminal, 4x protection
Type B**- Current terminal, 3x protection,
1x sentitive
Terminals for IO110** for plug-in M and N
8
2
P1Z499
P1Z505
1.4
1
1
P1Z512
P1Z529
1
1
1
P1Z536
P1Z1869
P1Z1647
P1Z1656
2-pole cross connector for current terminals

2-pole cross connector for voltage terminals
3
6
P1Z543
P1Z550
Cover for voltage terminal

Cover for current terminal
8
1
P1Z574
P1Z567
Cover plate for empty plug-in module

mounting position
P1Z680
Cable set for assembly of communication

expansion board CB202 (COM link)
P1Z673
Set of labeling strips for LEDs and keypad
10
P1Z697
2
2
2
2
1
P1Z703
P1Z710
P1Z727
P1Z734
P1Z666
Cover plate for bus terminationd

Screw cover for base module with housing
width 1/3 x 19
Screw cover for expansion modules with
housing width 1/6 x 19
2
4
P1Z1496
P1Z901
P1Z1281
Cable set for surface mounting devices

with detached operation panel, 2,50 m
(for conversion of surface mounting devices
with integrated operation panel into surface
mounting devices with detached operation
panel)
P1Z1878
Cable set for surface mounting devices

with detached operation panel, 5,0 m
(for conversion of surface mounting devices
with integrated operation panel into surface
mounting devices with detached operation
panel)
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
Accessories for devices with surfacemounting housing and with integrated

operation panel
Set of mounting brackets 1/2 x 19"
Cable set long, 0.43 m, for connection of
integrated operation panel
2.4
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
P1Z2132
3
3.1
3.2
Sensors for arc protection

Point sensor 3m
Point sensor 4m
Point sensor 5m
Point sensor 10m
Point sensor 15m
Point sensor 20m
2.5
1
1
1
1
1
1
P1X19
P1X28
P1X37
P1X46
P1X55
P1X64
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
* For all modular SIPROTEC 5 devices, not for non-modular devices 7xx82
** For all non-modular SIPROTEC 5 devices 7xx82
3.7
Appendix
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Appendix
Legal notice
Indication of conformity
Copyright
This product complies with the directive of

the Council of the European Communities
on harmonization of the laws of the Member
States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Council Directive
2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment
for use within specied voltage limits (Low Voltage Directive
2006/95/EC).
Copyright Siemens AG 2014. All rights reserved.

The disclosure, duplication, distribution and editing of this
document, or utilization and communication of the content
are not permitted, unless authorized in writing. All rights,
including rights created by patent grant or registration of a
utility model or a design, are reserved.
This conformity has been proved by tests performed according

to the Council Directive in accordance with the generic standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 (for EMC directive) and
with the standard EN 60255-27 (for Low Voltage Directive) by
Siemens AG.
The device is designed and manufactured for application in an
industrial environment.
The product conforms with the international standards of IEC
60255 and the
German standard VDE 0435.
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
Registered trademarks
1.4
SIPROTEC, DIGSI, SIGUARD, SIMEAS, and SICAM

are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Any unauthorized
use is illegal. All other designations in this document
can be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own
purposes can infringe the rights of the owner.
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
Disclaimer of liability
This document has been subjected to rigorous technical
review before being published. It is revised at regular intervals,
and any modications and amendments are included
in the subsequent issues. The content of this document
has been compiled for information purposes only. Although
Siemens AG has made best efforts to keep the document
as precise and up-to-date as possible, Siemens AG shall
not assume any liability for defects and damage which
result through use of the information contained herein.
This content does not form part of a contract or of business
relations; nor does it change these. All obligations of
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Siemens AG are stated in the relevant contractual agreements.

Siemens AG reserves the right to revise this documentfrom time
to time.
Document Edition: 03
Release status: 12.2014
2.6
Version of the product described: V6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Published by and copyright 2014:

Siemens AG
Energy Management
Humboldtstr. 59
90459 Nuremberg, Germany
All rights reserved.
If not stated otherwise on the individual pages of this
catalog, we reserve the right to include modifications,
especially regarding the stated values, dimensions and
weights.
Drawings are not binding.
All product designations used are trademarks or
product names of Siemens AG or other suppliers.
If not stated otherwise, all dimensions in this catalog
are given in mm.
Subject to change without prior notice.
The information in this document contains general
descriptions of the technical options available, which
may not apply in all cases. The required technical
options should therefore be specified in the contract.
For all products using security features of OpenSSL the
following shall apply:
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL
Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)
This product includes cryptographic software written by
Eric Young ([email protected])
For more information, please contact our
Article No. IC1000-K4605-A011-A3-7600
Customer Support Center.
Printed in Germany
Phone: +49 180 524 84 37
Dispo 06200, SIMC-0000-45177
Fax:
KG 12.14 1.1 290 EN
+49 180 524 24 71
(Charges depending on provider)

E-Mail: [email protected]
Printed on elementary chlorine-free bleached paper.

Siemens Siprotec 5 Catalog Ed3.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Siemens Siprotec 5 Catalog Ed3.0

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Siemens Siprotec 5 Catalog Ed3.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIPROTEC 5 for every application and requirement

Overview of documentation for the SIPROTEC 5 system

The catalog describes the system features and the devices

The product information includes general information about

Selection guide for SIPROTEC and Reyrolle

Editorial / SIPROTEC 5 System

IEC 61850 Simply Usable

Test and Diagnostics

Relay Selection Guide

Overcurrent Protection SIPROTEC 7SJ82, 7SJ85

The products and systems described in this catalog

Motor Protection SIPROTEC 7SK82, 7SK85

Busbar Protection SIPROTEC 7SS85

Bay Controller SIPROTEC 6MD85, 6MD86

Fault Recorder SIPROTEC 7KE85

DIGSI 5 Variants and System Requirements

Grouping Measured Values

Spare Parts / Accessories

The SIPROTEC 5 System

The SIPROTEC 5 System

SIPROTEC has established itself on the energy market for

SIPROTEC protection relays have approvals from many users

As the innovation driver and trendsetter in the eld of

Fig. 1.1/ 1 SIPROTEC family

How can system operators benet from this experience?

Easy integration into your system

Highest quality of hardware and software

Reduced complexity by easy operation

Fig. 1.1 / 2 SIPROTEC Pioneer over generations

The SIPROTEC 5 System

SIPROTEC 5 the new benchmark for protection,

Thanks to the high modularity of hardware and software, the

Fig. 1.1 / 3 SIPROTEC 5 modular hardware

Powerful protection functions guarantee the safety of the

Powerful communication components guarantee safe and

Ethernet redundancy protocols RSTP, PRP and HSR for highest

Efcient operating concepts by exible engineering of

Fig. 1.1 / 4 SIPROTEC 5 modular process connection

Comprehensive database for monitoring of modern power

Fig. 1.1 / 5 Application in a high-voltage power system

For you, Holistic workow in SIPROTEC 5 means:

Integrated tools for testing during engineering,

SIPROTEC 5 sets new standards in cost savings and availability

Easily adaptable library of application templates for the most

Simple, intuitive graphical linking of primary and secondary

Manufacturer-independent tool for easy system engineering

End-to-end tools from design to operation

With SIPROTEC 5, Siemens is writing yet another chapter in the

SIPROTEC 5 innovation highlights

Perfectly tailored t with SIPROTEC 5 means:

Designed to communicate with SIPROTEC 5 means:

Modular system design in hardware, software and

Adaptation to the topology of your communication structure

Functional integration of a wide range of applications, such

Scalable redundancy in hardware and software (protocols) to

The same expansion and communication modules for all

Innovative terminal technology ensures easy assembly and

Identical functions and consistent interfaces throughout the

Multiple communication channels with various higher-level

Fig. 1.2 / 3 SIPROTEC 5 device with extensive communication interfaces